The Global Financial System Is About To Shift: Part I
October 13 2016 | From: TheMindUnleashed Behind all the chatter of who will be the United States’ next President, there is something much larger playing out. Something bigger than most people could even believe.
Though what you are about to read is indeed real and will soon be undeniable.
With almost all of the “real” money, that being gold, silver, metals, jewels and all the legitimate notes, bond and certificates, the nations of the Eastern hemisphere are poised to shift the entire global financial system back to the rightful owners of this massively large cache of assets.
What is known as the global collateral accounts, is something John F. Kennedy was working on opening up for humanity. These accounts are what the Bretton Woods agreement was based upon (though fraudulently). These accounts are what almost every nation and what all of the big banks have been unlawfully abusing.
Now though, an international alliance is working together to open these accounts for the benefit of humanity, which is being spearheaded by a man known as Neil Keenan. Here are answers from Neil Keenan directly to questions we have asked him.
Neil Keenan, John F Kennedy and President Soekarno
Related: To learn more about Neil Keenan and his work visit neilkeenan.com - in particular the History & Events Timeline
This has been done as to educate a larger audience on what the global collateral accounts are as well as to prepare that same audience for the large events that will be occurring in the very near future.
Q: For those that don’t know what the global collateral accounts are, can you give us an explanation of what they are and what purpose they are used for?
The term Global Collateral Accounts refers to the vast holdings of a Chinese consortium of depositors known as The Dragon Family and their legacy is centuries old. These physical assets are for the most part located in Asia in secure underground facilities comprising a total value in the order of 94 Quadrillion US Dollars.
Primarily the asset holdings are comprised of gold bullion, along with other precious metals and gemstones plus a great deal of paper currency, notes and bonds.
The Silk Road or Silk Route was an ancient network of trade routes that for centuries were central to cultural interaction through regions of the Asian continent connecting the East and West from China to the Mediterranean Sea
The accumulation of these assets began centuries ago, largely by way of the Silk Road trade routes which saw great wealth accumulated by those in the equatorial region where there was an abundance of resources and produce, that were purchased by people in other parts of the world – in gold.
These were the days when payments were made in tangible assets with real value – not FIAT currencies represented by worthless paper. There have been many attempts to steal from the asset pool of the Global Collateral Accounts over the centuries, and in part, the reason why these assets have come to be stored in bunkers in South East Asia, was for safe keeping.
Count Albert of the Dragon Family with Neil Keenan
The assets are watched over and protected by local family groups who are known as The Elders.Unfortunately some of these people, after a few generations in their role as guardians have come to confuse the terms “guardian” with the “depositor.”
Q: Who is / are the Dragon Family? What is their role with the global collateral accounts?
The Dragon Family is, in fact, a organization that operates between old families within China and Taiwan, above the political divide of the two independent Chinese Governments.
The Chinese are remarkable in this regard in that old family ties and functions supersede political arrangements which, though they might last for generations, are regarded as inconsequential over the passage of time to most Chinese.
Attached to this is the wealth of several nations. The Dragon Family abstains from any public view and knowledge but acts for the good and better benefit of the World and have had to deal with higher levels of the global financial Organizations, Committee of 300 and in particular, the Federal Reserve System.
The Mount Washington Hotel, situated in Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, United States
The Golden Dragons (Dragon Family) signed an agreement with the BIS / Bretton Woods / China in 1944 in which their assets would be implemented as collateral in order to be used by the world at large for humanitarian purposes. At all times the Dragon Family have been considered as being the Depositors.
This agreement was not signed by the Committee of 300 and / or the Federal Reserve or anything as of any official status, but by the nations at large including the “United States” which was not a real government but a corporation controlled by foreign interests.
Additionally, the US government borrowed a huge amount of collateral assets from the Dragon Family many years ago. The base of the lent asset funds from the Dragon Family to the US Government were the Gold and Silver. Therefore the US government was able to issue huge amounts of USD as currencies (FRN’s) via the FRB system.
During the course of their relations over the last century, the Dragon Family has accumulated great wealth (and Trillions and Trillions in interest payments still owing), in the form of a variety of Notes, Bonds and Certificates that are an Obligation of the Federal Reserve System.
The Federal Reserve Bank of New York
These Bonds have values ranging in the many thousand of Trillions of United States dollars. The Western nations are run at the discretion of the Committee of 300 and a number of nefarious collectives with various factions and groups including “The hidden Hand” and “The Federal Reserve System” and many other such criminal outfits that worked towards maintaining control over the Western hemisphere and its people.
This essentially is where we end up with the NWO.
The Dragon Family’s investment was with respect to the best interests of the UN termed “Third World nations” and especially such berated nations, however the stated intentions never made it to manifestation in said lands; which was absolutely prevented by the Khazarian-run globalists who have been hiding within Judaism as cover and leveraging the anti-semitism as a crybaby diversion for centuries.
The Humanitarian accounts were illegally and fraudulently repatriated almost immediately upon signing of the Bretton Woods agreement and this has continued unabatedly almost o this day.
The financial doors have been closed to the cabal for a while and we are now observing the beginnings of a resistance-driven man-made collapse / subversion of Cabal control.
The Cabal-driven West have been laboriously attempting to engineer a financial collapse given that they control much of the food production and finance – thereby leaving you, the people with little or nothing other than starvation or slavery should they allow you to live only to be sucked dry by financial usury, unlawful taxation and the pharmaceutical industry, to name but three machinations within their armory of assault.
The United Nations Agenda 21, and now also Agenda 2030 states publicly and in their own writing for anyone to see that they wish to eliminate 80% of the people on the planet.
A final note here is that the theft of the Global Collateral Accounts by the West did not include the Dragon Family, therefore the East has waited a very long time to be finally in control of their own destiny without Western interference. Although the Cabal are attempting to create a Third World War so that everyone is taken down with them.
Q: Was JFK was working with President Sukarno of Indonesia to open the accounts?
Yes. In 1963, President John F. Kennedy entered into an Agreement with President Sukarno to provide the funds to allow the United States Treasury to print its own currency, thus subverting the “right” to print the currency held by the Federal Reserve. [Note: Some publications spell “Sukarno” as “Soekarno” but it should be made clear that both spellings refer to the same man, unless the author of any particular piece of writing is confused.]
JFK, Soekarno and Johnson
The Agreement would have transferred some 59,000 tons of gold to underpin this currency. The problem with this was that the US domestic currency would have then been backed by gold which would have been a violation of international agreements meant to stabilize currencies.
Pictures don’t lie. John Kennedy was emotionally high at this meeting, as was Sukarno, but unbeknownst to them, Vice President Johnson was a member of secret societies, the likes of which Kennedy had spoken against.
My Pentagon sources advised me that Johnson was involved in the murder of JFK. The entire scenario was set up not only because of what Kennedy was doing in terms of ending the Federal Reserve System and replacing it with the new United States Treasury currency, but also with regards to the dismantling of the CIA.
In addition it involved both Texaco and Standard Oil and their loss of income in West Papua.
In delivering all of the information that Johnson was getting from Kennedy and Sukarno in Washington D.C. to his cabal bosses, the Cabal managed to stop Kennedy from moving forward by assassinating him.
With their plans, the Cabal had to stop Kennedy because he wanted to take down the Illuminati et al and the Federal Reserve System. The daily reports to the Cabal from Lyndon Johnson in Jakarta, Indonesia, doomed Kennedy to his assassination.
For his painstaking efforts, a CIA coup saw Sukarno removed from presidency and replaced by General Suharto, who then imposed a lifetime of home imprisonment upon Sukarno.
Upon Kennedy’s return to the United States, he was assassinated in Dallas, Texas, Lyndon Johnson’s home state. Furthermore it has been reported that before JFK was even officially declared dead, Lyndon Johnson himself had been sworn in as the new President of the United States.
Now do you believe that Lee Harvey Oswald killed JFK? Absolutely not. Lyndon Johnson, George H.W. Bush and the Cabal were responsible for the assassination of JFK.
Eight days after signing the Green Hilton Memorial agreement with President Sukarno of Indonesia, President Kennedy was assassinated. President Johnson suspended the EO-11110 as issued by Kennedy and transferred the bullion to the Federal Reserve. In Indonesia, President Sukarno was gradually being placed under house arrest.
The Green Hilton Agreement was not implemented until 1968 when Sukarno fell from office and at a time when Global Trade made it imperative to have a Global Currency.
Q: What is your role with these accounts and how were you chosen to be involved?
It all started when I (Neil Keenan) was approached by the Dragon Family (DF), through a diplomat representative named Akihko Yamaguchi.
Akihko Yamaguchi and Neil Keenan
Because of the assistance and political connections that I had provided him with previously, Yamaguchi persistently sought out myself to provide direct services on his behalf related to international banking and trading transactions in furtherance of Dragon family humanitarian programs (which are to be implemented when the Global Collateral Accounts are lawfully opened).
Q: What is the Monaco Accords and what was accomplished there?
In August of 2011, myself and a very powerful political associate arranged a secret meeting of 57 global finance ministers (none from any Western nations) aboard a yacht in Monaco for the purpose of setting up a new worldwide, asset-backed financial system.
Word of the gathering reached the Rockefellers, the pre-eminent U.S. clan of that oligarchy, who dispatched Senator Jay Rockefeller to essentially “crash” the party as an uninvited guest.
I physically blocked Rockefeller at the gangplank. When Rockefeller demanded;
“Don’t you know who I am?” I responded, “Yes, you’re exactly the person we don’t want on this boat.”
After Rockefeller’s unceremonious ejection, the yacht was then buzzed by Blackhawk helicopters before French fighter jets gave a warning pass overhead, whereupon the helicopters retreated.
Within several months, the agreement realized from that meeting, the “Monaco Accords,” was made official by its co-hosts, and that document has now been signed by over 180 countries. This was an unprecedented collective step toward wresting control from the criminal planetary domination by the West. Out of this was born the BRICS alliance.
Note that Part 2 to this interview will be released on Thursday October 13th. Neil will answer how much gold is actually in existence with these accounts, what role the BRICS is playing, which governments and agencies he is working with and what role Vladimir Putin is playing on a global level.
In the meantime, check out these related articles:
Out Of Hand: More People Are Using More Devices More Often Than Ever Before - Increasingly, That’s A Pain Point October 13 2016 | From: Buzzfeed For Cassandra Smolcic, the trouble began at her dream internship. Handpicked to spend a summer working on movies at Pixar, the 26-year-old logged marathon hours, and more than a few all-nighters, at her computer and tablet.
At first, she managed to ignore the mysterious pinching sensations in her hands and forearms. But by the time her internship ended and a full-time job offer rolled in, she could barely move her fingers.
For Skylar, a 12-year-old in South Florida who loves her laptop, phone, and tablet, the breaking point came at the start of sixth grade last fall. Suddenly her neck, shoulders, and back felt strained whenever she rolled her head, as if invisible hands were yanking muscles apart from the inside. All her neck-rolling, she worried, made her look like she was trying to cheat off someone’s test.
To be a perpetually plugged-in, emailing, texting, sexting, swiping, Snapchatting, selfie-taking human being in 2016, a little thumb twinge is the price of admission. There are the media-anointed outliers: the Candy Crusher with a ruptured thumb tendon, the woman who over-texted her way to “WhatsAppitis.”
And then there are people like the 18-year-old woman who said;
“If I’m scrolling down Tumblr for more than half an hour, my fingers will get sore.”
“When I hold my phone,” a 22-year-old complained, cradling her iPhone in her palm, “my bottom finger really hurts.”
A 30-year-old software engineer said his fingers “naturally curl inwards,” claw-like: “I remember my hand did not quite use to be like that.”
Amy Luo, 27, suspects her iPhone 6s is partly to blame for the numbness in her right thumb and wrist.
Compared with her old iPhone, she said, “you have to stretch a lot more, and it’s heavier.”
Dr. Patrick Lang, a San Francisco hand surgeon, sees more and more twenty- and thirtysomething tech employees with inexplicable debilitating pain in their upper limbs. “I consider it like an epidemic,” he said, “particularly in this city.”
To be clear, no one knows just how bad this “epidemic” is. At best, we learn to endure our stiff necks and throbbing thumbs. At worst, a generation of people damage their bodies without realizing it.
In all likelihood, we are somewhere in the middle, between perturbance and public health crisis, but for the time being we simply don’t - can’t - know what all these machines will do to our bodies in the long term, especially in the absence of definitive research.
What we do know is that now more people are using multiple electronics - cell phones, smartphones, tablets, laptops, desktops - for more hours a day, starting at ever earlier ages.
But we weren’t built for them.
Growing up in the Rust Belt city of Greensburg, Pennsylvania, Smolcic was the kid who was always sketching characters from movies and cartoons. And in her adolescent years in the ’90s, computers became an important tool for honing her artistic talents: She made clip-art greeting cards and banners, and high school newspaper layouts, on desktop computers.
At Susquehanna University, she went all in on graphic design as a career after she took a computer arts course on a whim.
That meant long hours on various iMacs, and even more screen time when she went on to earn a master’s in graphic design at the Savannah College of Art and Design. Over the years, she’s also carried a flip phone, a Motorola Razr, a Dell laptop, and, at the moment, a MacBook Pro and an iPhone 6s.
Machines were crucial to Smolcic’s burgeoning artistic career, as they are to so many of our lives. But it’d be hard to call them human-friendly.
Our heads sit atop our necks and line up with our shoulders and arms, just as a two-footed species’ should. But a forward-leaning head shakes up this graceful arrangement: The upper body drifts back, the hips tilt forward, and pretty much everything else - the spine, the nerves below the neck, the upper limb muscles - tightens up.
Slouching is all too easy when we hold a phone in our outstretched hand or reach for a mouse. When we type on our laptops cross-legged or sprawled on our stomachs, our necks and shoulders strain from leaning into the low screens. (Yes, as counterintuitive as it sounds, you probably shouldn’t put a laptop on your lap.)
Our hands are uniquely capable of grasping objects, a useful trait for our branch–swinging primate ancestors. Especially remarkable are our opposable thumbs, free to flex, extend, curl, and press in all sorts of directions. But their inherently unstable joints didn’t evolve to be constantly pushed beyond their range of motion. Yet they are when we flick through our phones or, worse, tablets.
To Dr. Robert Markison, it’s clear: Virtually none of Silicon Valley’s inventions, from the clunky Macintosh 128K of 1984 to the sleek iPhone 7, have been designed with respect for the human form. Markison is a San Francisco surgeon who depends on his hands to operate on other people’s hands.
He so believes in technology’s potential to harm - and treats so many young startup workers who confirm that suspicion - that he almost exclusively uses voice recognition software. He also has his own line of smartphone styluses that double as pens, with colorful barrels made of manually mixed pigments, pressure-cast resin, and hand-dyed silk.
On a recent afternoon in his office, Markison asked me to make a fist around a grip strength measurement tool, with my thumb facing the ceiling. It felt powerful, easy.
Then he had me turn my palm to the floor, the keyboarding stance of a white-collar worker, and do the same thing; my grip immediately lost a noticeable amount of strength.
“There’s no reason to think a mouse is a good idea,” Markison said.
Of course, many people with office jobs probably suspect that already. During the ’80s and ’90s, when computers - then also known as “video display terminals” - invaded workplaces around the world, employees felt their arms and fingers go numb, and headlines warned of the harm these newfangled devices appeared to be inflicting.
In the early ’90s, telephone operators, journalists, clerical workers, and employees from other fields filed hundreds of lawsuits against the manufacturers of equipment such as computer keyboards, which they blamed for severe arm, wrist, and hand injuries.
All that worry woke a generation up to the physical (and psychological) toll of automated, ultra-efficient work. Then came furniture and appliances to align technology with our bodies.
Ergonomic mice are gripped vertically, and foot mice save clicks.
Slanted and split keyboards let hands relax. Desks convert to a standing position or have adjustable split levels for monitors and keyboards. Some software transcribes speech, other software alerts your boss when you type too fast.
But these inventions have been largely for desktops. The dizzying rise of cell phones, tablets, and laptops, fueled by the rush to make screens ever more portable and ubiquitous, have all but left human-centered design principles in the dust.
Chances are good you’re reading this on your phone. In fact, chances are good your phone was the first thing you looked at this morning and the last thing you looked at last night.
Wake up to a phone alarm. Scroll, bleary-eyed, through email, texts, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram. Field more news and email on your phone on public transit (or, er, in the car).
Sit behind a computer of some kind at work or school. All day your buzzing phone demands to be held, whether you’re out to lunch or, admit it, on the toilet.
Come reverse commute, you’re once again head down on your phone, or an e-reader, until you finally take a break at home - by watching Game of Thrones on your laptop or tablet. Bonus points if you play Words With Friends while you do it.
Scientists don’t definitively know how all this activity affects our bodies. While some studies link hand ailments to heavy computer and video game use, far fewer have examined new devices like smartphones.
“The phones have only been out 10 to 15 years at best,” said Jack Dennerlein, who directs the Occupational Biomechanics and Ergonomics Laboratory at Harvard University.
“We haven’t had the long-term exposures to start seeing some of the more chronic issues that come up later in life.”
No reliable measurement of technology-related ailments exists. The closest thing is an annual survey of workplace injuries by the US Bureau of Labor Statistics, whose data suggests that cases of musculoskeletal disorders, including carpal tunnel syndrome, have dropped over the last two decades.
But these figures are at best “a very crude measure” of problems, said Dr. Kurt Hegmann, who directs the University of Utah’s Rocky Mountain Center for Occupational and Environmental Health. As Dennerlein put it: “They’re better than nothing.”
Hegmann offers some theories for why the numbers are shrinking: High-risk jobs like manufacturing are decreasing. Panicked workers in the ’90s likely reported nonexistent ailments before the hysteria subsided. Some offices may have became more ergonomic.
And there are other reasons the numbers are probably off: Non-work-related factors like obesity can contribute to carpal tunnel, and if you’re constantly sending work emails but also Instagramming for fun, it’s hard to blame your sore hand on work alone.
However widespread phone-linked injuries may or may not be, a small cluster of studies suggests that they are real. A 2011 study of nearly 140 mobile device users linked internet time to right thumb pain, as well as overall screen time to right shoulder and neck discomfort.
Another found that smartphone overuse enlarges the nerve involved in carpal tunnel, causes thumb pain, and hinders the hand’s ability to do things like pinch.
Upright, an adult’s head puts about a dozen pounds of force on the spine, according to a 2014 paper. But tilted 15 degrees, as if over a phone, the force surges to 27 pounds, and to 60 pounds at 60 degrees. (That’s the weight of four Thanksgiving turkeys.)
“It’s harmful when you’re younger, because the bones are still malleable and pliable and they may be disformed permanently,” said New York spinal surgeon Dr. Kenneth Hansraj, who wrote the paper after treating a patient “head down in his iPad, playing Angry Birds four hours a day.”
Older people can suffer too, he said, because their spines are prone to narrowing, making them susceptible to injury.
But the doctor insists he’s no “cell phone basher.”
“I love the ability to have a cup of coffee and contact 10 of my friends in 10 countries with one text and say, ‘I love this coffee,’” he said.
“I’m just saying, my message is to keep your head up and be cognizant of where your head is in space.”
Skylar started using an iPad a couple years ago to watch movies in the car.
Then, at age 10, she got a MacBook Air and a rose-gold iPhone 6s, says her mother, who requested to withhold her last name to protect her identity.
Game-playing, filming lip-sync sessions, Snapchatting “weird faces,” checking Instagram, FaceTiming, and texting, not to mention doing homework on the computer, keep Skylar busy three hours or so a day.
Recently, she discovered Friends, a show about “a group of friends that do a lot of weird things and they always meet up at every single day at Central Perk. It’s a coffee shop.”
When the Pew Research Center surveyed teens in 2011, one-quarter had smartphones. In 2015, three-quarters did. According to Common Sense Media, a San Francisco nonprofit that surveyed more than 2,600 young people across the US last year, 8- to 12-year-olds log nearly two hours a day on tablets, smartphones, and other mobile devices.
And the habit starts even younger: 38% of children under 2 have played games or watched videos on a mobile device.
Even lower-income teens, who are less likely to own the latest gadgets, may be catching up to their wealthier peers: In a 2015 study of 350 children under age 5 in a low-income community in Philadelphia, most already had their own mobile device, and in fact had started using one before their first birthday.
“It’s not like an hour that goes by I don’t check my phone, unless I’m asleep, you know,” said Kendall Holle, 15.
“It’s bad. It’s bad. As soon as I wake up, open my eyes, brush my teeth, wash my face, I’m on my phone, making snaps.”
“I wake up and I start snapping,” said Jeff Ren, 19.
“When my phone got taken away,” confessed Sara, 15, “I cracked.”
“I just don’t feel normal without my phone on me now,” said Howard Lin, 18. “It would just feel like something’s missing.”
But researchers aren’t studying how so much gadget exposure, so young, affects children’s physiology - at least not to the degree they’re studying how it affects their learning, playing, and thinking.
The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that children under age 2 avoid screen time completely, and that older children have no more than two hours a day. After more than 15 years, it’s now rethinking these guidelines.
“In a world where ‘screen time’ is becoming simply ‘time,’ our policies must evolve or become obsolete,” it has explained.
When I asked if physical risks were being weighed along with social and psychological ones, Dr. Ari Brown, who’s leading the overhaul of the recommendations, told me by email that “the particular question you are asking … is not being addressed by our group.”
Meanwhile, people like Diane Cho didn’t see the pain coming and don’t know what will happen next.
At the news site she recently left, Cho spent her days typing 10 hours at a time, mostly on a laptop, and reading her phone - until her right arm went periodically numb, immune to icing.
“A huge reason why I wanted a career change was literally my arm was falling apart,” she said. “My body was just aching.” She’s 26.
George McIntire, 27, occasionally sees his right thumb act up: “It starts twitching back and forth, it’s shivering, and it’s going really fast too.”
Tanner Bell, a 17-year-old who makes DIY craft videos on YouTube and helps companies digitally market to teens, feels his thumbs cramp twice a week.
“It doesn’t even happen when I’m holding it, it could happen later on in the day or night,” he said. “There’s an extra tension … sort of like a tingling.”
After trading volleys of texts with a long-distance girlfriend, Vincent Hennerty, 26, ended up with early-stage carpal tunnel. Cutting back on video games was annoying, as was doing push-ups on his knuckles.
Still, nothing could prepare him for what one might call the ultimate sacrifice.
“When I was with girls,” he recalled, “I would either have to finger them less during sexual intercourse or messing around, or I’d have to be in a position where my wrists were completely straight.”
This, he said, “weighed on me the most: ‘I need to stop texting.’”
When neck rubs and ice packs didn’t soothe Skylar’s stiff neck, her mother took her to Dean Fishman, a local chiropractor and physical therapist. He sees so many people like her that in 2009 he started the Text Neck Institute outside Fort Lauderdale, Florida.
The clinic now handles 700 visits a month, he says.
“I started to notice very early on, when texting started to become popular as far as communicating goes, that I was seeing more and more younger people coming in with complaints we hadn’t seen before - headaches, neck pain, arm pain,” said Fishman, whose youngest patient so far has been a 3-year-old iPad-loving girl. So-called text neck “is not a blunt force trauma,” he said.
“You’re not going to see a lot of bulging or herniated discs overnight. Over time, it’s going to be microtraumas that end up being a bigger symptom for our patients.”
Patients are utterly, unnervingly unaware of their own bodies.
“When these younger people are in the middle of studying on their digital device, or if they’re in the middle of gaming or the excitement of texting with their friends, they don’t perceive pain,” Fishman said.
“It’s not until they put it down, lay down at night, and feel pain, and don’t attribute it to what they’ve been doing during the day.”
Cyrene Quiamco is not a patient, but has all the markings of a future one.
“I don’t even know when I don’t check Snapchat,” said the 27-year-old, who Snapchats for brands like MTV, Jolly Ranchers, Pixar, and Disneyland - and charges $10,000 to $30,000 per Story.
“It’s like, I’m in a restaurant, and then I don’t spend all of the time I’m there (on Snapchat), but then I spend five minutes checking what’s in my Snapchat feed. It’s not one sitting, it’s various sittings throughout the day.”
How many texts does she send a day? “Oh gosh, more than a thousand.” She added, “I never actually thought about how many that would be.”
Two to three hours a day, Quiamco draws colorful, detailed cartoons for Snapchat on her phone.
“You’re so focused on creating it because you don’t want to stop,” even when a pang runs up her forearm, she said. “I tell my mom, ‘Hey, I’m getting hand cramps by using the phone.’ She says, ‘You’re going to develop something. If you lose your hand, that’s everything.’”
As a 6-year-old, Smolcic fell in love with The Little Mermaid. As a grown-up graphic designer at Pixar, across the bay from San Francisco, she got to make her own mark on films like Monsters University, Cars 2, and Finding Dory. For Toy Story 3, she crafted the logo of pink teddy bear and chief antagonist Lots-o’-Huggin’ Bear; for the Scotland-set Brave, she whipped up Celtic patterns for furniture and costumes.
Meetings with famous directors and other “pinch me” moments overflowed during her five years there.
“There’s just all those amazing little life lessons buried into the entertainment aspect of it that do make an impact on people,” she said of Pixar’s movies. “It felt special to be part of that.”
Despite the grueling hours, Smolcic didn’t seriously believe that hand injuries could be a hazard of the trade. But once the aches arrived, they stayed.
Even when she felt normal after a monthlong break, the stabbing sensations would flare up when she jumped back into work. Pixar was supportive, she said, and gave her an elaborate work station with a motorized standing and sitting desk, a sideways mouse, programmable foot pedals, ergonomic chairs, extra monitors, and a tablet sensitive to touch.
Doctors and specialists put her through one treatment after another, some less conventional than others: acupuncture, acupressure, breathwork, massages, physical therapy, personal training, biofeedback, myofascial release, NeuroKinetic Therapy, reflexology, naturopathy.
According to some of her many medical professionals, her diagnosis was fibromyalgia, a musculoskeletal pain disorder. Others called it a “repetitive strain injury.”
That’s probably the first term that comes to mind for these types of impairments. But occupational health experts shy away from it because it lumps together a lot of different ailments. Take carpal tunnel syndrome: A compressed nerve in your forearm numbs and weakens your hand.
But painful thumb tendons, the cord-like structures that link muscle to bone, might mean de Quervain syndrome. Tendinitis (inflamed tendons) shouldn’t be confused with trigger finger (inflammation around a tendon). And for anything too vague or early-stage to neatly fit a diagnosis, there’s the handy label of “nonspecific pain.”
To make things more confusing, none of these injuries can be easily blamed on technology. You can fiddle with gadgets your whole life without a sore thumb. Or your ailment can build over years, making it hard to know whether gadgets are the sole cause.
Recovery, too, varies. All you may need to do is vigilantly sit up straight and take breaks, whereas others would need anything from a steroid shot to surgery.
These nuances can confound primary care physicians, who don’t necessarily know when to refer patients to specialists - who in turn don’t always have all the answers either.
“People go to the hand surgeons, who are frustrated because they’re not surgical patients, so they send them to therapy,” said Melanie Johnke, who runs Golden Gate Hand Therapy in San Francisco. “And I’m not a doctor, either,” meaning she can’t make official diagnoses or prescribe medications.
As Savir put it: “If I go to the doctor, what is he going to say? ‘Don’t hold your phone that way.’ What’s the point?”
Despite knowing everything we should do, from sitting straight and stretching to taking breaks and using a phone stylus, we probably don’t and won’t follow suit. And maybe that’s just how things are now. Maybe only technology can save us from ourselves.
Tech giants like Apple, Google, and Microsoft are racing to turn their machines into mind readers. Every swipe saved, every “frictionless” convenience engineered, keeps us coming back for more: It’s a business strategy that also happens to be ergonomically friendly.
Speech recognition software - Siri, “OK Google,” Alexa, Dragon - promises to take the manual labor out of internet browsing and looking up directions.
But it doesn’t work perfectly, which isn’t news to anyone who’s yelled at Siri, and it’s still kind of weird, frankly, to talk to your phone in public.
“I’m in a shared office space, and I don’t know how that would work out,” said Saima Jamshed, 42, who has chronic pain in her right arm.
Then there are the machine learning–powered apps that, seemingly magically, cue up the next word in your message, person to call, or video to watch, based on your past activity and keystrokes.
See (as of last week) Google’s new messaging app Allo, which comes with prepackaged responses and predictive texts. But accepting their help does require sacrificing privacy to an unsettling degree.
Of course, we could also use technology less. We certainly seem to want to. Virtually all 30 or so people who spoke to me wished they could leave their phones at home, stop refreshing their notifications, watch less YouTube. Asked to guess how much time this all amounted to, they answered: too much.
Cutting back would almost definitely be healthier. But we may not be willing to do that.
Skylar has almost fully recovered, thanks to physical therapy at the Text Neck Institute and exercises at home. Her mother says she’s diligent about setting her devices at eye level (and telling everyone else to as well), just like the doctor told her to. But she isn’t actually cutting back on screen time.
The peer pressure is intense: All her friends have phones, and some have iPads and computers.
“Sometimes it gets annoying when I go to a friend’s house and all we do is play on our phone or watch something on our iPad,” Skylar said. “I went to their house to play with them or hang out with them, not just go on our electronics and be silent the whole time.”
“When I was growing up,” her mother, Kerri, recalled, “the phone was in the house, so if you left the house, the phone rang and somebody would call you later.” It was a non-negotiable break when the world had to accept that you were physically untethered from your device. “Now,” Kerri said, “it’s just everywhere.”
Smolcic has largely disconnected from technology, just not by choice.
When she was 28, a pain management specialist gave her the devastating news: She would never fully recover. She hung on for a few more years, but finally left in October 2014 for a San Francisco design agency where, she hoped, her role would be less hands-on. “I really felt like I’d tried everything I could,” she said.
But the work and pain remained more or less the same, so this March, she left the agency, and design, for the foreseeable future. Her life’s work hurt.
Since then, she’s been using money saved up to travel through Hong Kong, Greece, and Iceland, with stops to see shamans and alternative healers in Indonesia, Thailand, and Mexico. She’s also writing, which she now believes to be her true calling.
Composing an 1,800-word essay this spring - through a combination of typing and recording voice memos - took a month and a half because she could only work for an hour a day. Now she says she can write for several hours at a time with almost no pain, and she’s working on a memoir partly about her injuries.
At 33, Smolcic believes that she’s 90% recovered. She can’t be sure it’s permanent - but even if so, she no longer wants a trade design job.
“I think I’d be okay with not having a lot of the luxuries I had in my San Francisco life,” she said, “as a trade for having more time to be actively living and out in the world, as opposed to being behind a desk.”
But despite all that she believes technology has cost her, physically and emotionally, Smolcic hasn’t been able to resist turning to her iPhone and MacBook on the road this year.
They are a source of directions and travel tips, an outlet for writing and music, a camera to record memories, a line of communication to friends and family. “These machines,” she wrote to me this summer, “put so much power at my fingertips.” And now that she’s feeling better, she uses them all the time.
Debate Post-Mortem: Trump Crushes Clinton - "You Should Be In Jail"
October 12 2016 | From: ZeroHedge
From the no-handshake start, following the most awkward Bill-Melania pre-debate greeting, it was clear the gloves were off.
While Trump started apologetically, once Clinton opened up ad hominem character attacks, The Donald turned it up to '11'.
Lashing out at Bill's indiscretions "his actions are worse than words", Hillary's lying "you should be in jail... I will call for a special prosecutor", and the biases of the moderators"it's one of three here" even the crowd cheered.. before being quickly shushed. Online polls, unbiased commentators, and the Mexican Peso agreed Trump won.
TRUMP: "Bernie Sanders and between super delegates and Debra Wassermann Schultz and I was surprised to see him sign on with the devil.
The thing that you should be apologizing for are the 33,000 e-mails that you deleted and you acid washed and the two boxes of e-mails and other things last week that were taken from an office are are now missing.
I didn't knowledge I would say this, but I'm going to and I hate to say it. If I win, I am going to instruct my attorney general to get a special prosecutor to look into your situation. There has never been so many lies, so much exception.
There has never been anything like it. We will have a special prosecutor. I go out and speak and the people of this country are furious.
The long time workers at the FBI are furious. There has never been anything like this with e-mails. You get a subpoena and after getting the subpoena you delete 33,000 e-mails and acid watch them or bleach them. An expensive process.
We will get a special prosecutor and look into it. You know what, people have been -- their lives have been destroyed for doing 1/5 of what you have done. You should be a shamed.
COOPER: "Secretary Clinton, I will let you respond."
CLINTON: "Everything he said is absolutely false. It would be impossible to be fact checking Donald all the time. I would never get to talk and make lives better for people.
Once again, go to Hillary clinton.com. You can fact check trump in realtime. Last time at the first debate we had millions of people fact checking and we will have millions more fact checking.
It's just awfully good that someone with the temperament of Donald Trump is not in charge of the law in our country."
TRUMP: "Because you would be in jail."
COOPER: "We want to remind the audience to please not talk out loud. Do not applaud. You are wasting time."
"I was surprised to Bernie sign on with you the devil..."
Trump: Take a look at WikiLeaks and see what they said about Bernie Sanders...I was so surprised to see him sign on with the devil. #debatepic.twitter.com/QPXpUlozco
Online polls show it as an overwhelming win for Trump. - DrudgeReport
And then - 90 minutes after the debate ended - CNN finally releases their poll of 537 Voters!
What a total embarrassment!
Finally, the most real-time indicator of performance...
It's on like Donkey Kong.
Congressman Long Statement On Donald J. Trump’s Debate Victory
“America saw tonight why we cannot stand another four years of the Clinton-Obama record of stagnant economic growth and declining respect throughout the world. Donald Trump showed tonight he understands Syria is much more complicated than Hillary would like for it to be.
He is the only candidate with workable plans to reinvigorate our country’s economic engine by bringing back jobs, and he is the only candidate that can help America regain its place as a strong and respected nation.
America will be a safer place to raise a family under Trump's leadership.”
How To Become A Freethinker: A Practical Guide + 7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life
October 12 2016 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / AustralianNationalReview We humans like to think that we are freethinkers, but how many of us truly are?
How many people actually think for themselves, without falling victims to beliefs or ideologies?
How many are not heavily influenced by the biased information that the media is presenting them with? How many are choosing to have certain opinions just because an authority figure told them to or because tradition holds them to be true?
The reality is that most people don’t know how to think critically, and blindly accept the beliefs that were handed to them by society. But unless one learns to think for oneself, how can one grow into a more conscious, wise person? It’s impossible.
So how can one learn to think for himself or herself? Well, here’s a small yet concise practical guide on how to become a freethinker that will help you to break free from the prison of belief and arrive at your own conclusions in your quest for truth.
How to Become a Freethinker
Doubt your beliefs. The first and most important step to become a freethinking individual is to doubt the beliefs that have been forced upon you by others. Whatever your beliefs are - whether religious, political, philosophical and so on - be sure to question them, scrutinize them, and discard any of them when you find no solid evidence supporting them.
Question authority. Most people choose to obey and follow what authority tells them is true and right. They don’t think for themselves- they let others do the thinking for them instead. A freethinker never accepts anything on authority. He/she asks questions and is open to accept any answers that point to the truth, even if they go against the opinions and beliefs of authority.
Observe your behavior. Although we tend to think that we have free will, most of our actions are actually carried out on an unconscious level. In a sense, we are victims to our habits.
To become a freethinker, you need to become more aware of your thoughts, actions, and overall behavior. Once you do so, you’ll be able to better understand yourself and make more conscious choices in life, without behaving in certain ways just because you feel compelled to.
Stop conforming. Another important step to become a freethinker is to detach yourself from group thinking. People choose to conform in all sorts of ways just in order to feel accepted and liked by others. To achieve that, many people unquestionably accept what others tell them out of the fear of being left out.
Use critical thinking. Learning how to use critical thinking is of utmost importance to freethinking. If you can’t analyze and critically assess the information that you come across, you’ll be an easy target for manipulation and thought control.
Critical thinking will assist you in your search to discover the truth, by helping you to avoid being influenced by biased opinions and false information.
Voice your mind. A freethinker is a rebel. It’s a person who is not afraid to speak his/her mind, no matter how opposing his/her ideas are to the establishment. Whatever you consider as true, right and of importance to be communicated to others, do openly talk about it, even if you are the only person who has the guts to do so.
Research. A freethinker cares about truth like nothing else. In the journey to finding truth, there are guides that can help one approach it easier and quicker. If you’re searching for truth, it would be beneficial if you gathered knowledge from as many sources as you can, whether that is books, documentaries, podcasts, and so on. Do whatever helps to expand your consciousness.
Keep an open mind. Last but not least, a freethinker is a person with an open mind. That means, a person who is open to learning new things and ready to change his mind when presented with evidence that contradicts his opinions and beliefs. A freethinker doesn’t accept anything blindly but at the same time doesn’t shrink from considering emerging perspectives and ideas that may challenge his/her worldview.
7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life
Most people experience a crisis at some point in their lives. It’s different for every individual and it is even harder to predict what that crisis may be.
However, at times like these we often regret not learning some key lessons in our earlier years.
Here are 7 such things that we should realise while we are still young.
Live In The Present
We often spend hours pondering about our past experiences and what the future holds for us. However, it’s important to realise that we can be happy only if we live in the present.
If we get too bothered with our past or too worried about the future, we miss living in the moment. The present belongs to us and we need to make the most of it.
Don’t live your life based on other people’s expectations
Our friends and family expect a lot from us. We shouldn’t always give priority to their expectations, especially when it contradicts our personal dreams and goals.
All your life there will be people who will tell you what you should and shouldn’t do. It is important for you to introspect and comprehend what is best for you.
Don’t make your problems bigger than they really are
Hurdles are inevitable. However, it is human tendency to magnify the scale of our problems by simply over-thinking.
Stop thinking too much because that’s not the solution to your obstacle. On the contrary, over-thinking actually makes it harder to resolve issues.
Get out of your comfort zone
Most of us are intimidated by something or the other. To reach our highest potential, it is important to deal with these fears and nip them in the bud.
If you tackle your fears with a straight head, you may realise that they perhaps weren’t so scary in the first place.
Young people want to achieve everything and often they want to do it before everyone else. We must realise that one of the most essential aspects of life is tenacity. We should have patience and faith, and only then can we become truly successful.
Don’t assume what others think of you
Realistically, the harsh truth is, you matter much less to other people than you think. You are not the centre of the universe and not everyone has an opinion about you or your opinions.
Stop fretting over your impression on others and live your life to the fullest.
Appreciate your life experiences and most importantly, appreciate yourself, your friends and your family. Give a 100 per cent to those who deserve it because it will make you happier in the long-run.
This Was The Week The World Got Really Anxious About Globalization's Future
October 11 2016 | From: Bloomberg
Markets might never be the same again.
Weak global trade, fears that the U.K. is marching towards a hard Brexit, and polls indicating that the U.S. election remains a tighter call than markets are pricing in have led a bevy of analysts to redouble their warnings that a backlash over globalization is poised to roil global financial markets - with profound consequences for the real economy and investment strategies.
From the economists and politicians at the annual IMF meeting in Washington to strategists on Wall Street trying to advise clients, everyone seems to be pondering a future in which cooperation and global trade may look much different than they do now.
Suggestions that the U.K. will prioritize control over its migration policy at the expense of open access to Europe's single market in negotiations to leave the European Union - a strategy that's being dubbed a "hard Brexit" - loomed large over global markets.
The U.K. government is “strongly supportive of open markets, free markets, open economies, free trade,” said Chancellor of the Exchequer Philip Hammond during a Bloomberg Television interview in New York on Thursday. “But we have a problem - and it’s not just a British problem, it’s a developed-world problem - in keeping our populations engaged and supportive of our market capitalism, our economic model."
Citing the rising anti-trade sentiment, analysts from Bank of America Merrill Lynch warned that:
“Events show nations are becoming less willing to cooperate, more willing to contest," and a backlash against inequality is likely to trigger more activist fiscal policies.
Looser government spending in developed countries - combined with trade protectionism and wealth redistribution - could reshape global investment strategies, unleashing a wave of inflation, the bank argued, amid a looming war against inequality.
U.S. Treasury Secretary Jack Lew did his part to push for more openness. During an interview in Washington on Thursday, he said that efforts to boost trade, combined with a more equitable distribution of the fruits of economic growth, are key to ensuring U.S. prosperity.
Rolling back on globalization would be counterproductive to any attempt to boost median incomes, he added.
Without mentioning him by name, Lew's comments appeared to nod to Donald Trump, who some believe could take the U.S. down a more isolationist trading path should he be elected president in November.
“The emergence of Donald Trump as a political force reflects a mood of growing discontent about immigration, globalization and the distribution of wealth," write analysts at Fathom Consulting, a London-based research firm.
Their central scenario is that a Trump administration might be benign for the U.S. economy.
“However, in our downside scenario, Donald Dark, global trade falls sharply and a global recession looms. In this world, isolationism wins, not just in the U.S., but globally," they caution.
Analysts at Standard Chartered Plc agree that the tail risks of a Trump presidency could be significant.
“The main risk with potentially tough negotiating tactics is that trade partners could panic, especially if global coordination evaporates."
They add that business confidence could take a big hit in this context.
“The global trade system could descend into a spiral of trade tariffs, reminiscent of what happened after the Smoot-Hawley tariff of 1930, and ultimately a trade war, possibly accompanied by foreign-exchange devaluations; this would be a ‘lose-lose’ deal for all."
Market participants are also concerned that populism could take root under a Hillary Clinton administration.
“We believe the liberal base’s demands on a Clinton Administration could lead to an overly expansive federal government with aggressive regulators," write analysts at Barclays Plc.
"If the GOP does not unify, Clinton may expand President Obama’s use of executive authority to accomplish her goals."
No matter who wins in November, Citigroup Inc. Head FX Strategist Steven Englander warns that investors are failing to hedge against rising event risks, with the U.S. election serving as a possible stress test for global markets.
“If everyone is positioning to pull the trigger on positioning as soon as they know the outcome, the repressed volatility may emerge in a very sharp burst," he points out.
Amid political attacks on the apparent inequities generated by monetary policy in the U.K., sluggish trade challenging Chinese growth, and the rise of populist movements in Europe, there are plenty of reasons why market players should snap up volatility hedges, analysts say.
“In our view, volatility is going to heat up in the coming months given the U.S. election, China's potential response against a stronger currency, and Italian political risks," concluded Martin Enlund, chief currency strategist at Nordea Markets.
The New Snowden? NSA Contractor Arrested Over Alleged Theft Of Classified Data
October 11 2016 | From: ActivistPost A contractor working for the National Security Agency (NSA) was arrested by the FBI following his alleged theft of “state secrets.”
More specifically, the contractor, Harold Thomas Martin, is charged with stealing highly classified source codes developed to covertly hack the networks of foreign governments, according to several senior law enforcement and intelligence officials.
Martin was employed by Booz Allen Hamilton, the company responsible for most of the NSA’s most sensitive cyber-operations.
Edward Snowden, the most well-known NSA whistleblower, also worked for Booz Allen Hamilton until he fled to Hong Kong in 2013 where he revealed a trove of documents exposing the massive scope of the NSA dragnet surveillance. That surveillance system was shown to have targeted untold numbers of innocent Americans.
According to the New York Times, the theft “raises the embarrassing prospect” that an NSA insider managed to steal highly damaging secret information from the NSA for the second time in three years, not to mention the “Shadow Broker” hack this past August, which made classified NSA hacking tools available to the public.
According to a Department of Justice press release, Martin’s residence in Maryland was raided by the FBI on August 27th, 2016. During the raid, investigators found hard-copy documents and digital information stored on various devices and removable digital media.
The FBI claims that a large percentage of the materials uncovered at Martin’s home were marked as US government property and contained highly classified information including Top Secret and Sensitive Compartmented Information (SCI).
Investigators also have claimed to have located government property with a combined value of over $1,000, which Martin allegedly stole. If convicted, he faces up to 11 years in prison for the theft of government property and the removal of classified material.
Snowden himself took to Twitter to comment on the arrest. In a tweet, he said the news of Martin’s arrest “is huge” and asked, “Did the FBI secretly arrest the person behind the reports [that the] NSA sat on huge flaws in US products?” It is currently unknown if Martin was connected to those reports as well.
It also remains to be seen what Martin’s motivations were in removing classified data from the NSA. Though many suspect that he planned to follow in Snowden’s footsteps, the government will more likely argue that he had planned to commit espionage by selling state secrets to “adversaries.”
According to the New York Times article on the arrest, Russia, China, Iran, and North Korea are named as examples of the “adversaries” who would have been targeted by the NSA codes that Martin is accused of stealing.
However, Snowden revealed widespread US spying on foreign governments including several US allies such as France and Germany. This suggests that the stolen “source codes” were likely utilized on a much broader scale.
Electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder is about harrasment, torture and murder using electronic weapons based on radio waves.These weapons have been very refined and can cause effects comparable to many illnesses and/or injuries.
These weapons are not science-fiction but used today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.
What is Electronic Mind Control / Electronic Mind Reading / Brain Zapping / Synthetic Telepathy / Remote Neural Monitoring?
Electronic mind control is about forcing thoughts into your brain using invisible radio waves (this can be done long range). Your attackers can make you think about a certain person at a certain moment, force a song into your brain (so you will start humming / singing it).
Your attackers can also make you stand up and walk to your kitchen. If you do not know about this then you will be just following the thoughts that were planted into your brain. In other words: you are robotized.
Electronic mind reading is about reading your thoughts using invisible radio waves (this can be done from long ranges). Already it has become 'easy' to decode received brain signals into words spoken to oneself without talking.
At the moment they also make progress with decoding images from what you look at (as seen by you through your eyes).
This is not science-fiction but done today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.
Microwave weaponry systems like the Active Denial System are used in tandem to deliver physical attacks designed to stress targets, torture them physically, and turn their homes into places of extreme distress. Hoping to drive the target from their home or workplaces.
The pain is unbelievable. It involves tones, harmonics, hissing, stabs, blows, voice to skull transmissions, induced dreams (nightmares), burning sensations in the body and head, internal burning sensations inside of the body and head, crawling sensations on the body (phantom touch), electronic rape, induced and unwanted urination or orgasms, holographic inserts, and many other horrible tortures. My thoughts seem to be scanned every second. -
(Carolyn Palit) I thought I was dying. I thought that I would spontaneously combust into flames. Either it came from a base in the hills, or Commander Solo*, or it came from the heavens. It attacked me for two years. -
Some of his attacks are coming from the direction of the houses of the defendants that he has named in a law suit against these kinds of attacks. But . . . mostly . . . the attacks come from . . . "straight up."
More Information about Electronic Weapons Attacks, Including Mind Control and Mind Reading
On the STOPEG.com website www.stopeg.com there is an CBS News video of the Active Denial System (ADS), a microwave laser weapon. Although the DoD wants us to believe this is a safe weapon (that is why they showed it to us), experts agree it is not!
This video shows a big installation, but there are many kinds of laser weapons. Some are very big and mounted in trucks, ships, aircraft, or even in satellites. But there are also much smaller, portable versions, that can be very effective.
Of course military and secret services have equipment based on the most advanced technology available. Their equipment is not available to the public. But now advanced commercial devices are being shown on the internet giving an idea of how easy it must be for the attackers to cook, burn (torture) a person.
One is a portable (hand-held) laser, the S3 Spyder III Arctic laser. Although it may appear not very sophisticated, imagine someone pointing this at your back when you are in a restaurant or at the movies. To look at people through wall take a look at the XAVER 400 Compact, Tactical Through-Wall Imaging System.
Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing
Rohinie Bisesar, the strikingly beautiful and accomplished financial services analyst and York University MBA with no previous criminal record was charged with first-degree murder in the sudden stabbing death of a young woman.
Many targets wonder how they can be attacked so easily when they move to a different location, e.g. a family member, friend, or go to a hotel. The attackers stuff their portable laser weapons and through-wall imaging devices into their suitcases, book rooms close to yours, and often will attack you from two different angles to confuse you.
In case you prevent them to attack the body area the want to attack, e.g. by putting your back against an outside wall of the hotel, they call in military aircraft that will blast you with very high power microwave (HPM) bursts, cooking your inside. (this happened several times to me, last time on July 6, 2011, while staying in a hotel in Westkapelle, Netherlands, the aircraft arriving around 1 am about 15 minutes after they concluded they could not perform the attacks on my back).
Many people have a problem thinking that others can read their mind, their thoughts. Again, the advanced technology used by military and secret services is not available to the public, but today more and more commercial devices are becoming available.
One company delivering a mind reading headset is Emotive, for USD 299,-. With this device you can control your games, your tv set, etc. with you mind! They also have an API (programming interface) to create your own mind reading application.
Even rudimentary electro-pulse mind reading technologies are publicly reported in the media
I cannot emphasize enough that not all but many attacks are from the sky. When driving your car they may burn your back (from the sky or from some equipment in your own car) when another car is driving behind you and make it go away when the car goes away.
If they do this every time then you probably will think it has to do with the car behind you. When driving your car, walking outside, riding your bike, they may burn your head and make many people you look at scratch their head.
Sometimes people are part of the sick network but many others may just have been beamed the same way you are, having no clue about what is going on (your attackers want you to attack other people, they don't care about anything because they are psychopaths, murderers. child abusers).
Another warning is for a much more confusing type of attack: electronic mind control.
In this case your attackers will plant thoughts into the brain of people surrounding you. Of course these thoughts relate to your life in one way or the other.
They may even plant your (!) thoughts into the heads of people surrounding you. If you do not know about this then you may start to think that these people can read your mind, which can be very depressing. I wrote several article about electronic mind control, if you are a target and do not know about this capabilities you may want to read this.
Youtube video on AudioSpotlight, Subvocal Speech and Microwave hearing:
Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List
[Published: February 26, 2009. Updated: February 28, 2009, April 11, 2009, June 10, 2009, June 13, 2009, June 25, 2009, September 6, 2009, December 24, 2009]
Almost anybody can become a (temporary) target of these horrible electronic weapons. Please read what can be done so you are prepared. This is not science fiction but happening right now in our 'democratic' society.
Below is a list of all possible attacks by electronic weapons that I know of by experience. I know more attacks exists. Female targets write about sexual attacks, others mention continuous ringing in the ears, etc. I may add these later. I decided to keep this list personal, i.e. in this blog I write down only what has/is being done to me, not what is being done to others.
These attacks are done by the following kind of electronic weapons:
Directed Energy Weapons (laser weapons), like ELF (very low frequency), ultrasonic, lasers, (high power) microwave weapons
Microwave hearing/Silent Sound (letting you hear sounds/things in other ways then hearing by the ear)
On the internet already a lot of symptoms and attacks by these weapons can be found. Most of these lists do not detail these attacks and that is exactly what I am trying to do here. In my opinion it is not enough to read that such a weapon gives you a burning feeling, instead the horrible details must be exposed!
Description of a (continuous) high intensity microwave weapon attack:
This weapon makes your skin really burn like a very heavy sunburn and cooks your inside, you really feel being cooked alive, you are heated like meat in a microwave oven, with intensities that exceed those of a microwave oven.
Gal is coming out of your throat and fluids inside your body evaporate making you instantly burp. In case of high intensity there is also a burning sensation on the other side of the body, where the beam, of approximately 10-30 cm diameter leaves the body.
If they cook you long enough cooked body cells explode inside you, when aimed at your upper body, lung cells explode / are destroyed and reducing lung capacity immediately noticed when walking stairs or running.
The burning sensation and the cooked-inside feeling will go away after 5-30 minutes or 1-2 days depending on the duration and intensity, it may take a day or more to recover from high power microwave bursts with durations of 5-60 seconds (but can you recover from these amounts of irradiation?).
A cup of milk is heated and starts evaporating after 5-10 seconds. The electronic weapons aimed at you can make you burp or fart within 1-3 seconds, hence the intensity of electromagnetic irradiation is not only used to torture a person but murder as well.
Covert and Intended-to-Notice (or Noticed) Electronic Harassment / Torture
Electronic harassment is called covert if the target does not know about these weapons and methods. If you do not know about these weapons you may think you have all the bad luck in the world, you will wonder what strange things are happening to you, to your body, and accept you do not control your life anymore.
If intended-to-notice (or noticed), electronic harassment is torture in its most horrible form. What would you do if your body is made to react every time to events occurring in your life, e.g. by making you burp or fart, your legs are cooked every night, your ankle is cooked during daytime when working behind your computer, your knee is beamed to cause maximum pain, etc.
To delay you:
They make you go the toilet to urinate when you want to leave your house
They cook your legs before running
They burn and cook your body high power to prevent you doing you work
Note that this delaying is often done together with gang stalking methods like cars blocking your road, phone calls when you are to leave your home, etc.
To make things worse:
They make you sneeze extra times when you have a cold
They cook your throat become sore when you have a cold
They attack your eyes until red with blood
The cook your legs after running
They cook or burn where you have pain already
To torture you:
They cook and burn your body everywhere
They cook your family, your children, friends, …
Note that this torture is often done together with gang stalking methods like synchronizing saw machines, honking horns of cars, screaming birds (pigeons, crows), etc.
The Maximum Pain Business, Beyond Imagination Horror and Cruelty Without Evidence
Special methods have been developed to make you think you have a heart problem, erection problem, toothache, etc.
For the ones exposing these horrendous crimes they developed methods to inflict maximum pain, e.g. by cooking such a person alive with a high power microwave weapon, or burning the skin of the target or making the target burp or fart every few minutes to events occurring in the life of the target (including e.g. opening a website on a computer, saving a file, cars passing by the window, etc. ).
Some authors refer to the development and use of these weapons as the pain business. I would like to make a correction, please call it the maximum pain business.
After accepting that there are really such sick and disgusting creatures actually developing and applying these methods and torture, you also have to accept that it is not about just pressing a button, but also about the way how this torture is applied.
Zapping your eyes red to make you look bad, cooking biceps to prevent you from swimming, cooking your throat to prevent you from singing, inducing heart problems and toothaches to prevent you working or sports. More horror, these methods and procedures could not have been highly developed without being tested on humans, on real persons.
And again more horror, these methods are often used with gang stalking (organized stalking) methods.
Like they cook your ankle with insane intensities making your foot very painful, and when you go outside all kinds of people with leg problems are crossing your path, people limping, in a wheelchair, sometimes even someone without a leg.
Or, they start sawing wood somewhere and when the saw enters the wood cook your body with high intensity microwave.
This torture is applied 24/7, not once every hour but more like once every minute/every 5 minutes. Horrible torture that can be called torturing a person to death.
Special Case: The Heart Attack
Damaging your body can be done in several ways. One vital organ is the heart. They can attack the heart very effective with:
Microwave weapons, cooking the heart area slowly
High Power Microwave (HPM) weapons, cooking the heart area in a second
Ultrasonic weapons, pressurizing the heart area
Heart frequency manipulation weapons
These weapons can damage your heart in a split second, you may not survive such a attack, but can also be used to slowly damage your heart. Slowly cook your heart area so will get a strange feeling and in fact your heart is really damaged.
This makes the Heart Attack Gun that the CIA was forced to admit having
look positively archaic: During Senate testimony in 1975 into illegal activities by the CIA, it was revealed that the agency had developed a dart gun capable of causing a heart attack
Then there is also the frequency manipulation attack, your heart may feel pulsing, blobbing like crazy.
Cook heart area from the front, often together with a cook beam from left behind. Slow damage, horrible feeling
Flash your heart with very high power microwave. Instant damage.
Pressurize your chest, even takes your breath away if applied with enough power
Pulsate your body/heart area with low frequencies
These effects will give you a very realistic heart attack or heart problem feeling feeling. Your heart may start pounding very loud, may feel very painful, the heart area may feel strange, cooked.
If applied with enough power, this really damages your heart and heart area. Your heart is cooked like meat in a microwave oven.
Can you recover from these attacks? In general they will not murder you or leave evidence, your heart may feel very painful for several days after they stop their attacks.
It can take weeks until all pain in the area has disappeared. I am not sure about permanent damage caused by these attacks.
Can you die from such an attack? Yes, if the intensity of the beam is high enough your heart can be damaged or temporarily disturbed in such a way that you will die.
How can you recognize a ‘normal’ heart problem from a ‘induced’ heart problem? You yourself are the best judge of what you feel. If you believe something really is wrong with your heart then visit a doctor. If you are certain your heart is attacked then avoid visiting a doctor as this will confirm a heart problem in case you collapse or die, case closed.
Impossible to Protect Yourself
The human body appears to be extremely vulnerable to electromagnetic irradiation of all kind of frequencies. The human body also is a electromagnetic transmitter and sensitive (radio) equipment can pick up and decode the signals that are generated e.g. when speaking, thinking.
In contrast to a knife or a bullet, electromagnetic signals are not blocked by walls, compare your cell phone.
Limited protection is possible using sheet metal, metal plates, water, vacuum, but if you really are a target the attackers increase intensities (if necessary to insane levels), change frequency, attack from different angles etc.
Also remember that these weapons can hit a person without hitting the person sitting next to this person. They can be aimed and the diameter of the beam can be made small enough to hit only the target.
Anybody Can be a Target
Electronic weapons make it very easy to eliminate persons, to get persons (temporarily) out of the way, to murder persons, etc. all without evidence, and most of the time even the target does not know he is zapped, cooked, burned with electronic weapons. The ones owning and controlling this technology now can get everything they want in a very easy way.
They can get their football player into the national team by temporarily cut out the competitor for the same position in the team.
This could be done with other means as well but it is very easy with electronic weapons. Just cook a person’s ankle and foot during the night and the damage is done. To influence a tennis match you could cook a player by heating the body with microwaves (compare microwave oven).
He will just feel overheated and sick and loose the game.
These are just two examples to demonstrate what can be done. You can imagine almost anybody can become a target. Some people because they are more visible then others, because they have something the sick network wants, because they know something the sick network does not want to be exposed, because they are too intelligent for the sick network, ust for personal reasons because may be they made a remark about someone, etc.
The Phoenix Program Continues Today
The Phoenix Program was a program designed, coordinated, and executed by the United States Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), United States special operations forces, US Army intelligence collection units from MACV, special forces operatives from the Australian Army Training Team Vietnam (AATTV), and the Republic of Vietnam's (South Vietnam) security apparatus during the Vietnam War.
The Program was designed to identify and "neutralize" (via infiltration, capture, counter-terrorism, interrogation, and assassination) the infrastructure of the National Liberation Front of South Vietnam (NLF or Viet Cong).
The CIA described it as "a set of programs that sought to attack and destroy the political infrastructure of the Viet Cong". The major two components of the program were Provincial Reconnaissance Units (PRUs) and regional interrogation centers. PRUs would kill or capture suspected NLF members, as well as civilians who were thought to have information on NLF activities.
Many of these people were then taken to interrogation centers where many were allegedly tortured in an attempt to gain intelligence on VC activities in the area. The information extracted at the centers was then given to military commanders, who would use it to task the PRU with further capture and assassination missions.
The program was in operation between 1965 and 1972, and similar efforts existed both before and after that period. By 1972, Phoenix operatives had neutralized 81,740 suspected NLF operatives, informants and supporters, of whom between 26,000 and 41,000 were killed.
Electronic Weapons Can Kill a Person
Besides using electronic weapons to monitor, drive into suicide, cause temporary injuries, they can also be used to kill a person.
Killing is possible by sending wrong signals to the heart making it pulse in abnormal ways, or by increasing intensity and cooking the heart area, damaging the heart slowly. Very high power laser weapons or HPM (= High Power Microwave) weapons can damage your heart in a second.
Although little is known at this time about the effects of long term irradiation, it is not difficult to imagine that this will cause all kinds of diseases as electromagnetic irradiation destroys your DNA (cell with damaged DNA are called cancer). Again all these horrible things can be done, and are done today, without evidence.
How do You Know You are a Target of Electronic Harassment?
It is often very difficult to distinghuish between normal body behaviour and induced body behaviour if there no signs of burning or cooking. For example, would you know the difference between normal diareah and induced diareah?
Yes, you are able to decide what is not normal by comparing your diareah with previous experiences.
It may start and disappear very sudden, may cause other effects like water bubbles leaving your anus, etc. Also, the diareah may be linked to a certain event, like picking up your child, appearance in court, etc.
Always ask yourself what it is you are feeling, did you feel this before? Does it go away when you turn your body 180 degrees? Does it go away when you walk in the streets or drive your car? You are the best judge of what you are feeling.
Your Car May be Tagged
When you are a target you will experience harassment everywhere every time. If you have a car they will tag your car (these are words I learned from a ’so-called target’).
This means they will equip your car with electronic weapons not only to monitor you but also to cook and/or burn your body while driving.
They may also harass the target covert and use the following beams:
Sleep beam, to make the driver very sleepy
Eye beam, slowly cooking they eyes, so tears come out and visibility reduces
Just to confirm, all this is done to cause the (mental or physical) death of the target.
Harassment from (Neighbour) Houses, Cars, Handbags, Airplanes, Satellites
Most of the electronic harassment comes from close neighbor houses. When you walk in the the streets you are probably attacked by electronic weapons (directed energy weapons) from houses (they may be remote controlled or controlled by operator at these locations.
If there are no locations for their equipment, they use these weapons from their cars. You may also be hit from airplanes. This is not difficult to believe if you accept a reach several hundreds of meters. Some targets write about satellites being the source of their electronic harassment. In general I do not believe this is true.
Example of Current State-of-Technology:
You can be hit by very accurate equipment. For example, when you are running on the streets or in the woods you may be ’shot’ with a very high power microwave weapon in your calf from an airplane. The intensity can be such that this causes instant injury.
Your calf is cooked within a split second and your muscles almost instantly tear apart. Making running / walking almost impossible.
Electronic harassment can also be done from small devices carried in e.g. shopping bags in shops or on the street.
You need only a small battery to give the target a single burst that makes him burp or fart. This is enough to depress the target: nowhere safe from this horrible harassment.
Satellites probably play a big role in exchanging information about a target, e.g. you can have a subvocal speech decoding PC in the house next to target, but it is more easy (and safe) to transfer the undecoded information to a central computer system, and return the decoded words. But it may be done on site, PC’s have enough power today to do this decoding themselves.
You May be Attacked by Persons (Family, Friends, co-Workers) Who are Covertly Attacked by Electronic Harassment
The aim of the attackers is to drive the target insane. To speed up things they aim their electronic weapons covertly at family, friends, co-workers, etc. to make them react in several ways to what the target is doing or saying.
Some (easy) methods used to covertly attack other persons:
Scratch beam, to make a person scratch his head
Sneeze beam, to make a person sneeze
Cough beam, to make a person cough
Urge to urinate beam, to make a person go to the toilet
They beam persons around the target on the head so everywhere around the target people are scratching their heads
They beam the target’s head very hard and then beam the head of a friend so that this friend will start scratching his head immediately very visible for the target to see
When the target and partner are in the same, then every time the target opens a website on his PC (not visible for the partner), they beam the throat of the partner causing the partner to cough almost immediately
When the target is beamed in the stomach during work, they make a co-worker sneeze at the same time
When the target is beamed in the stomach, they beam her child in the stomach as well, making the child cry and saying it has stomach pain (this is confirmed by multiple victims)
Once again illegal and (beyond imagination) horrible crimes by our national secret services.
Elite and Secret Services Control our Politicians
It is not amazing that these weapons exist, I studied computer science myself, if you have enough money it is not that special. It is also not amazing that there are actually sick and disgusting creatures walking around free applying this kind of electronic harassment to cause the physical or mental death of a person.
What is amazing is that a lot of high ranked politicians and other influential persons are fully aware of the existence and use of these weapons but do not speak out. What does this say about these persons? I believe you can say that the idea we live in a democracy has disappeared completely.
Elite and Secret Services are Trapped by Their Crimes in Vicious Circles of More Violence Against the People of the World
The ones facilitating, outsourcing and performing this cruel electronic harassment and torture is not just a group of people, these attacks are very well designed and applied by people trained to cause maximum pain but leave no evidence.
The ones I am referring to are our secret services, including military. They are tightening their grip on society, not because they have to protect us against the terrorists in the world, but because they are getting more and more afraid what will happen when the truth about them is exposed.
They are trapped in some sort of vicious circle. To maintain themselves they must commit more and more horrible crimes. And to avoid their crimes are exposed they have to perform new horrible crimes, etc. etc.
So here we have the elite, creating wars to maintain themselves, and their armies, the secret services both trapped in their own lies and deceit. And the horror for us, the people of the world is that we will be taken from (created) threat to (created) war because that is the only way out for the (criminal) elite and (criminal) secret services.
People Cookers and Secret Services
I introduced the word people cookers in 2007 for the creatures facilitating, outsourcing, performing electronic harassment and electronic torture. Main reason is of course that people cooking comes closest to what they are doing.
Most of the harassment and torture is done by microwave irration which causes heating of the skin and your inside just like a microwave oven cooks meat.
There are no words to justify these illegal and horrendous crimes. The ones involved are disgusting creatures, an author called them ‘the failed human beings’ and that is just what they are. They were born human, choose the wrong path in life and degenerated into pieces of shit.
I believe people cooking and gang stalking (organized stalking) are the perfect example of how sick our national secret services have become. They now commit the perfect murder, in their language meaning murder without evidence. And they now steal, torture and murder just because it has become so easy to steal, torture and murder.
Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List - December 24, 2009
Below is the list of all (most) effects I experienced from these horrible electronic weapons. Few times I may not correctly describe the source of the effects. It is sometimes difficult to point to microwave or ultrasound.
Both can be very damaging. High Power Microwave cooks your body cells while high power ultrasound simply destroys your body cells. But in the end the result is the same, a damaged body.
Special equipment is used to detect muscle contractions like the ones a person uses when speaking out loud. When spoken to itself these muscle movements can be detected by advanced equipment and translated into words and sentences. As most people talk to themselves when ‘thinking’ this resembles mind reading.
How it is applied
They read your subvocal speech and react to it
Unbelievable at first, then you get depressed because the last thing you thought was private appears not to be private anymore. Then you accept that you probably are even more popular and watched then the big stars in the world and sometimes use it to deceive the bastards. Horrible torture
Why it is applied
To drive you insane
Seeing through your eyes
Although some targets claim that they can see what you see. I have not (yet) experienced this. But they do everything to suggest that they can do this. E.g. on the highway you are bursted with the burp beam every time a favorite model car passes in the opposite direction. They are looking at you from some camera build inside your car or from another car. They are looking at your eyes to see what you are looking at. I experienced a few times I was bursted BEFORE I saw the favorite car. A lot of research in this area is going on, I will keep you updated.
Special advanced equipment is used to beam voices, or in fact any sound, into your head.
How it is applied
They make you hear voices that you should not hear. For example, they let you hear voices from people far away very clear as if they are standing next to you. This an amazing experience. There are a lot of reports of people who claim they are attacked by voices
Why it is applied
To drive you insane
Top of your head beam
The top of your head is very sensitive. They will burn the top with some laser or microwave weapon
How it is applied
They put the beam on your head and wait for you to move
Can be very painfull if applied with enough intensity. You cannot do much with this beam on your head. Horrible torture
If applied with high intensity it may take several days for the painful feeling to disappear
Why it is applied
Prevent you from working, doing your thing
Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause brain damage, tumors
They just beam your head somewhere. The normal reaction is your will start scratching your head.
How it is applied
Mostly applied when other people can see you. If they do this everytime with the same people they may wonder whats wrong with you. They also apply this and have random people scratch their heads and then burn you
Not very painfull, mostly a short pulse, although they may keep the beam on your head and remove it after you start scratchin your head
Why it is applied
Drive you out of your mind, drive you into attacking other people
This beam gives you a headache. It is some kind of high intensity low frequency beam. The headache appears suddenly and also disapears suddenly
Can be very painful
The feeling is that you feel a little bit dizzy, see thing a little foggy.
How it is applied
They may apply this when you drink your first glass of beer, wine, etc. or when you have a cold, or are sensitive to hay fever
They put the microwave beamer on your head and your head is heated. They may do this after you drink a glas of wine, but also after you turn on the central heating of your appartment. You will feel hot, sick, slow.
Ear short burst
Your ear is bursted, the idea is to hit your eardrum. With your eardrum cooked/damaged you have a strange feeling.
Ear continous beam
Your ear is beamed for very long time just to present you pain, they want you to move.
It appears your eardrum and surrounding area is very sensitive. This is very painful.
Your eye is bursted and you have instant blurred vision. Often your eye will start tearing
How it is applied
Some kind of miocrowave burst, see also Phasr and other similar military weapons used to blind the enemy
Not really painfull but you cannot do much as you are used to two eyes.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from working
Should you worry
Yes, this is very damaging for your eyes
Your eye is bursted with some kind of laser beam
Like they drive a needle into your eye. Very painful
Why it is applied
Just below eye, tremble
They beam at they area below your eye and the flesh below it starts trembling. They can do this in shops and through wall
Burn (beard) hair
They burn away hair at certain locations, e.g. your moustache hair just below your nose holes to create the illusion of a leaking nose
How it is applied
This is just a laser hair removal procedure, like performed in many beauty parlors
You are bursted and must sneeze. This is a tinglin sensation that can make you sneeze in an instant
How it is applied
You can turn your head in the other direction or hold your hand before your nose to make sure the attack is caused by electronic weapons
Why it is applied
To make your body react to something
You have a runny nose but do not have a cold. You may start thinking you have some kind of strange cold but you have not. Once you are out of the beam, the runny nose disappears.
How it is applied
I am not sure if this is done only by electronic weapon or by a combination of some drug and electronic weapon
Your throat is bursted with a high intensity burst and you start coughing instantly. This coughing does not look like normal coughing. You will have a sore throat immediately afterwards.
Like something fluid/moisture sticks in your lungs, or sometimes your throat. When you breath you hear/feel a rasping sound. You must cough very hard to throw it out.
Using a low frequency beam they induce a toothache, this really is a horrrible feeling. It is like a true toothache but now when you move out of the beam it disappears.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from doing anything, just plain torture
Your throat is sowly cooked and you will almost immediately notice less volume and after some time pain while speaking
How it is applied
They can do this in just one or two hours by aiming a high power beam at your throat.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from speaking loud, prevent you to sing
This is very high intensity burst on your head. There is no pain but it feels like the result having been hit on the head very hard. You feel a bit dizzy and your ears are ringing
On top of shoulder
A very painfull beam on the top of your shoulder
Why it is applied
I call this beam: through-body-beam. You are really cooked by this beam. If applied with enough intensity you will feel a burning sensation on the back (where it enters), then feel the beam cook your insde, then you start burping, then you feel a burning sensation on the other part of your body where the beam leaves your body
How it is applied
This beam can be applied everywhere, form the house next to yours, from cars. When they beam you outside the intensity often is higher as they want to make sure are hit properly
You feel like being microwaved. Very painfull, horrible torture
They put the microwave beamer on your body for a long time and you have the feeling you are cooked alive which in effect is a very accurate description of what is being done
You feel like being cooked alive, horrible torture
This is a low power sophisticated version of the chest/lungs cook beam. It is difficult to locate the source direction.
How it is applied
It takes approx. 2-3 seconds to make you burp, make your body react to events. They also may apply low intensity, so you get an irresistable urge to burp but cannot
Why it is applied
To make you suffer. This applied sometimes once every five minutes, but sometimes also several times a minute to let your body react to events like cars passing your window, etc. Horrible torture.
Heart attack incl. extra beam from left behind
This is a low frequency high power beam aimed at your heart, mostly from a position somewhere in front of you. To maximze the effect they simultaneously beam you from the left behind position with a microwave cook beam.
How it is applied
As they may apply the from behaind beam for a long period your flesh around the heart area may get cooked and the whole area may feel painfiul and stiff
This really gives you the feeling of having a heart problem, and in fact you have! The difference is that this one is applied by murderers. Horrible torture
It may take several days before you recover (if they stop the beam)
Should you worry
Yes, your heart is vital
Heart attack high power burst
This is a very high power burst of very short duration, 1 second or less, that will give you immediately an extremely painful heart (area). This beam is really amazing: I believe it can kill you in an instant
How it is applied
They can do this through wall anytime
It may take several days before your body recovers and it all feels normal again
This may be done seperate from other heart attacks. Your heart may start feel pulsing funny, the feeling is very massive, it also feels like bubling, like the heart lost control of normal operation and just pulses somewhat
How it is applied
Not only frightening but also very painful
They put a pressure beam on your chest this will take your breath away and you may think your are having a heart problem. This can have various intensities
They burn the skin of your back. This can be low intensity or high intensity. The feeling is you have a sun burn, in case of high intensities it will also color your back a little red.
How it is applied
This almost instant skin cooking. Refer to ADS (Active Denial System) for details
Why it is applied
Present pain. To move you out of the way, to make you leave the swimming pool, etc.
This is an overwhelming effect. This is like a shower but not with water but with electronic pulses.
The temperature of your body is increased giving you the feeling you have a flu or some kind of illness.
Beaming in your side gives you the idea you have spleen pain
How it is applied
They often do this during high intensity sport activities. The idea is to make you belive you have real spleen pain and will stop your exercise
They cook your biceps to reduce their power , make them feel painful when you load them during e.g. swimming. This may be done to prevent you from doing your sports.
muscle weakening in hand
They beam your hands. The result is that you can not hold a pen between thumb and finger like you used to, also you can not put you fingers against each other (like making a cup with your hand). They may do this to prevent you from working or doing your sports e.g. swimming.
They put a beam on your stomach and the stomach begins to bubble like something is cooking inside.
How it is applied
They often do this at night.
Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause stomach cancer, tumors
With some kind of ultrasound beam they attack your kidneys. The feeling is like you have been kicked over and over in your sides. This is like the feeling that is described by patients that have their kidney stones crushed by ultrasound.
Intestines cooking, urge to defecate
They cook your intestines and you feel you have to fart but cannot.
They cook your intestines and it will start bubbling. After some time you will have to fart
blind gut attack
they cook the area around your tail bone. After a short period, depending on the intensity this may take 60 seconds or more, you will feel horrible cramps.
This pain makes you crawl on the floor. Horrible torture
It takes at least one hour before the horrible cramps get a litle less painful.
How to detect
With normal cramps you will have other parts of your body react as well, like heavy sweating. In this case there is just intense pain.
They cook your intestines and you have a very strong feeling to go to the toilet. By continously beaming you have very heavy diarreah
Why it is applied
Keep you out of important events, e.g. A lawsuit where you havve to defend yourself
This beam makes your erection go away, if you are a man of course. This can be done in 20-30 seconds. Depending on the direction of the beam your intestines may start bubbling though not very loud
Urge to urinate
They beam your lower body so you will feel the urge to urinate. It is difficult to ignore and there will come a moment you will have to do this when the beam continues.
The feeling is that your movement is blocked. You must take care not to fall or make a strange move
This will cause pain to your knee
High intensity beaming
The put the beamer on your knee and make sure it stays there for hours. The location may vary ut just above the knee cap can cause a lot of pain. This will result in very much pain and a very sensitive knee.
How it is applied
After a few days your knee hurts a lot when walking. They may apply this also when biking to make you think something is wrong with your knee
Very painful, horrible torture
They apply low intensity, low power beam to your legs, e.g. When you are in bed. Your muscles, legs feel stif the next morning. They may start cooking the calfs after you finished running, and after some time before you want to go running to prevent you from running
How it is applied
What happens when you increase load on cooked muscles? They tear apart
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
This beam is in fact a very high power burst and can cook your calf from hundreds of meters in a split second. If you are running your cooked muscles will tear apart and you have instant injury. See also Heart attack high power burst. You may notice the following feeling: a needle going in and out of your calf within a second
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from runningm, other sports
They cook the skin of your shin with very high intensities. When you are running, the shin injury is a well-known. They may start cooking the skin of of your shin after you finished running, and after some time (days) before you want to go running to prevent you from running
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
The cook your heel muscle. This muscle does not contain much nerves so it is difficult to detect before the damage has been done. Then you will think back and remember there was something wrong the previous day or days.
Walking can be painful.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
They cook your ankles, just to cause you pain. You feel the beam and it is difficult to keep your leg in the same position because of the pain. This is often a applied for a long period of time, several hours.
May take several days to disappear when applied with high intensities
They beam very hard in the center of your foot
Very painful, horrible torture
They burst the center of your foot with max power very short burst beam, only once while walking even in a crowded place. This causes insane pain and you may fall immediately, because the foot is not functioning anymore.
Extremely painful, horrible torture
They pick a single toe and beam it for several days in a row
They burst your toes with with max power very short burst beam, and do this several times. This causes insane pain.
How it is applied
They may do this while riding your bike, horrible torture
Ultrasonic beam to block the movement of a foot. If you are not prepared for this block you may fall.
Your whole body starts shaking like being in a aircraft in bad weather. The frequency is around 5 Hz. The intensity may amaze you.
They apply a scratch beam to any part of your body. This beam is very hard to resist. Before you know it you may start scratching yourself like crazy
Some high power acoustic beamer is aimed at your leg and after some time your leg feels non-cooperative, not part of your body anymore
They beam you with a frequency that makes you really feel sleepy. You will start yawning and cannot keep your eyes open. This efect starts very suddenly and often ends very abrupt.
How it is applied
They may also do this by devices built into your car
Not a very pleasant feeling but not veru disturbing or damaging
See the world turning
You feel dizzy and see the world turing like when you are very very tired. This effect is not really very real. The moment you are out-of-the-beam you are not turning anymore. Still it is amazing that this can be done.
With this well-known beam they will keep you awake, prevent you from sleeping. This way they wear you out, may be the next day you have an important meeting or must finish important work.
Sweating, nauseous, vomit feeling
You start sweating suddenly, you feel dizzy, you think you may have to vomit. When applied with enough intensity you will start to vomit, you will need at least 30 minutes to recover a little bit from this attack, but it will take hours before your body is acting a bit like before the attack.
How it is applied
They may do this when you are with a friend. Google: navy vomit beam
You have strange dreams about things but the dreams are not like dreams you had before. The dreams may refer to very recent events in your life, like a person you met, a movie yu saw, it is another form of reacting to events in your life
How it is applied
Some people in your environment might tell you they have wild dreams that night trying to get you talking about your experience
The only way to save the world is to stop your national secret services. Breaking laws and violating human rights in horrible ways has become a way of life. They are responsible for most problems in your neighborhood, in your city, in your country, in the world. Make them responsible for what they are doing.
Let them account for in detail, force them to open up their organizations for thorough investigations. Stop their funding if they do not co-operate. Replace directors and staff immediately by normal people for starters.
The Clinton Chronicles October 10 2016 | From: JeremiahFilms The Clinton Chronicles: An Investigation into the Alleged Criminal Activities of Bill Clinton is a 1994 film that accused Bill Clinton of a range of crimes. Back in '94 these criminal psychopaths were just getting warmed up, as history now attests...
Many people involved in the research and investigations reported by this film have been murdered or died under questionable circumstances.
Wikileaks Releases Over 2,000 Emails From Clinton Campaign Chair As State Department Releases Deleted Emails
October 9 2016 | From: RT The internet whistleblowing group Wikileaks released over 2,000 emails involving Hillary Clinton campaign chairman John Podesta.
The release comes the same day the State Department published 350 emails previously deleted from Clinton's private server.
Related: Assange: WikiLeaks to release all US election docs by November 8
WikiLeaks will release documents on the US presidential elections before November 8, the group’s founder, Julian Assange, said in an eagerly anticipated address in Berlin to mark WikiLeaks’ 10th anniversary.
At first inspection the emails date as far back as 2008 to 2016 and cover the gamut from the mundane like "Hillary Clinton’s Chipotle Order” to “Call with HRC” to “My position on the Iran deal” sent from Nancy Rotering to John Podesta.
Wikileaks said Podesta is a long-term associate of the Clintons and served as Bill Clinton’s chief of staff from 1998 to 2001.
The State Department released 350 pages of Clinton’s emails on Friday, following a court order last month.
Newly disclosed emails show top Obama administration officials in close contact with Clinton’s presidential campaign in 2015 about potential fallout from the former secretary of state’s use of a private email server.
According to those email disclosures, the White House was instructing Secretary of State John Kerry to avoid questions about Clinton’s email arrangements, according to the Wall Street Journal.
The emails were obtained by the Republican National Committee as part of a Freedom of Information Act lawsuit seeking records of Clinton’s time in office.
Among them is an email in 2011 about a discussion paper from Huma Abedin on thoughts on post-Gaddafi Assistance & Governance which talked about how to form a new Libyan government, work on a constitution, shore up oil contracts to revenue, understand past conflicts with the Gaddafi administration and its alleged failure share hydrocarbon dollars, and the theft of private property from members of the monarchy.
Podesta served during Bill Clinton administration. Wikileaks warned on its 10th anniversary it would be releasing more emails.
How Can We Stop Drug Trafficking When It’s The CIA That’s Running The Show / The Philippines Fight The Cabal
October 9 2016 | From: Geopolitics
Historically, illegal drugs were being used to destroy sovereign countries, and by now the Philippines’ war on drugs is a regular headline by CIA funded journalists and media networks, and a constant object for criticism of the Soros’ Open Society Foundation funded pseudo-non-government organizations, for being brutal and violative of human rights.
Those same critics, however, failed to put their money where their mouth is, especially when it comes to helping the Duterte government rehabilitate close to a million drug surrendered.
They would rather focus our attention into the 3,700 deaths, some of which are the direct result of the decisive police action, and the rest were victims of the drug syndicates who are now cleaning their own ranks from squealers, i.e. those who have surrendered and subsequently named their suppliers.
The same bleeding hearts who chose to ignore the fact that the statistics related to crime are just the same as in past administrations.
Only this time it is the criminals who are dying, because once a poor brat is hooked into meth, he must do whatever he can get his fix for the day, which include cell phone snatching, daylight robbery, etc.
Other sordid crimes relating to meth addiction were also brought to light including cannibalism, and in the realm of politics, it has sent a former justice secretary to the present senate, on top of congressmen and mayors who are already funded with drug money for years.
In short, the Philippines’ war on drugs is a necessary measure that must be taken before the country plunges completely into another failed state.
Still at 100th day in office, the Duterte government is able to reduce the crime rate to 50% nationwide using only the national budget crafted by his predecessor.
The same budget, which does not include the establishment of rehabilitation centers necessary to help the projected 4 million drug dependents, and for whom the US, EU and UN “human rights advocates” could help more than just paying lip service to the 3,750 so called victims of extrajudicial killings.
To those who would rather criticize the sensible actions of the Philippine government that is enjoying 97% trust rating, are you really raising concerns over human rights vilolations, or just in it to protect the illegal drug industry?
CIA Drug Trafficking Exposed by Political Prisoner
The Real Drug Lords: A brief history of CIA involvement in the Drug Trade
1947 to 1951, France
According to Alfred W. McCoy in The Politics of Heroin in Southeast Asia, CIA arms, money, and disinformation enabled Corsican criminal syndicates in Marseille to wrestle control of labor unions from the Communist Party.
The Corsicans gained political influence and control over the docks - ideal conditions for cementing a long-term partnership with mafia drug distributors, which turned Marseille into the postwar heroin capital of the Western world. Marseille’s first heroin laboratones were opened in 1951, only months after the Corsicans took over the waterfront.
Early 1950s, Southeast Asia
The Nationalist Chinese army, organized by the CIA to wage war against Communist China, became the opium barons of The Golden Triangle (parts of Burma, Thailand and Laos), the world’s largest source of opium and heroin.
Air America, the ClA’s principal airline proprietary, flew the drugs all over Southeast Asia. (See Christopher Robbins, Air America, Avon Books, 1985, chapter 9)
1950s to early 1970s, Indochina
During U.S. military involvement in Laos and other parts of Indochina, Air America flew opium and heroin throughout the area. Many Gl’s in Vietnam became addicts. A laboratory built at CIA headquarters in northern Laos was used to refine heroin. After a decade of American military intervention, Southeast Asia had become the source of 70 percent of the world’s illicit opium and the major supplier of raw materials for America’s booming heroin market.
The Nugan Hand Bank of Sydney was a CIA bank in all but name. Among its officers were a network of US generals, admirals and CIA men, including fommer CIA Director William Colby, who was also one of its lawyers.
With branches in Saudi Arabia, Europe, Southeast Asia, South America and the U.S., Nugan Hand Bank financed drug trafficking, money laundering and international arms dealings. In 1980, amidst several mysterious deaths, the bank collapsed, $50 million in debt. (See Jonathan Kwitny, The Crimes of Patriots: A True Tale of Dope, Dirty Money and the CIA, W.W. Norton & Co., 1 987.)
1970s and 1980s, Panama
For more than a decade, Panamanian strongman Manuel Noriega was a highly paid CIA asset and collaborator, despite knowledge by U.S. drug authorities as early as 1971 that the general was heavily involved in drug trafficking and money laundering.
Noriega facilitated ”guns-for-drugs” flights for the contras, providing protection and pilots, as well as safe havens for drug cartel otficials, and discreet banking facilities. U.S. officials, including then-ClA Director William Webster and several DEA officers, sent Noriega letters of praise for efforts to thwart drug trafficking (albeit only against competitors of his Medellin Cartel patrons).
The U.S. government only turned against Noriega, invading Panama in December 1989 and kidnapping the general once they discovered he was providing intelligence and services to the Cubans and Sandinistas. Ironically drug trafficking through Panama increased after the US invasion. (John Dinges, Our Man in Panama, Random House, 1991; National Security Archive Documentation Packet The Contras, Cocaine, and Covert Operations.)
1980s, Central America
The San Jose Mercury News series documents just one thread of the interwoven operations linking the CIA, the contras and the cocaine cartels. Obsessed with overthrowing the leftist Sandinista government in Nicaragua, Reagan administration officials tolerated drug trafficking as long as the traffickers gave support to the contras.
In 1989, the Senate Subcommittee on Terrorism, Narcotics, and International Operations (the Kerry committee) concluded a three-year investigation by stating:
“There was substantial evidence of drug smuggling through the war zones on the part of individual Contras, Contra suppliers, Contra pilots mercenaries who worked with the Contras, and Contra supporters throughout the region... U.S. officials involved in Central America failed to address the drug issue for fear of jeopardizing the war efforts against Nicaragua.
In each case, one or another agency of the U.S. govemment had intormation regarding the involvement either while it was occurring, or immediately thereafter. Senior U S policy makers were nit immune to the idea that drug money was a perfect solution to the Contras’ funding problems.”
- Drugs, Law Enforcement and Foreign Policy, a Report of the Senate Committee on Foreign Relations, Subcommittee on Terrorism, Narcotics and Intemational Operations, 1989
In Costa Rica, which served as the “Southern Front” for the contras (Honduras being the Northern Front), there were several different ClA-contra networks involved in drug trafficking. In addition to those servicing the Meneses-Blandon operation detailed by the Mercury News, and Noriega’s operation, there was CIA operative John Hull, whose farms along Costa Rica’s border with Nicaragua were the main staging area for the contras.
Hull and other ClA-connected contra supporters and pilots teamed up with George Morales, a major Miami-based Colombian drug trafficker who later admitted to giving $3 million in cash and several planes to contra leaders.
In 1989, after the Costa Rica government indicted Hull for drug trafficking, a DEA-hired plane clandestinely and illegally flew the CIA operative to Miami, via Haiti. The US repeatedly thwarted Costa Rican efforts to extradite Hull back to Costa Rica to stand trial.
Another Costa Rican-based drug ring involved a group of Cuban Amencans whom the CIA had hired as military trainers for the contras. Many had long been involved with the CIA and drug trafficking They used contra planes and a Costa Rican-based shrimp company, which laundered money for the CIA, to move cocaine to the U.S. Costa Rica was not the only route.
Guatemala, whose military intelligence service - closely associated with the CIA - harbored many drug traffickers, according to the DEA, was another way station along the cocaine highway.
Additionally, the Medellin Cartel’s Miami accountant, Ramon Milian Rodriguez, testified that he funneled nearly $10 million to Nicaraguan contras through long-time CIA operative Felix Rodriguez, who was based at Ilopango Air Force Base in El Salvador. The contras provided both protection and infrastructure (planes, pilots, airstrips, warehouses, front companies and banks) to these ClA-linked drug networks.
At least four transport companies under investigation for drug trafficking received US govemment contracts to carry non-lethal supplies to the contras. Southern Air Transport, “formerly” ClA-owned, and later under Pentagon contract, was involved in the drug running as well.
Cocaine-laden planes flew to Florida, Texas, Louisiana and other locations, including several militarv bases Designated as ‘Contra Craft,” these shipments were not to be inspected.
When some authority wasn’t clued in and made an arrest, powerful strings were pulled on behalf of dropping the case, acquittal, reduced sentence, or deportation.
1980s to early 1990s, Afghanistan
ClA-supported Moujahedeen rebels engaged heavily in drug trafficking while fighting against the Soviet-supported govemment and its plans to reform the very backward Afghan society. The Agency’s principal client was Gulbuddin Hekmatyar, one of the leading druglords and leading heroin refiner.
CIA supplied trucks and mules, which had carried arms into Afghanistan, were used to transport opium to laboratories along the Afghan Pakistan border.
The output provided up to one half of the heroin used annually in the United States and three-quarters of that used in Western Europe.
US officials admitted in 1990 that they had failed to investigate or take action against the drug operabon because of a desire not to offend their Pakistani and Afghan allies. In 1993, an official of the DEA called Afghanistan the new Colombia of the drug world.
Mid-1980s to early 1990s, Haiti
While working to keep key Haitian military and political leaders in power, the CIA turned a blind eye to their clients’ drug trafficking. In 1986, the Agency added some more names to its payroll by creating a new Haitian organization, the National Intelligence Service (SIN).
SIN was purportedly created to fight the cocaine trade, though SIN officers themselves engaged in the trafficking, a trade aided and abetted by some of the Haitian military and political leaders.
Washington’s Hidden Agenda: Restore the Drug Trade
In 2014 the Afghan opium cultivation has once again hit a record high, according to the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime’s 2014 Afghan Opium Survey.
“In the course of the last four years, there has been a surge in Afghan opium production. The Vienna based UN Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) reveals that poppy cultivation in 2012 extended over an area of more than 154,000 hectares, an increase of 18% over 2011. A UNODC spokesperson confirmed in 2013 that opium production is heading towards record levels."
According to the 2012 Afghanistan Opium Survey released in November 2012 by the Ministry of Counter Narcotics (MCN) and the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC). potential opium production in 2012 was of the order of 3,700 tons, a decline of 18 percent in relation to 2001, according to UNODC data.
There is reason to believe that this figure of 3,700 tons is grossly underestimated. Moreover, it contradicts the UNOCD’s own predictions of record harvests over an extended area of cultivation.
While bad weather and damaged crops may have played a role as suggested by the UNODC, based on historical trends, the potential production for an area of cultivation of 154,000 hectares, should be well in excess of 6000 tons. With 80,000 hectares in cultivation in 2003, production was already of the order of 3600 tons.
It is worth noting that UNODC has modified the concepts and figures on opium sales and heroin production, as outlined by the European Monitoring Centre for Drugs and Drug Addiction (EMCDDA).
“A change in UN methodology in 2010 resulted in a sharp downward revision of Afghan heroin production estimates for 2004 to 2011. UNODC used to estimate that the entire global opium crop was processed into heroin, and provided global heroin production estimates on that basis.
Before 2010, a global conversion rate of about 10 kg of opium to 1 kg of heroin was used to estimate world heroin production (17). For instance, the estimated 4 620 tonnes of opium harvested worldwide in 2005 was thought to make it possible to manufacture 472 tonnes of heroin (UNODC, 2009a).
However, UNODC now estimates that a large proportion of the Afghan opium harvest is not processed into heroin or morphine but remains ‘available on the drug market as opium’
There is no evidence that a large percentage of opium production is no longer processed into heroin as claimed by the UN.
This revised UNODC methodology has served, – through the outright manipulation of statistical concepts – to artificially reduce the size of of the global trade in heroin.
According to the UNODC, quoted in the EMCDDA report:
“An estimated 3 400 tonnes of Afghan opium was not transformed into heroin or morphine in 2011. Compared with previous years, this is an exceptionally high proportion of the total crop, representing nearly 60 % of the Afghan opium harvest and close to 50 % of the global harvest in 2011."
What the UNODC, – whose mandate is to support the prevention of organized criminal activity – has done is to obfuscate the size and criminal nature of the Afghan drug trade, intimating – without evidence – that a large part of the opium is no longer channeled towards the illegal heroin marke.
In 2012 according to the UNODC, farmgate prices for opium were of the order of 196 per kg.
Each kg. of opium produces 100 grams of pure heroin. The US retail prices for heroin (with a low level of purity) is, according to UNODC of the order of $172 a gram. The price per gram of pure heroin is substantially higher.
The profits are largely reaped at the level of the international wholesale and retail markets of heroin as well as in the process of money laundering in Western banking institutions.
The revenues derived from the global trade in heroin constitute a multibillion dollar bonanza for financial institutions and organized crime.
The following article first published in May 2005 provides a background on the history of the Afghan opium trade which continues to this date to be protected by US-NATO occupation forces on behalf of powerful financial interests.
The Spoils of War: Afghanistan’s Multibillion Dollar Heroin Trade
Since the US led invasion of Afghanistan in October 2001, the Golden Crescent opium trade has soared. According to the US media, this lucrative contraband is protected by Osama, the Taliban, not to mention, of course, the regional warlords, in defiance of the “international community”.
The heroin business is said to be “filling the coffers of the Taliban”. In the words of the US State Department:
“Opium is a source of literally billions of dollars to extremist and criminal groups… [C]utting down the opium supply is central to establishing a secure and stable democracy, as well as winning the global war on terrorism,”
- Statement of Assistant Secretary of State Robert Charles. Congressional Hearing, 1 April 2004
According to the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), opium production in Afghanistan in 2003 is estimated at 3,600 tons, with an estimated area under cultivation of the order of 80,000 hectares. (UNODC at www.unodc.org/unodc ). An even larger bumper harvest is predicted for 2004.
The State Department suggests that up to 120 000 hectares were under cultivation in 2004. (Congressional Hearing, op cit):
“We could be on a path for a significant surge. Some observers indicate perhaps as much as 50 percent to 100 percent growth in the 2004 crop over the already troubling figures from last year.”
In response to the post-Taliban surge in opium production, the Bush administration has boosted its counter terrorism activities, while allocating substantial amounts of public money to the Drug Enforcement Administration’s West Asia initiative, dubbed “Operation Containment.”
The various reports and official statements are, of course, blended in with the usual “balanced” self critique that “the international community is not doing enough”, and that what we need is “transparency”.
The headlines are “Drugs, warlords and insecurity overshadow Afghanistan’s path to democracy”. In chorus, the US media is accusing the defunct “hard-line Islamic regime”, without even acknowledging that the Taliban – in collaboration with the United Nations – had imposed a successful ban on poppy cultivation in 2000.
Opium production declined by more than 90 per cent in 2001.
In fact the surge in opium cultivation production coincided with the onslaught of the US-led military operation and the downfall of the Taliban regime. From October through December 2001, farmers started to replant poppy on an extensive basis.
The success of Afghanistan’s 2000 drug eradication program under the Taliban had been acknowledged at the October 2001 session of the UN General Assembly (which took place barely a few days after the beginning of the 2001 bombing raids). No other UNODC member country was able to implement a comparable program:
“Turning first to drug control, I had expected to concentrate my remarks on the implications of the Taliban’s ban on opium poppy cultivation in areas under their control…
We now have the results of our annual ground survey of poppy cultivation in Afghanistan. This year’s production  is around 185 tons.
This is down from the 3300 tons last year , a decrease of over 94 per cent. Compared to the record harvest of 4700 tons two years ago, the decrease is well over 97 per cent.
Any decrease in illicit cultivation is welcomed, especially in cases like this when no displacement, locally or in other countries, took place to weaken the achievement.”
- Remarks on behalf of UNODC Executive Director at the UN General Assembly, Oct 2001
United Nations’ Coverup
In the wake of the US invasion, shift in rhetoric. UNODC is now acting as if the 2000 opium ban had never happened:
“The battle against narcotics cultivation has been fought and won in other countries and it [is] possible to do so here [in Afghanistan], with strong, democratic governance, international assistance and improved security and integrity.”
- Statement of the UNODC Representative in Afghanistan at the :February 2004 International Counter Narcotics Conference, www.unodc.org/pdf/afg
In fact, both Washington and the UNODC now claim that the objective of the Taliban in 2000 was not really “drug eradication” but a devious scheme to trigger “an artificial shortfall in supply”, which would drive up World prices of heroin.
Ironically, this twisted logic, which now forms part of a new “UN consensus”, is refuted by a report of the UNODC office in Pakistan, which confirmed, at the time, that there was no evidence of stockpiling by the Taliban. (Deseret News, Salt Lake City, Utah. 5 October 2003)
Washington’s Hidden Agenda: Restore the Drug Trade
In the wake of the 2001 US bombing of Afghanistan, the British government of Tony Blair was entrusted by the G-8 Group of leading industrial nations to carry out a drug eradication program, which would, in theory, allow Afghan farmers to switch out of poppy cultivation into alternative crops. The British were working out of Kabul in close liaison with the US DEA’s “Operation Containment”.
The UK sponsored crop eradication program is an obvious smokescreen. Since October 2001, opium poppy cultivation has skyrocketed. The presence of occupation forces in Afghanistan did not result in the eradication of poppy cultivation. Quite the opposite.
The Taliban prohibition had indeed caused “the beginning of a heroin shortage in Europe by the end of 2001″, as acknowledged by the UNODC.
Heroin is a multibillion dollar business supported by powerful interests, which requires a steady and secure commodity flow. One of the “hidden” objectives of the war was precisely to restore the CIA sponsored drug trade to its historical levels and exert direct control over the drug routes.
Immediately following the October 2001 invasion, opium markets were restored. Opium prices spiraled. By early 2002, the opium price (in dollars/kg) was almost 10 times higher than in 2000.
In 2001, under the Taliban opiate production stood at 185 tons, increasing to 3400 tons in 2002 under the US sponsored puppet regime of President Hamid Karzai.
While highlighting Karzai’s patriotic struggle against the Taliban, the media fails to mention that Karzai collaborated with the Taliban. He had also been on the payroll of a major US oil company, UNOCAL. In fact, since the mid-1990s, Hamid Karzai had acted as a consultant and lobbyist for UNOCAL in negotiations with the Taliban. According to the Saudi newspaper Al-Watan:
“Karzai has been a Central Intelligence Agency covert operator since the 1980s. He collaborated with the CIA in funneling U.S. aid to the Taliban as of 1994 when the Americans had secretly and through the Pakistanis [specifically the ISI] supported the Taliban’s assumption of power.”
- Quoted in Karen Talbot, U.S. Energy Giant Unocal Appoints Interim Government in Kabul, Global Outlook, No. 1, Spring 2002. p. 70. See also BBC Monitoring Service, 15 December 2001
History of the Golden Crescent Drug Trade
It is worth recalling the history of the Golden Crescent drug trade, which is intimately related to the CIA’s covert operations in the region since the onslaught of the Soviet-Afghan war and its aftermath.
Prior to the Soviet-Afghan war (1979-1989), opium production in Afghanistan and Pakistan was directed to small regional markets. There was no local production of heroin. (Alfred McCoy, Drug Fallout: the CIA’s Forty Year Complicity in the Narcotics Trade. The Progressive, 1 August 1997).
The Afghan narcotics economy was a carefully designed project of the CIA, supported by US foreign policy.
The story of the take down of the BCCI was told in the excellent film "The International"
As revealed in the Iran-Contra and Bank of Commerce and Credit International (BCCI) scandals, CIA covert operations in support of the Afghan Mujahideen had been funded through the laundering of drug money. “Dirty money” was recycled –through a number of banking institutions (in the Middle East) as well as through anonymous CIA shell companies –, into “covert money,” used to finance various insurgent groups during the Soviet-Afghan war, and its aftermath:
“Because the US wanted to supply the Mujahideen rebels in Afghanistan with stinger missiles and other military hardware it needed the full cooperation of Pakistan. By the mid-1980s, the CIA operation in Islamabad was one of the largest US intelligence stations in the World.
`If BCCI is such an embarrassment to the US that forthright investigations are not being pursued it has a lot to do with the blind eye the US turned to the heroin trafficking in Pakistan’, said a US intelligence officer."
(“The Dirtiest Bank of All,” Time, July 29, 1991, p. 22.)
Researcher Alfred McCoy’s study confirms that within two years of the onslaught of the CIA’s covert operation in Afghanistan in 1979;
“The Pakistan-Afghanistan borderlands became the world’s top heroin producer, supplying 60 per cent of U.S. demand. In Pakistan, the heroin-addict population went from near zero in 1979 to 1.2 million by 1985, a much steeper rise than in any other nation.
CIA assets again controlled this heroin trade. As the Mujahideen guerrillas seized territory inside Afghanistan, they ordered peasants to plant opium as a revolutionary tax.
Across the border in Pakistan, Afghan leaders and local syndicates under the protection of Pakistan Intelligence operated hundreds of heroin laboratories. During this decade of wide-open drug-dealing, the U.S. Drug Enforcement Agency in Islamabad failed to instigate major seizures or arrests.
U.S. officials had refused to investigate charges of heroin dealing by its Afghan allies because U.S. narcotics policy in Afghanistan has been subordinated to the war against Soviet influence there.
In 1995, the former CIA director of the Afghan operation, Charles Cogan, admitted the CIA had indeed sacrificed the drug war to fight the Cold War..."
"...‘Our main mission was to do as much damage as possible to the Soviets. We didn’t really have the resources or the time to devote to an investigation of the drug trade,’ I don’t think that we need to apologize for this. Every situation has its fallout.
There was fallout in terms of drugs, yes. But the main objective was accomplished. The Soviets left Afghanistan.’”
(McCoy, op cit)
The role of the CIA, which is amply documented, is not mentioned in official UNODC publications, which focus on internal social and political factors. Needless to say, the historical roots of the opium trade have been grossly distorted.
According to the UNODC, Afghanistan’s opium production has increased, more than 15-fold since 1979. In the wake of the Soviet-Afghan war, the growth of the narcotics economy has continued unabated. The Taliban, which were supported by the US, were initially instrumental in the further growth of opiate production until the 2000 opium ban.
This recycling of drug money was used to finance the post-Cold War insurgencies in Central Asia and the Balkans including Al Qaeda.
Narcotics: Second to Oil and the Arms Trade
The revenues generated from the CIA sponsored Afghan drug trade are sizeable. The Afghan trade in opiates constitutes a large share of the worldwide annual turnover of narcotics, which was estimated by the United Nations to be of the order of $400-500 billion.
(Douglas Keh, Drug Money in a Changing World, Technical document No. 4, 1998, Vienna UNDCP, p. 4. See also United Nations Drug Control Program, Report of the International Narcotics Control Board for 1999, E/INCB/1999/1 United Nations, Vienna 1999, p. 49-51, and Richard Lapper, UN Fears Growth of Heroin Trade, Financial Times, 24 February 2000).
At the time these UN figures were first brought out (1994), the (estimated) global trade in drugs was of the same order of magnitude as the global trade in oil.
The IMF estimated global money laundering to be between 590 billion and 1.5 trillion dollars a year, representing 2-5 percent of global GDP. (Asian Banker, 15 August 2003). A large share of global money laundering as estimated by the IMF is linked to the trade in narcotics.
Based on recent figures (2003), drug trafficking constitutes:
“The third biggest global commodity in cash terms after oil and the arms trade.”
- The Independent, 29 February 2004
Moreover, the above figures including those on money laundering, confirm that the bulk of the revenues associated with the global trade in narcotics are not appropriated by terrorist groups and warlords, as suggested by the UNODC report.
There are powerful business and financial interests behind narcotics. From this standpoint, geopolitical and military control over the drug routes is as strategic as oil and oil pipelines.
However, what distinguishes narcotics from legal commodity trade is that narcotics constitutes a major source of wealth formation not only for organised crime but also for the US intelligence apparatus, which increasingly constitutes a powerful actor in the spheres of finance and banking.
In turn, the CIA, which protects the drug trade, has developed complex business and undercover links to major criminal syndicates involved in the drug trade.
In other words, intelligence agencies and powerful business syndicates allied with organized crime, are competing for the strategic control over the heroin routes. The multi-billion dollar revenues of narcotics are deposited in the Western banking system.
Most of the large international banks together with their affiliates in the offshore banking havens launder large amounts of narco-dollars.
This trade can only prosper if the main actors involved in narcotics have “political friends in high places.” Legal and illegal undertakings are increasingly intertwined, the dividing line between “businesspeople” and criminals is blurred.
In turn, the relationship among criminals, politicians and members of the intelligence establishment has tainted the structures of the state and the role of its institutions.
Where does the money go? Who benefits from the Afghan opium trade?
This trade is characterized by a complex web of intermediaries. There are various stages of the drug trade, several interlocked markets, from the impoverished poppy farmer in Afghanistan to the wholesale and retail heroin markets in Western countries. In other words, there is a “hierarchy of prices” for opiates.
This hierarchy of prices is acknowledged by the US administration:
“Afghan heroin sells on the international narcotics market for 100 times the price farmers get for their opium right out of the field”.
(US State Department quoted by the Voice of America (VOA), 27 February 2004).
According to the UNODC, opium in Afghanistan generated in 2003 “an income of one billion US dollars for farmers and US$ 1.3 billion for traffickers, equivalent to over half of its national income.”
Consistent with these UNODC estimates, the average price for fresh opium was $350 a kg. (2002); the 2002 production was 3400 tons.
The UNDOC estimate, based on local farmgate and wholesale prices constitutes, however, a very small percentage of the total turnover of the multibillion dollar Afghan drug trade.
The UNODC, estimates “the total annual turn-over of international trade” in Afghan opiates at US$ 30 billion. An examination of the wholesale and retail prices for heroin in the Western countries suggests, however, that the total revenues generated, including those at the retail level, are substantially higher.
Wholesale Prices of Heroin in Western Countries
It is estimated that one kilo of opium produces approximately 100 grams of (pure) heroin. The US DEA confirms that;
“SWA [South West Asia meaning Afghanistan] heroin in New York City was selling in the late 1990s for $85,000 to $190,000 per kilogram wholesale with a 75 percent purity ratio."
- National Drug Intelligence Center
According to the US Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA):
“The price of SEA [South East Asian] heroin ranges from $70,000 to $100,000 per unit (700 grams) and the purity of SEA heroin ranges from 85 to 90 percent”
The SEA unit of 700 gr (85-90 % purity) translates into a wholesale price per kg. for pure heroin ranging between $115,000 and $163,000.
The DEA figures quoted above, while reflecting the situation in the 1990s, are broadly consistent with recent British figures. According to a report published in the Guardian (11 August 2002), the wholesale price of (pure) heroin in London (UK) was of the order of 50,000 pounds sterling, approximately $80,000 (2002).
Whereas as there is competition between different sources of heroin supply, it should be emphasized that Afghan heroin represents a rather small percentage of the US heroin market, which is largely supplied out of Colombia.
“The NYPD notes that retail heroin prices are down and purity is relatively high. Heroin previously sold for about $90 per gram but now sells for $65 to $70 per gram or less.
Anecdotal information from the NYPD indicates that purity for a bag of heroin commonly ranges from 50 to 80 percent but can be as low as 30 percent.
Information as of June 2000 indicates that bundles (10 bags) purchased by Dominican buyers from Dominican sellers in larger quantities (about 150 bundles) sold for as little as $40 each, or $55 each in Central Park.
DEA reports that an ounce of heroin usually sells for $2,500 to $5,000, a gram for $70 to $95, a bundle for $80 to $90, and a bag for $10. The DMP reports that the average heroin purity at the street level in 1999 was about 62 percent.”
The NYPD and DEA retail price figures seem consistent. The DEA price of $70-$95, with a purity of 62 percent translates into $112 to $153 per gram of pure heroin. The NYPD figures are roughly similar with perhaps lower estimates for purity.
It should be noted that when heroin is purchased in very small quantities, the retail price tends to be much higher. In the US, purchase is often by “the bag”; the typical bag according to Rocheleau and Boyum contains 25 milligrams of pure heroin.( Office of National Drug Control Policy )
A $10 dollar bag in NYC (according to the DEA figure quoted above) would convert into a price of $400 per gram, each bag containing 0.025gr. of pure heroin. (op cit). In other words, for very small purchases marketed by street pushers, the retail margin tends to be significantly higher. In the case of the $10 bag purchase, it is roughly 3 to 4 times the corresponding retail price per gram.($112-$153)
In Britain, the retail street price per gram of heroin, according to British Police sources, “has fallen from £74 in 1997 to £61 [in 2004].” [i.e. from approximately $133 to $110, based on the 2004 rate of exchange] (Independent, 3 March 2004).
In some cities it was as low as £30-40 per gram with a low level of purity. (AAP News, 3 March 2004). According to Drugscope ( www.drugscope.org.uk ), the average price for a gram of heroin in Britain is between £40 and £90 ($72- $162 per gram) (The report does not mention purity). The street price of heroin was £60 per gram in April 2002 according to the National Criminal Intelligence Service.
The Hierarchy of Prices
We are dealing with a hierarchy of prices, from the farmgate price in the producing country, upwards, to the final retail street price. The latter is often 80-100 times the price paid to the farmer.
In other words, the opiate product transits through several markets from the producing country to the transshipment country(ies), to the consuming countries. In the latter, there are wide margins between “the landing price” at the point of entry, demanded by the drug cartels and the wholesale prices and the retail street prices, protected by Western organized crime.
The Global Proceeds of the Afghan Narcotics Trade
In Afghanistan, the reported production of 3,600 tons of opium in 2003 would allow for the production of approximately 360,000 kg of pure heroin. Gross revenues accruing to Afghan farmers are roughly estimated by the UNODC to be of the order of $1 billion, with 1.3 billion accruing to local traffickers.
When sold in Western markets at a heroin wholesale price of the order of $100,000 a kg (with a 70 percent purity ratio), the global wholesale proceeds (corresponding to 3600 tons of Afghan opium) would be of the order of 51.4 billion dollars.
The latter constitutes a conservative estimate based on the various figures for wholesale prices in the previous section.
The total proceeds of the Afghan narcotics trade (in terms of total value added) is estimated using the final heroin retail price. In other words, the retail value of the trade is ultimately the criterion for measuring the importance of the drug trade in terms of revenue generation and wealth formation.
A meaningful estimate of the retail value, however, is almost impossible to ascertain due to the fact that retail prices vary considerably within urban areas, from one city to another and between consuming countries, not to mention variations in purity and quality (see above).
The evidence on retail margins, namely the difference between wholesale and retail values in the consuming countries, nonetheless, suggests that a large share of the total (money) proceeds of the drug trade are generated at the retail level.
In other words, a significant portion of the proceeds of the drug trade accrues to criminal and business syndicates in Western countries involved in the local wholesale and retail narcotics markets. And the various criminal gangs involved in retail trade are invariably protected by the “corporate” crime syndicates.
90 percent of heroin consumed in the UK is from Afghanistan. Using the British retail price figure from UK police sources of $110 a gram (with an assumed 50 percent purity level), the total retail value of the Afghan narcotics trade in 2003 (3,600 tons of opium) would be the order of 79.2 billion dollars. The latter should be considered as a simulation rather than an estimate.
Under this assumption (simulation), a billion dollars gross revenue to the farmers in Afghanistan (2003) would generate global narcotics earnings, – accruing at various stages and in various markets – of the order of 79.2 billion dollars.
These global proceeds accrue to business syndicates, intelligence agencies, organized crime, financial institutions, wholesalers, retailers, etc. involved directly or indirectly in the drug trade.
In turn, the proceeds of this lucrative trade are deposited in Western banks, which constitute an essential mechanism in the laundering of dirty money.
A very small percentage accrues to farmers and traders in the producing country. Bear in mind that the net income accruing to Afghan farmers is but a fraction of the estimated 1 billion dollar amount. The latter does not include payments of farm inputs, interest on loans to money lenders, political protection, etc.
The Share of the Afghan Heroin in the Global Drug Market
Afghanistan produces over 70 percent of the global supply of heroin and heroin represents a sizeable fraction of the global narcotics market, estimated by the UN to be of the order of $400-500 billion.
There are no reliable estimates on the distribution of the global narcotics trade between the main categories: Cocaine, Opium/Heroin, Cannabis, Amphetamine Type Stimulants (ATS), Other Drugs.
The Laundering of Drug Money
The proceeds of the drug trade are deposited in the banking system. Drug money is laundered in the numerous offshore banking havens in Switzerland, Luxembourg, the British Channel Islands, the Cayman Islands and some 50 other locations around the globe.
It is here that the criminal syndicates involved in the drug trade and the representatives of the world’s largest commercial banks interact. Dirty money is deposited in these offshore havens, which are controlled by the major Western commercial banks.
The latter have a vested interest in maintaining and sustaining the drug trade. (For further details, see Michel Chossudovsky, The Crimes of Business and the Business of Crimes, Covert Action Quarterly, Fall 1996)
Once the money has been laundered, it can be recycled into bona fide investments not only in real estate, hotels, etc, but also in other areas such as the services economy and manufacturing. Dirty and covert money is also funneled into various financial instruments including the trade in derivatives, primary commodities, stocks, and government bonds.
Concluding Remarks: Criminalization of US Foreign Policy
US foreign policy supports the workings of a thriving criminal economy in which the demarcation between organized capital and organized crime has become increasingly blurred.
The heroin business is not “filling the coffers of the Taliban” as claimed by US government and the international community: quite the opposite!
The proceeds of this illegal trade are the source of wealth formation, largely reaped by powerful business/criminal interests within the Western countries. These interests are sustained by US foreign policy.
Decision-making in the US State Department, the CIA and the Pentagon is instrumental in supporting this highly profitable multibillion dollar trade, third in commodity value after oil and the arms trade.
The Afghan drug economy is “protected”.
The heroin trade was part of the war agenda. What this war has achieved is to restore a compliant narco-State, headed by a US appointed puppet.
The powerful financial interests behind narcotics are supported by the militarisation of the world’s major drug triangles (and transshipment routes), including the Golden Crescent and the Andean region of South America (under the so-called Andean Initiative).
Inflation: The Most Evil Threat = Governments Robbing Their Citizens
October 8 2016 | From: FinalWakeUpCall Inflation, is an invisible, secret tax that not even 1% of common people understand. It is dangerous and most of the time a fatal disease.
If not under control in time, it can destroy society. No government is willing to accept responsibility for causing inflation. They always find an excuse; such as greedy businessmen, selfish trade unions, spendthrift consumers, Arab sheiks that have raised the price of oil, bad weather, or anything else that seems plausible.
Although all these can temporarily produce higher prices for individual items; they cannot produce continuing inflation for one very simple reason; None of the above alleged culprits possesses a printing press, to turn out pieces of paper called money; None can legally authorise a bookkeeper to make entries on ledgers that are the equivalent of those pieces of paper.
Over time, the result will be an immensely lower standard of living, resulting from the declining purchasing power and increasing commodity prices. Real wages will be much lower, as employers will not readily increase wages to keep up with inflation.
Under a paper system without backing, the entire monetary system is controlled by the political class, which has the power to allocate capital or to deny it.
This implies that the people heading the world’s capital markets, rather than acting as capital allocators, have become mere speculative marionettes, whose strings are controlled by the well connected and the influential.
Inflation is a printing press phenomenon. The two important basic questions are:
Why do governments increase the quantity of money?
Why do they produce inflation when they understand the potential harm?
If the quantity of goods and services available for purchase – for short-term ‘output’ – were to increase as rapidly as the quantity of money, prices would tend to be stable.
Prices may fall gradually, as more became available, while people keep their wealth in the form of money. Inflation occurs when the quantity of money rises more rapidly than output and the more rapid the rise in the quantity of money, the greater the rate of inflation.
Output is limited by the physical and human resources available, and by the improvement in knowledge and capacity to use them. At best the output can grow only fairly slowly. The same is the case, although always temporarily and for a brief period of time, for money backed by a commodity. While, paper money has no limitation as does commodity-backed money.
Inflation is a Monetary Phenomenon:
In short; Inflation is primarily a monetary phenomenon, produced by a more rapid increase in the quantity of money than in output. Excessive monetary growth produces inflation, caused by governments. – In general, inflation is worse than a financial crisis.
Taxpayers’ money is spent for nothing without reform in sight; Increase in unemployment, as businesses go bankrupt. – Bankers that caused the 2008 financial crisis were bailed out with people’s money and their managers were left in charge who in turn were taking on even more risks with taxpayer’s deposits in order to rake up even larger bonuses.
Eventually these schemes will result in a massive inflation, never witnessed before. The debt is structural; it’s irresolvable, there is no way to repair this economy.
Inflation is Legalised Theft:
Inflation is nothing more than legalised theft by your government; inflation is only two percent, is what the Statistics suggest. But these numbers don’t show the truth. Today’s real inflation rate is probably closer to 9 %, maybe even higher.
Who knows? All published inflation data are a blatant lie, as these numbers are made up to suit the government.
Showing lower inflation in statistics looks better. The theft committed by governments is concealed.
When central banks print reserves far in excess of domestic savings, the result is inevitably inflation. The more they print, the more capital is available forinstitutions – central banks – to invest.
This creates massive asset inflation, in the price of assets, as central bankers buy – bonds, stocks, and real estate – to push economies upwards all around the world. – Instead of triggering an immediate currency flight, as seen in Argentina or Zimbabwe, this inflation has produced an investment-generated boom.
If additional government spending was financed either by taxes or by borrowing from the public, that would not lead to more rapid monetary growth. In this case the government would have more to spend, while the public would have less.
But the easy way out is increasing the quantity of money, because that’s more attractive since the public doesn’t understand the severe implications, and it seems like magic, like getting something for nothing! But the fact of the matter is that the holders of the money pay for the extra spending, as the extra money raises prices when it is injected into the economy.
Moreover, inflation indirectly yields extra revenue by automatically raising effective tax revenues, as income from the people goes up to compensate for inflation, and people are consequently pushed into higher tax rate brackets.
Additionally, there is the benefit of paying off debt with less valuable currency – less purchasing power – as less valuable units are paying for original units that were more valuable.
Reduction of Monetary Growth:
The cure for inflation is the reduction in the rate of monetary growth, as this is the cause of inflation. Eventually it is a curable disease. Although the bad effects – a temporarily lower economic growth, and higher unemployment would be felt first, the good effects – a lower to zero inflation – would come later.
This would result in a healthier economy, with the potential for rapid noninflationary growth.
But as usual there is the lack of a true desire to cure the addiction of free money, resulting in this disease. In a sense people enjoy inflation. Although they would like to see the prices of goods they buy go down, or at least stop going up, they are more than happy to see the prices of the things they own or sell go up.
Inflation is Destructive:
One reason inflation is so destructive is because while some people benefit greatly, other people suffer. Society is divided into winners and losers. The winners regard the good things that happen to them as the natural result of their own foresight, prudence, and initiative.
They regard the bad things; the rise of prices of goods purchased, as caused by forces outside their control. Almost everyone will say they are opposed to inflation. What they generally mean is that they are opposed to the bad things that have happened to them due to certain effects of inflation.
The paper value of homes is rising. With a mortgage, the interest rate generally is below the rate of inflation. As a result of this, inflation in effect is paying off the mortgage interest payments as well the principal. This effect is an advantage to the home owner, as his equity in the house goes up rapidly. The flip side of the coin is that an interest rate below inflation results in a loss for savers.
As inflation accelerates, rather sooner than later, it is causing so much damage to the fabric of society, by creating so much injustice, and suffering.
Everywhere one looks it is repeatedly published that unemployment and slow growth are cures for inflation; that all alternativemeasures taken will result in more inflation or higher unemployment, which is nonsense. The truth is that slow growth and high unemployment are not cures for inflation. They are the side-effects of a successful cure of a diseased economy.
The general signal of increasing demand will be confused with the specific signals reflecting changes in relative demands. That is why the initial side effect of faster monetary growth is the appearance of prosperity and greater employment.
– When it is discovered that the rise in wages does not coincide with higher demand, the flaw in the system is discovered. Wages and prices are higher not because of higher demand, but primarily to allow for the rises in the pricesof goods they buy.
Subsequently people are off on a price-wage spiral that itself effectively is inflation, and by no means the cause of it. If monetary growth does not speed up faster, the initial stimulus to employment and output will be replaced by the opposite; both will go down in response to the higher prices and wages.
By the way; governments can actually not create jobs, they can only steal from people and give it to others.
If it were politically profitable and feasible to generate a 10% inflation rate, the temptation would be great if inflation indeed reached this level, to raise it to 11, or 12 or 15 %. Zero inflation is a politically feasible objective; 10% is not.
This is the verdict of experience. Nevertheless, central bankers create excessive quantities of money, as they tell us the world needs more inflation to fight deflationary forces, which basically is nonsense as the deflationary forces are the result of the increase of monetary supply.
The Best Solution to Create Inflation:
Moreover, if they want to create inflation, there is no need for excessive money printing. They can create inflation instantly byraising the price of gold, which is the easiest way to create inflation.
A higher dollar price for gold is practically the definition of inflation. The Fed would just declare the price of gold to be, say, $5,000 an ounce and make the price stick using the gold in Fort Knox – assuming it is still there? – Their printing press would maintain a two-way market.
The Fed could sell gold when it hits $5,050 an ounce and buy gold when it hits $4,950 an ounce. That’s a 1% band around the target price of $5,000 an ounce. The band and the use of physical gold would make the target price stick.
A higher price for gold is the same as a lower value for the dollar. The world of $5,000-per-ounce gold also means $10 per gallon gas at the station and $40 for a movie ticket. Nothing happens without consequences.
Santa Claus Doesn’t Exist:
Inflation, in contrast to what economic leaders lead us to believe, is not equivalent to Santa Claus. It can’t bring gifts to everyone. All it does is shift the benefits of the economy around. In the immortal words of President Obama: “inflation spreads the wealth around a little.”
Inflation penalises wage earners, savers, and retirees to the benefit of asset owners. It benefits debtors at the expense of creditors. There’s no net increase in the nation’s wealth. One group is merely taxed for the benefit of the other. This is sold as a benefit to the country by governments. They have to sell it to the people because without inflation they won’t be able to pay their bills.
However, wealth cannot be created by a printing press. This will cause price inflation, asset inflation, credit collapse – or a mixture of all three. Everyone knows this. Nevertheless, our leaders pretend otherwise.
If credit is expanded in excess of savings, it historically always ends in a collapse. So there should be no surprise. When creditors begin to ask the critical question: Can these debts really be financed? Will we get our savings back? If credit has been expanded radically beyond savings, as is the case today in the developed world, the answer is always NO.
It is true that dramatic increases in the money supply eventually lead to inflation. But the key word here is “eventually.” Sometimes it can take a while. The extent of the delay depends on general conditions, and a very important concept known as “monetary velocity.”
Inflation and deflation are not purely products of how much money is in the system. They are products of how fast this moneyis moving through the system.
When banks are lending, businesses are borrowing, and consumers are spending, money changes hands quickly. Under these conditions, the monetary velocity is high.
Conversely, when banks don’t lend the money, businesses are hunkered down, and consumers are saving or paying down debt, money does not change hands quickly. It moves slowly. If the economy grinds to a near halt, as is the case today, eventually money stops changing hands completely.
Inflation is not purely from an increase in the money supply. Sufficient monetary velocity is required to spur a general and persistent increase in the price of goods and services. Without velocity – if money doesn’t move through the system – there is no reason for prices to rise.
The point is that it’s not just about how many units are being printed. It’s about where those units go and how fast they are moving through the system. The end game may indeed be accelerating monetary velocity. The cumulative effect on the rise in prices and a spectacular loss of faith in the system will result in a decline in the desire for owning dollars will plummet, and that means hyperinflation.
How Much Money is in Circulation?
Ever wondered how much money exists? This video compares the world’s richest people, the biggest companies, physical currency, the gold market, the stock market, global debt, and more to give you a sense of the quantity of money that actually exists.
The Flawed Germ Theory; Unfortunately The Basis Of Modern Medicine
October 8 2016 | From: Tbyil Ever wonder why modern medicine is not helping the populations of the western world to become healthier? Maybe the foundation for health is wrong.
Pasteur's germ theory of disease has helped forward the one germ for one disease concept that has raised Big Pharma to the wealthy business of developing drugs for one germ to purportedly cure one disease while causing autoimmune and chronic diseases to flourish from destroyed immune systems.
Germ phobia, here comes the flu, get your flu shots or you may wind up as one of the 36,000 who manage to die from it each year according to the CDC. It's never more, never less - 36,000 deaths each flu season. Isn't there something fishy about that?
Then get out the antibiotics for every case of the sniffles. Don't forget the pharmaceutical antiviral Tamiflu, expensive, not so effective, and dangerous. The germ theory has turned out to be great for the pharmaceutical business model.
Now we have those nasty mosquitoes carrying the Zika virus, which has no real history of being problematic. So spray everything and everyone with toxic chemicals that do cause disease. And let's not forget those new vaccines. Over a billion dollars of government money has been recently set aside for Zika virus research and vaccines.
Why the Germ Theory is Flawed
The following quote is used by Dr. Robert O. Young in his book Sick and Tired?: Reclaim Your Inner Terrain:
“If I could live my life over again, I would devote it to proving that germs seek their natural habitat - diseased tissue - rather than being the cause of the diseased tissue; e.g., mosquitoes seek the stagnant water, but do not cause the pool to become stagnant.”
- Dr. Rudolph Virchow (Father of Pathology 1821 - 1902)
Pasteur was the original scammer of the germ theory, not considered a worthy scientist by his peers. But he had good press. Media bias and corruption are nothing new.
Other scientists, especially Claude Bernard, claimed the inner terrain, which includes overall and organ specific pH levels and all facets of the immune system countered Pasteur's one germ for one disease theory with claims of pleomorphism within damaged or diseased tissue, which the Medical Mafia and Big Pharma refused to acknowledge.
Pleomorphism was proven when Royal Raymond Rife's universal microscope in the late 1930s revealed structural changes in microbes, up to 16, according their host's environment. Microbes can start out as benign then alter themselves to survive if one's inner terrain is unhealthy.
In other words, inflammation and tissue degeneration with acidic pH levels attract pathogenic microbes or encourage existing ones into morphing as pathogenic microbes if already present and harmless or even beneficial. The germ theory hoax is the basis of modern pharmaceutical medicine and killing good food with pasteurization and irradiation.
Not only do our highly acidic junk and processed foods with add sugars promote acidic pH levels under 7.3, so do overworking, stress, and anger. The combination of our environmental toxic load and inadequate nutrition lead to the stagnant pools within our tissues that become the breeding grounds for existing or new pathogenic microbes to thrive.
Detoxing and seeking fresh whole foods with the proper supplements offer more disease protection from germs than all the vaccines in the world.
Vaccinations offer the following tradeoffs for thwarting germs: Death, lifelong disability, or most commonly autoimmune disease vulnerability.
Haven't you noticed? Autoimmune diseases and allergies have risen with the rise in vaccination schedules.
There have been studies in the USA among Amish children and in Europe among those raised on small dairy farms that demonstrate how being exposed to germs at an early age exercises the immune system and make it stronger, thus rendering natural immunization.
This is where rude, crude, over the top and hilarious George Carlin comes in:
Another Reason to Not Trust the CDC's Fear Mongering
Sharyl Attkinson was the news producer for CBS's Washington Bureau. During the Swine Flu “pandemic” of 2008-9, she was intent at getting to the truth of just how much of an epidemic it really was. Sharyl, who is now independent with her own website and her book Stonewalled in circulation, questioned the authenticity of the CDC's reportage on incidents of Swine Flu.
After being stonewalled by the CDC with her Freedom of Information (FOI) requests for detailed statistics on the Swine Flu, she and her CBS Washington Bureau news staff did an end around – they went directly to state health departments and discovered only a very few flu cases, mostly single digit numbers, tested positive for Swine Flu.
Those numbers were not nearly enough to justify claims of a level 6 pandemic, considered the most severe and dangerous international pandemic level.
Then the CDC attempted damage control by announcing they had stopped counting because there were millions of Swine Flu cases and they couldn't keep up with it.
Wow, if the first lie doesn't work then tell a bigger one, even if it doesn't make any sense at all. This incident forced Sharyl out of mainstream news. Can't question the CDC on mainstream TV.
You're better off sticking with alternative media and holistic health approaches for establishing a stronger immune system by lessening your toxic chemical load and increasing your nutritional level with organic foods and supplements.
Smoking Gun For Christchurch Killer Quake: Hillary Clinton Emails Show Advance Warning Of Christchurch Earthquake
October 7 2016 | From: MediaWhores / TheContrail Recently releases Hillary Clinton emails show US State Department advanced knowledge of the big Christchurch Earthquake on 22nd February 2011. This appears to be proof that the killer earthquake was a planned disaster "And on cue..." - See it in the email below...
The first email sent by the State Department to head of the department Hillary Clinton was sent a full 6 hours before the actual quake hit. Washington being 18 hours behind NZST. The second email was sent as the quake hit.
On the presumption the emails are real – this proves advanced knowledge by the US State Department of the Christchurch Earthquakes.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
"And on cue..." - What the fuck?
Clinton Christchurch Earthquakes Emails – Source, Wikileaks
Sources for these emails are being actively and aggressively blocked worldwide. It seems they even knew the size of the quake: 6.3 – a possible reference to the Freemasonic Kabbalah number 666. There is substantial evidence that the quake was in fact much bigger than 6.3 magnitude.
Interestingly – the US disaster relief team “FEMA” was also in Christchurch the week before the big earthquake, and they flew out just hours before the earthquake hit – leaving behind their head disaster coordinator…
If this all sounds unbelievable to you – you probably need to do some research on “HAARP” the radio wave technology being used to influence weather, storms and some say even earthquakes world wide – and nothing new, Tesla was using similar technology last century.
EMF conditions before the Christchurch Earthquake on 14/2/16
More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"
October 7 2016 | From: ZeroHedge Twelve years ago, John Perkins published his book, “Confessions of an Economic Hit Man.” Today, he says “things have just gotten so much worse.”
Twelve years ago, John Perkins published his book, Confessions of an Economic Hit Man, and it rapidly rose up The New York Times’ best-seller list.
In it, Perkins describes his career convincing heads of state to adopt economic policies that impoverished their countries and undermined democratic institutions. These policies helped to enrich tiny, local elite groups while padding the pockets of U.S.-based transnational corporations.
Perkins was recruited, he says, by the National Security Agency (NSA), but he worked for a private consulting company. His job as an undertrained, overpaid economist was to generate reports that justified lucrative contracts for U.S. corporations, while plunging vulnerable nations into debt.
Countries that didn’t cooperate saw the screws tightened on their economies. In Chile, for example, President Richard Nixon famously called on the CIA to “make the economy scream” to undermine the prospects of the democratically elected president, Salvador Allende.
If economic pressure and threats didn’t work, Perkins says, the jackals were called to either overthrow or assassinate the noncompliant heads of state. That is, indeed, what happened to Allende, with the backing of the CIA.
Perkins’ book has been controversial, and some have disputed some of his claims, including, for example, that the NSA was involved in activities beyond code making and breaking.
Perkins has just reissued his book with major updates. The basic premise of the book remains the same, but the update shows how the economic hit man approach has evolved in the last 12 years.
Among other things, U.S. cities are now on the target list. The combination of debt, enforced austerity, underinvestment, privatization, and the undermining of democratically elected governments is now happening here.
I couldn’t help but think about Flint, Michigan, under emergency management as I read The New Confessions of an Economic Hit Man.
I interviewed Perkins at his home in the Seattle area. In addition to being a recovering economic hit man, he is a grandfather and a founder and board member of Dream Change and The Pachamama Alliance, organizations that work for “a world that future generations will want to inherit.”
Sarah van Gelder: What’s changed in our world since you wrote the first Confessions of an Economic Hit Man?
John Perkins: Things have just gotten so much worse in the last 12 years since the first Confessions was written. Economic hit men and jackals have expanded tremendously, including the United States and Europe.
Back in my day we were pretty much limited to what we called the third world, or economically developing countries, but now it’s everywhere.
And in fact, the cancer of the corporate empire has metastasized into what I would call a failed global death economy. This is an economy that’s based on destroying the very resources upon which it depends, and upon the military. It’s become totally global, and it’s a failure.
van Gelder: So how has this switched from us being the beneficiaries of this hit-man economy, perhaps in the past, to us now being more of the victims of it?
Perkins: It’s been interesting because, in the past, the economic hit man economy was being propagated in order to make America wealthier and presumably to make people here better off, but as this whole process has expanded in the U.S. and Europe, what we’ve seen is a tremendous growth in the very wealthy at the expense of everybody else.
On a global basis we now know that 62 individuals have as many assets as half the world’s population.
We of course in the U.S. have seen how our government is frozen, it’s just not working. It’s controlled by the big corporations and they’ve really taken over. They’ve understood that the new market, the new resource, is the U.S. and Europe, and the incredibly awful things that have happened to Greece and Ireland and Iceland, are now happening here in the U.S.
We’re seeing this situation where we can have what statistically shows economic growth, and at the same time increased foreclosures on homes and unemployment.
van Gelder: Is this the same kind of dynamic about debt that leads to emergency managers who then turn over the reins of the economy to private enterprises? The same thing that you are seeing in third-world countries?
Perkins: Yes, when I was an economic hit man, one of the things that we did, we raised these huge loans for these countries, but the money never actually went to the countries, it went to our own corporations to build infrastructure in those countries.
And when the countries could not pay off their debt, we insisted that they privatize their water systems, their sewage systems, their electric systems.
Now we’re seeing that same thing happen in the United States. Flint, Michigan, is a very good example of that. This is not a U.S. empire, it’s a corporate empire protected and supported by the U.S. military and the CIA. But it is not an American empire, it’s not helping Americans. It’s exploiting us in the same way that we used to exploit all these other countries around the world.
van Gelder: So it seems like Americans are starting to get this. What is your sense about where the American public is in terms of readiness to do something?
Perkins: As I travel around the U.S., as I travel around the world, I see that people are really waking up. We’re getting it. We’re understanding that we live on a very fragile space station, and it’s got no shuttles; we can’t get off. We’ve got to fix it, we’ve got to take care of it, and we’re in the process of destroying it.
The big corporations are destroying it, but the big corporations are just run by people, and they’re vulnerable to us. If we really consider it, the market place is a democracy, if we just use it as such.
van Gelder: I want to push back on that one a little bit because so many corporations don’t sell to ordinary consumers, they sell to other companies or to governments, and so many corporations have such an entrenched reward system where if one person doesn’t perform by exploiting the earth they’ll simply get replaced with somebody else who does.
Perkins: I’ve recently been speaking at a number of corporate conferences. I hear time after time after time that many of them want to leave a green legacy. They’ve got children, they’ve got grandchildren, they understand we can’t go on like this.
So what they say is;
“Go out there, start consumer movements. What I want is to receive a hundred thousand emails from my customers saying, ’Hey, I love your product but I’m not going to buy it anymore until you pay your workers a fair wage in Indonesia, or wherever, or clean up the environment, or do something.’
And then I can take that to my board of directors and my big stockholders, to the people who really control whether I get hired or fired.”
van Gelder: I agree, and those campaigns, as you know, have been going on for decades now, and sometimes they have little incremental changes around the edge. But then we look back on it later and we see that there’s enormous resistance because of the profits to be made in continuing the system.
Perkins: I think we’ve seen tremendous changes, though. Just in the last few years, we’ve seen organic foods become very big. Twenty years ago they couldn’t make a go of it. We’ve seen women having bigger positions in corporations, and minorities, and we need to get better at this.
We’ve seen the labeling of many foods. GMOs aren’t included yet, but nutrition and calories and so forth are. And what we really need to do is convince corporations that they’ve got to have a new goal.
We’ve got to let corporations know what their job is: It’s to serve a public interest, and make a decent rate of return for investors. We need investors, but beyond that, every corporation should serve a public interest, should serve the earth, should serve future generations.
van Gelder: I want to ask you about the Trans-Pacific Partnership, and other trade deals. Is there any way that we can beat these things back so they don’t continue supercharging the corporate sphere at the expense of local democracies?
Perkins: They’re devastating; they give sovereignty to corporations over governments. It’s ridiculous.
We’re seeing terrible desperation from people in Central America trying to get away from a system that’s broken, primarily because our trade agreements and our policies toward Latin America have broken them.
And we’re seeing, of course, those similar things in the Middle East and in Africa, these waves of immigrants that are swarming into Europe from the Middle East. These terrible problems that have been created because of the greed of big corporations.
I was just in Central America and what we talk about in the U.S. as being an immigration problem is really a trade agreement problem.
They’re not allowed to impose tariffs under the trade agreements - NAFTA and CAFTA - but the U.S. is allowed to subsidize its farmers. Those governments can’t afford to subsidize their farmers. So our farmers can undercut theirs, and that’s destroyed the economies, and a number of other things, and that’s why we’ve got immigration problems.
van Gelder: Can you talk about the violence that people are fleeing in Central America, and how that links back to the role the U.S. has had there?
Perkins: Three or four years ago the CIA orchestrated a coup against the democratically elected president of Honduras, President Zelaya, because he stood up to Dole and Chiquita and some other big, global, basically U.S.-based corporations.
He wanted to raise the minimum wage to a reasonable level, and he wanted some land reform that would make sure that his own people were able to make money off their own land, rather than having big international corporations do it.
The big corporations couldn’t stand for this. He wasn’t assassinated but he was overthrown in a coup and sent to another country, and replaced by a terribly brutal dictator, and today Honduras is one of the most violent, homicidal countries in the hemisphere.
It’s frightening what we’ve done. And when that happens to a president, it sends a message to every other president throughout the hemisphere, and in fact throughout the world: Don’t mess with us.
Don’t mess with the big corporations. Either cooperate and get rich in the process, and have all your friends and family get rich in the process, or go get overthrown or assassinated. It’s a very strong message.
van Gelder: I wanted to ask about your time spent in Ecuador with indigenous people. I’m wondering if you could talk about how that experience has changed you?
Perkins: Many years ago when I was a Peace Corps volunteer in the Amazon with the Shuar indigenous people there, I was dying.
I got very ill, and my life was saved in one night by a shaman. I’d come out of business school this is 1968, ’69, and I had no idea what a shaman was, but it changed my life by helping me understand that what was killing me was a mindset - what they would call the dream.
I spent many years studying all this, and working with many different indigenous groups, and what I saw was the power of the mindset.
The shamans teach us - the indigenous people teach us - once you change the mindset, then it’s pretty easy to have the objective reality change around it. So, instead of the kind of economy we have now, a death economy, if we can change the mindset we can very quickly move into a life economy.
van Gelder: So what are the mechanisms by which a change in consciousness actually shifts things on the ground?
Perkins: Well, in my opinion the biggest catalyst that needs to go forward to change this is we’ve got to change the corporations. We’ve got to move from that goal that was stated by Milton Friedman in the 1970s, that the only responsibility of corporations is to maximize profits regardless of social and environmental costs.
We change the big corporations by telling them we’re not going to buy from you anymore unless you change your goal. No longer should your goal be to maximize profits regardless of social and environmental costs. Make a decent rate of return for your investors, but serve us, we the people, or we’re not buying from you.
van Gelder : You quote Tom Paine in your book: “If there must be trouble let it be in my day that my child may have peace.” Why did you decide to use that quote?
Perkins : Well, I think Tom Paine was brilliant in that statement. He understood how that would impact people. And he wrote that statement in December 1776.
Washington had lost just about every battle he ever fought; he wasn’t getting any support from the Continental Congress; they weren’t giving his men guns or ammunition or even blankets and shoes, and he was bogged down at Valley Forge. Paine realizes that he’s got to somehow write something that will rally people, and there’s nothing that rallies people more than to think about their children.
That to me is where we’re at right now. I’ve got a daughter and I’ve got an 8-year-old grandson. Bring on the trouble for me, OK, but let’s create a world they’re going to want to live in. And let’s understand that my 8-year-old grandson cannot have an environmentally sustainable and regenerative, socially just, fulfilling world unless every child on the planet has that.
And this is new. It used to be all we had to worry about was our local community, maybe our country. But we didn’t have to worry about the world. But what we know now is that we can’t have peace anywhere in the world, we can’t have peace in the U.S., unless everybody has peace.
Propaganda Techniques Of Empire + Politically Correct Language Control And The Rise Of The Third Reich
October 6 2016 | From: EurasiaReview / NaturalNews Washington’s quest for perpetual world power is underwritten by systematic and perpetual propaganda wars.
Every major and minor war has been preceded, accompanied and followed by unremitting government propaganda designed to secure public approval, exploit victims, slander critics, dehumanize targeted adversaries and justify its allies’ collaboration. In this paper we will discuss the most common recent techniques used to support ongoing imperial wars.
A common technique, practiced by the imperial publicists, is to accuse the victims of the same crimes, which had been committed against them.
The well documented, deliberate and sustained US-EU aerial bombardment of Syrian government soldiers, engaged in operations against ISIS-terrorist, resulted in the deaths and maiming of almost 200 Syrian troops and allowed ISIS-mercenaries to overrun their camp.
In an attempt to deflect the Pentagon’s role in providing air cover for the very terrorists it claims to oppose, the propaganda organs cranked out lurid, but unsubstantiated, stories of an aerial attack on a UN humanitarian aid convoy, first blamed on the Syrian government and then on the Russians.
The evidence that the attack was most likely a ground-based rocket attack by ISIS terrorists did not deter the propaganda mills. This technique would turn US and European attention away from the documented criminal attack by the imperial bombers and present the victimized Syrian troops and pilots as international human rights criminals.
Faced with world opprobrium for its wanton violation of an international ceasefire agreement in Syria, the imperial public spokespeople frequently resort to irrational outbursts at international meetings in order to intimidate wavering allies into silence and shut down any chance for reasonable debate resolving concrete issues among adversaries.
The current ‘US Ranter-in-Chief’ in the United Nations, is Ambassador Samantha Power, who launched a vitriolic diatribe against the Russians in order to sabotage a proposed General Assembly debate on the US deliberate violation (its criminal attack on Syrian troops) of the recent Syrian ceasefire. Instead of a reasonable debate among serious diplomats, the rant served to derail the proceedings.
Identity Politics to Neutralize Anti-Imperialist Movements
Empire is commonly identified with the race, gender, religion and ethnicity of its practioners. Imperial propagandists have frequently resorted to disarming and weakening anti-imperialist movements by co-opting and corrupting black, ethnic minority and women leaders and spokespeople.
The use of such ’symbolic’ tokens is based on the assumption that these are ‘representatives’ reflecting the true interests of so-called ‘marginalized minorities’ and can therefore presume to ’speak for the oppressed peoples of the world’.
The promotion of such compliant and respectable ‘minority members’ to the elite is then propagandized as a ‘revolutionary’, world liberating historical event – witness the ‘election’ of US President Barack Obama.
The rise of Obama to the presidency in 2008 illustrates how the imperial propagandists have used identity politics to undermine class and anti-imperialist struggles.
Under Obama’s historical black presidency, the US pursued seven wars against ‘people of color’ in South Asia, the Middle East and North Africa.
Over a million men and women of sub-Saharan black origin, whether Libyan citizens or contract workers for neighboring countries, were killed, dispossessed and driven into exile by US allies after the US-EU destroyed the Libyan state – in the name of humanitarian intervention.
Hundreds of thousands of Arabs have been bombed in Yemen, Syria and Iraq under President Obama, the so-called ‘historic black’ president.
Obama’s ‘predator drones’ have killed hundreds of Afghan and Pakistani villagers. Such is the power of ‘identity politics’ that ignominious Obama was awarded the ‘Nobel Peace Prize’.
Meanwhile, in the United States under Obama, racial inequalities between black and white workers (wages, unemployment, access to housing, health and educational services) have widened. Police violence against blacks intensified with total impunity for ‘killer cops’.
Over two million immigrant Latino workers have been expelled – breaking up hundreds of thousands of families– and accompanied by a marked increase of repression compared to earlier administrations.
Millions of black and white workers’ home mortgages were foreclosed while all of the corrupt banks were bailed out – at a greater rate than had occurred under white presidents.
This blatant, cynical manipulation of identity politics facilitated the continuation and deepening of imperial wars, class exploitation and racial exclusion. Symbolic representation undermined class struggles for genuine changes.
Past Suffering to Justify Contemporary Exploitation
Imperial propagandists repeatedly evoke the victims and abuses of the past in order to justify their own aggressive imperial interventions and support for the ‘land grabs’ and ethnic cleansing committed by their colonial allies – like Israel, among others.
The victims and crimes of the past are presented as a perpetual presence to justify ongoing brutalities against contemporary subject people.
The case of US-Israeli colonization of Palestine clearly illustrates how rabid criminality, pillage, ethnic cleansing and self-enrichment can be justified and glorified through the language of past victimization.
Propagandists in the US and Israel have created ‘the cult of the Holocaust’, worshiping a near century-old Nazi crime against Jews (as well as captive Slavs, Gypsies and other minorities) in Europe, to justify the bloody conquest and theft of Arab lands and sovereignty and engage in systematic military assaults against Lebanon and Syria.
Millions of Muslim and Christian Palestinians have been driven into perpetual exile. Elite, wealthy, well-organized and influential zionist Jews, with primary fealty to Israel, have successfully sabotaged every contemporary struggle for peace in the Middle East and have created real barriers for social democracy in the US through their promotion of militarism and empire building.
Those claiming to represent victims of the past have become among the most oppressive of contemporary elites. Using the language of ‘defense’, they promote aggressive forms of expansion and pillage.
They claim their monopoly on historic ’suffering’ has given them a ’special dispensation’ from the rules of civilized conduct: their cult of the Holocaust allows them to inflict immense pain on others while silencing any criticism with the accusation of ‘anti-Semitism’ and relentlessly punishing critics.
Their key role in imperial propaganda warfare is based on their claims of an exclusive franchise on suffering and immunity from the norms of justice.
Entertainment Spectacles on Military Platforms
Entertainment spectacles glorify militarism. Imperial propagandists link the public to unpopular wars promoted by otherwise discredited leaders. Sports events present soldiers dressed up as war heroes with deafening, emotional displays of ‘flag worship’ to celebrate the ongoing overseas wars of aggression.
These mind-numbing extravaganzas with crude elements of religiosity demand choreographed expressions of national allegiance from the spectators as a cover for continued war crimes abroad and the destruction of citizens’ economic rights at home.
Much admired, multi-millionaire musicians and entertainers of all races and orientations, present war to the masses with a humanitarian facade. The entertainers smiling faces serve genocide just as powerfully as the President’s benign and friendly face accompanies his embrace of militarism.
The propagandist message for the spectator is that ‘your favorite team or singer is there just for you… because our noble wars and valiant warriors have made you free and now they want you to be entertained.’
The old style of blatant bellicose appeals to the public is obsolete: the new propaganda conflates entertainment with militarism, allowing the ruling elite to secure tacit support for its wars without disturbing the spectators’ experience.
Do the Imperial Techniques of Propaganda Work?
How effective are the modern imperial propaganda techniques? The results seem to be mixed. In recent months, elite black athletes have begun protesting white racism by challenging the requirement for choreographed displays of flag worship. . . opening public controversy into the larger issues of police brutality and sustained marginalization.
Identity politics, which led to the election of Obama, may be giving way to issues of class struggle, racial justice, anti-militarism and the impact of continued imperial wars. Hysterical rants may still secure international attention, but repeated performances begin to lose their impact and subject the ‘ranter’ to ridicule.
The cult of victimology has become less a rationale for the multi-billion dollar US-tribute to Israel, than the overwhelming political and economic influence and thuggery of billionaire Zionist fundraisers who demand US politicians’ support for the state of Israel.
Brandishing identify politics may have worked the first few times, but inevitably black, Latino, immigrant and all exploited workers, all underpaid and overworked women and mothers reject the empty symbolic gestures and demand substantive socio-economic changes – and here they find common links with the majority of exploited white workers.
In other words, the existing propaganda techniques are losing their edge – the corporate media news is seen as a sham. Who follows the actor-soldiers and flag-worshipers once the game has begun?
The propagandists of empire are desperate for a new line to grab public attention and obedience. Could the recent domestic terror bombings in New York and New Jersey provoke mass hysteria and more militarization? Could they serve as cover for more wars abroad . . .?
A recent survey, published in Military Times, reported that the vast majority of active US soldiers oppose more imperial wars. They are calling for defense at home and social justice. Soldiers and veterans have even formed groups to support the protesting black athletes who have refused to participate in flag worship while unarmed black men are being killed by police in the streets.
Despite the multi-billion dollar electoral propaganda, over sixty percent of the electorate reject both major party candidates. The reality principle has finally started to undermine State propaganda.
Politically Correct Language Control And The Rise Of The Third Reich
Stunning new documentary reveals why we must stop the rise of safe spaces, social justice warriors and progressive fanaticism.
In a stunning new documentary released just today, I reveal how politically correct speech control (thought control) gave rise to Adolf Hitler and the Third Reich.
The film reveals how the phenomenon of progressive fanaticism -- safe spaces, social justice warriors, microaggressions, generation snowflake crybullies -- mirrors the Brownshirts of Nazi Germany and escalates demands for obedience into physical violence against innocents.
We're already seeing a similar phenomenon today with numerous Black Lives Matter terrorist shootings of police officers, beatings of innocent people merely because they are white, and calls for extreme acts of violence against police officers and Caucasians.
The aggressive, violent behavior of "progressive fanatics" is now mirroring the rise of the Third Reich that eventually led to genocide and the mass murder of millions.
FYI, "Nazi" means "National Socialism." The Third Reich is often incorrectly described as a "far right" regime. It was actually an extreme rendition of corporate-government fascism, a powerful centralized socialist government, and the kind of strict demands for cultural obedience that we frequency see from the extreme left.
Some of the big issues that characterized the Nazi government were gun control, forced euthanasia, an expansion of entitlement handouts and the invocation of "science" as the justification behind genocide. We see all these same theme today from the political left.
California SB 277, for example, a genocidal medical experiment conducted on children by the state government, was pushed by a radical leftist child killer named Sen. Richard Pan (who would have been right at home in the Third Reich).
America's social justice warriors are intolerant, racist bigots who are a real threat to a peaceful society
Just as in Nazi Germany, today's "social justice warriors" are intolerant, racist, bigoted instigators of violence, and they seek political power at the expense of innocents.
While disavowing the legitimacy of law in a peaceful society, today's P.C. fanatics - including lunatic leftist university students - demand the mass disarmament of private citizens by a totalitarian government, following in lockstep with the early days of Nazi Germany when gun confiscation preceded genocide.
With students in the United States now being vilified for saying that "all lives matter," we have entered a realm of extreme leftist lunacy that cannot be ended with reason or any appeal to logic. The violent rhetoric and destructive actions of the political left have now gone beyond the point of no return, leading America to the exact outcome desired by globalist instigators like George Soros: civil war.
Soros and other seek to tear America apart from within. Seething with hatred for humanity, destructive people of high influence -- like Adolf Hitler, George Soros and Barack Obama - use their positions to enslave people rather than setting them free.
They create conflict rather than preventing it... and they use words as weapons to keep people down rather than as tools to empower individuals.
America has now entered a very dangerous chapter of its history, and conformity to P.C. language is a surrender to the fanaticism of the radical left. Now is the time for all Americans to reject P.C. language control, reject the leftist thought police and assert your right to exercise cognitive diversity with a vast array of ideas and dissenting speech.
At this critical moment in history, we must defend speech freedom or lose it forever, because the Nazi-like P.C. language police on the left demand that you either surrender to them or DIE.
Sound familiar? History has been here before, and it didn't end without massive bloodshed. Eventually, the USA, Russia and other allies had to use kinetic weapons to destroy the Nazi regime and end its "politically correct" genocide against humanity.
Let us hope it doesn't come to that again.
Why Capitalism Creates Useless Jobs
October 6 2016 | From: Strikemag Ever had the feeling that your job might be made up? That the world would keep on turning if you weren’t doing that thing you do 9-5? Anthropology professor and best selling author David Graeber explored the phenomenon of bullshit jobs for our recent summer issue – everyone who’s employed should read carefully
In the year 1930, John Maynard Keynes predicted that technology would have advanced sufficiently by century’s end that countries like Great Britain or the United States would achieve a 15-hour work week.
There’s every reason to believe he was right. In technological terms, we are quite capable of this. And yet it didn’t happen. Instead, technology has been marshaled, if anything, to figure out ways to make us all work more. In order to achieve this, jobs have had to be created that are, effectively, pointless.
Huge swathes of people, in Europe and North America in particular, spend their entire working lives performing tasks they secretly believe do not really need to be performed. The moral and spiritual damage that comes from this situation is profound.
It is a scar across our collective soul. Yet virtually no one talks about it.
Why did Keynes’ promised utopia – still being eagerly awaited in the ‘60s – never materialise? The standard line today is that he didn’t figure in the massive increase in consumerism.
Given the choice between less hours and more toys and pleasures, we’ve collectively chosen the latter. This presents a nice morality tale, but even a moment’s reflection shows it can’t really be true.
Yes, we have witnessed the creation of an endless variety of new jobs and industries since the ‘20s, but very few have anything to do with the production and distribution of sushi, iPhones, or fancy sneakers.
So what are these new jobs, precisely? A recent report comparing employment in the US between 1910 and 2000 gives us a clear picture (and I note, one pretty much exactly echoed in the UK). Over the course of the last century, the number of workers employed as domestic servants, in industry, and in the farm sector has collapsed dramatically.
At the same time, “professional, managerial, clerical, sales, and service workers” tripled, growing “from one-quarter to three-quarters of total employment.” In other words, productive jobs have, just as predicted, been largely automated away (even if you count industrial workers globally, including the toiling masses in India and China, such workers are still not nearly so large a percentage of the world population as they used to be).
But rather than allowing a massive reduction of working hours to free the world’s population to pursue their own projects, pleasures, visions, and ideas, we have seen the ballooning not even so much of the “service” sector as of the administrative sector, up to and including the creation of whole new industries like financial services or telemarketing, or the unprecedented expansion of sectors like corporate law, academic and health administration, human resources, and public relations.
And these numbers do not even reflect on all those people whose job is to provide administrative, technical, or security support for these industries, or for that matter the whole host of ancillary industries (dog-washers, all-night pizza deliverymen) that only exist because everyone else is spending so much of their time working in all the other ones.
These are what I propose to call “bullshit jobs.”
It’s as if someone were out there making up pointless jobs just for the sake of keeping us all working. And here, precisely, lies the mystery.
In capitalism, this is exactly what is not supposed to happen. Sure, in the old inefficient socialist states like the Soviet Union, where employment was considered both a right and a sacred duty, the system made up as many jobs as they had to (this is why in Soviet department stores it took three clerks to sell a piece of meat).
But, of course, this is the very sort of problem market competition is supposed to fix. According to economic theory, at least, the last thing a profit-seeking firm is going to do is shell out money to workers they don’t really need to employ. Still, somehow, it happens.
While corporations may engage in ruthless downsizing, the layoffs and speed-ups invariably fall on that class of people who are actually making, moving, fixing and maintaining things; through some strange alchemy no one can quite explain, the number of salaried paper-pushers ultimately seems to expand, and more and more employees find themselves, not unlike Soviet workers actually, working 40 or even 50 hour weeks on paper, but effectively working 15 hours just as Keynes predicted, since the rest of their time is spent organising or attending motivational seminars, updating their facebook profiles or downloading TV box-sets.
The answer clearly isn’t economic: it’s moral and political. The ruling class has figured out that a happy and productive population with free time on their hands is a mortal danger (think of what started to happen when this even began to be approximated in the ‘60s).
And, on the other hand, the feeling that work is a moral value in itself, and that anyone not willing to submit themselves to some kind of intense work discipline for most of their waking hours deserves nothing, is extraordinarily convenient for them.
Once, when contemplating the apparently endless growth of administrative responsibilities in British academic departments, I came up with one possible vision of hell. Hell is a collection of individuals who are spending the bulk of their time working on a task they don’t like and are not especially good at.
Say they were hired because they were excellent cabinet-makers, and then discover they are expected to spend a great deal of their time frying fish. Neither does the task really need to be done – at least, there’s only a very limited number of fish that need to be fried.
Yet somehow, they all become so obsessed with resentment at the thought that some of their co-workers might be spending more time making cabinets, and not doing their fair share of the fish-frying responsibilities, that before long there’s endless piles of useless badly cooked fish piling up all over the workshop and it’s all that anyone really does.
I think this is actually a pretty accurate description of the moral dynamics of our own economy.
Now, I realise any such argument is going to run into immediate objections:
“Who are you to say what jobs are really ‘necessary’? What’s necessary anyway? You’re an anthropology professor, what’s the ‘need’ for that?”
(And indeed a lot of tabloid readers would take the existence of my job as the very definition of wasteful social expenditure.)
And on one level, this is obviously true. There can be no objective measure of social value.
I would not presume to tell someone who is convinced they are making a meaningful contribution to the world that, really, they are not. But what about those people who are themselves convinced their jobs are meaningless? Not long ago I got back in touch with a school friend who I hadn’t seen since I was 12.
I was amazed to discover that in the interim, he had become first a poet, then the front man in an indie rock band. I’d heard some of his songs on the radio having no idea the singer was someone I actually knew. He was obviously brilliant, innovative, and his work had unquestionably brightened and improved the lives of people all over the world.
Yet, after a couple of unsuccessful albums, he’d lost his contract, and plagued with debts and a newborn daughter, ended up, as he put it, “taking the default choice of so many directionless folk: law school.”
Now he’s a corporate lawyer working in a prominent New York firm. He was the first to admit that his job was utterly meaningless, contributed nothing to the world, and, in his own estimation, should not really exist.
There’s a lot of questions one could ask here, starting with, what does it say about our society that it seems to generate an extremely limited demand for talented poet-musicians, but an apparently infinite demand for specialists in corporate law?
(Answer: if 1% of the population controls most of the disposable wealth, what we call “the market” reflects what they think is useful or important, not anybody else.)
But even more, it shows that most people in these jobs are ultimately aware of it. In fact, I’m not sure I’ve ever met a corporate lawyer who didn’t think their job was bullshit. The same goes for almost all the new industries outlined above.
There is a whole class of salaried professionals that, should you meet them at parties and admit that you do something that might be considered interesting (an anthropologist, for example), will want to avoid even discussing their line of work entirely.
Give them a few drinks, and they will launch into tirades about how pointless and stupid their job really is.
This is a profound psychological violence here. How can one even begin to speak of dignity in labour when one secretly feels one’s job should not exist? How can it not create a sense of deep rage and resentment.
Yet it is the peculiar genius of our society that its rulers have figured out a way, as in the case of the fish-fryers, to ensure that rage is directed precisely against those who actually do get to do meaningful work.
For instance: in our society, there seems a general rule that, the more obviously one’s work benefits other people, the less one is likely to be paid for it.
Again, an objective measure is hard to find, but one easy way to get a sense is to ask: what would happen were this entire class of people to simply disappear?
Say what you like about nurses, garbage collectors, or mechanics, it’s obvious that were they to vanish in a puff of smoke, the results would be immediate and catastrophic.
A world without teachers or dock-workers would soon be in trouble, and even one without science fiction writers or ska musicians would clearly be a lesser place.
It’s not entirely clear how humanity would suffer were all private equity CEOs, lobbyists, PR researchers, actuaries, telemarketers, bailiffs or legal consultants to similarly vanish. (Many suspect it might markedly improve.)
Yet apart from a handful of well-touted exceptions (doctors), the rule holds surprisingly well.
Even more perverse, there seems to be a broad sense that this is the way things should be. This is one of the secret strengths of right-wing populism.
You can see it when tabloids whip up resentment against tube workers for paralysing London during contract disputes: the very fact that tube workers can paralyse London shows that their work is actually necessary, but this seems to be precisely what annoys people.
It’s even clearer in the US, where Republicans have had remarkable success mobilizing resentment against school teachers, or auto workers (and not, significantly, against the school administrators or auto industry managers who actually cause the problems) for their supposedly bloated wages and benefits.
It’s as if they are being told “but you get to teach children! Or make cars! You get to have real jobs! And on top of that you have the nerve to also expect middle-class pensions and health care?”
If someone had designed a work regime perfectly suited to maintaining the power of finance capital, it’s hard to see how they could have done a better job.
Real, productive workers are relentlessly squeezed and exploited.
The remainder are divided between a terrorised stratum of the – universally reviled – unemployed and a larger stratum who are basically paid to do nothing, in positions designed to make them identify with the perspectives and sensibilities of the ruling class (managers, administrators, etc) – and particularly its financial avatars – but, at the same time, foster a simmering resentment against anyone whose work has clear and undeniable social value.
Clearly, the system was never consciously designed [actually you were right up until this statement]. It emerged from almost a century of trial and error. But it is the only explanation for why, despite our technological capacities, we are not all working 3-4 hour days.
Western Banks Crumble While Yuan Joins The IMF SDR Basket
October 5 2016 | From: Geopolitics The gradual Global Reset continues with the official inclusion of the Chinese Yuan (RMB) as prime alternative to the US dollar as global currency of exchange which should provide a smooth transition away from fiat dollar.
While this SDR inclusion was preannounced months ago, still the multiple investigations of fraudulent bank services, and the ongoing fall of the Big Banks suggest that the ongoing Global Reset will continue no matter the geopolitical noise, which are all part of the hybrid World War 3 being fought against the outgoing Nazionist Word Order.
Related: Bix Weir On Global Financial Collapse: It’s Happening, Right on Time When one considers the fact that the Chinese Yuan is backed with real, tangible hard assets, e.g. gold and industrial infrastructure, it would be very easy to say that the US dollar is doomed as it should be since its integrity and real value are nil at this point in time.
Yes, the Khazarian bankers can’t hide it anymore. They have a problem, a very big one, and they want to pass it on to the Western taxpayers, one more time.
Deutsche Bank Troubles Raise Fear of Global Shock
"Germany’s largest bank appears in danger, sending stock markets worldwide on a wild ride. Yet the biggest
source of worry is less about its finances than a vast tangle of unknowns - not least, whether Europe can muster the will to mount a rescue in the event of an emergency.
In short, fears that Europe lacks the cohesion to avoid a financial crisis may be enhancing the threat of one.
The immediate source of alarm is the health of Deutsche Bank, whose vast and sprawling operations, are entangled with the fates of investment houses from Tokyo to London to New York.
Deutsche is staring at a multibillion-dollar fine from the Justice Department for its enthusiastic participation in Wall Street’s festival of toxic mortgage products in the years leading up to financial crisis of 2008.
Given Deutsche’s myriad other troubles - a role in the manipulation of a financial benchmark, claims of trades that violated Russian sanctions and a generalized sense of confusion about its mission - the American pursuit of a stiff penalty comes at an inopportune time.
Who will provide the additional investment if not the German people who will be forced to swallow a slew of legislated austerity measures later on?
But the bigger problem for the Banking Canal is: Deutsche bank is just one domino in the entire fraudulent fractional banking system that is visibly in turmoil, and it is expected to bring down the entire fiat financial system with it.
Why Deutsche Bank is Now the Biggest Worry in the Financial World
"Shares in Deutsche have lost more than half their value so far this year. The IMF hasn’t helped matters, saying in June that the bank is the greatest contributor to systemic risk in the world’s biggest lenders.
Q How is Deutsche Bank reacting?
A John Cryan, the Briton who became chief executive last summer, has set out a five-year restructuring plan that will cut about 15,000 of Deutsche’s 101,000-strong workforce. Its dividend has been suspended for two years, and Cryan expects to close dozens of overseas sites. It sold Abbey Life, its old portfolio of British life insurance products, for euros 1billion on Wednesday.
Q What else can the bank do?
A Rumours surfaced over the summer of a possible merger between Deutsche and Commerzbank, its biggest competitor, and more recently the idea of another multi-billion-euro rights issue has been floated. Again, these reports have been played down by the bank.
Deutsche also has the option to “switch off” regular coupon payments on its coco bonds, providing a small amount of breathing space. Analysts at Autonomous have also suggested that the bank could save euros 2.8billion by not paying staff bonuses."
However, the possible merger between Deutsche Bank and Commerzbank can only go as far as the next collapse…
Is Another German Bank in Trouble? Commerzbank to Cut 9,600 Jobs and Suspend Dividend
"Commerzbank, the second-biggest bank in Germany, has suspended its dividend and revealed more than 9,000 job losses as it tries to shore up its business in the face of ultra-low interest rates and sagging client activity.
The bank said its decision to cut almost one in five of its employees worldwide and merge two of its largest businesses will result in a €700m write-off and a loss for this quarter.
The bank’s Mittelstand division, seen as the engine room of Germany’s mid-sized corporate economy, will be combined with its corporate branch, while investment activity will be scaled back.
Commerzbank also warned that “ongoing weakness in the shipping markets” would push up its loan loss provisions in the coming months. The bank decided four years ago to exit the ship financing business but still has about €8bn on its books.
“We simply don’t earn enough money to lead the bank sustainably and successfully into the future. And this situation will get worse if we don’t do something about it,” chief executive Martin Zielke said in a draft note to employees, according to Reuters.
The bank will cease dividend payments “for the time being”, prompting analysts at RBC Capital Markets to scrap their forecasts for payments until at least 2018."
"ING Groep NV, the largest Netherlands lender, will announce thousands of job cuts at its investor day on Monday, Dutch newspaper Het Financieele Dagblad reported Friday, citing unidentified people with knowledge of the matter.
The reorganization will result in more central management and may generate billions of euros in savings, the paper said. Raymond Vermeulen, a spokesman for the Amsterdam-based bank, declined to comment on the report. The bank employs about 52,000 people, according to its website."
Stanford Endowment Joins Long List of College Funds Doing Poorly
"The Stanford University endowment posted a 0.4 percent loss on its investments for fiscal 2016, underperforming some large rivals but doing better than Harvard University’s 2.0 percent loss. The median return for foundations and endowments tracked by the Wilshire Trust Universe Comparison Service was negative 0.3 percent.
Harvard is the largest university endowment, with $35.7 billion in assets. Harvard president Drew Faust said the “disappointing” investment return would “constrain our budgets,’’ according to the Harvard Crimson.
Harvard Management Co. is seeking a new chief executive after the departure this summer of Stephen Blyth after a short, year-and-a-half stint. The endowment manager is under pressure to boost performance; Blyth had said it needed to produce at least a 5 percent return annually to meet its obligations to Harvard’s annual operating budget."
Reckoning Comes for U.S. Pension Funds as Investment Returns Lag
"The $1.9 trillion shortfall in U.S. state and local pension funds is poised to grow as near record-low bond yields and global stock-market turmoil reduce investment gains, increasing pressure on governments to put more money into the retirement systems.
With the Federal Reserve deciding to hold interest rates steady at its meeting Wednesday, the funds will continue to be squeezed by rock-bottom payouts on fixed-income securities just as stocks fall overseas and post only modest U.S. gains.
As a result, pensions in Illinois, Missouri and Hawaii this year have moved to roll back the assumed rate of return on their investments, joining the dozens that have taken that step over the past two years.
“There’s little light at the end of the tunnel as far as pension funding is concerned,” said Vikram Rai, head of municipal-bond strategy at Citigroup Inc. in New York.
“I expect funded ratios will drop further. It’ll require increased pension contributions on the part of the states and local government, but most state and local governments don’t have the ability to do so.”
This expanding financial time bomb is being exposed one more time with the US senate investigations on Wells Fargo’s highly deceptive sales strategies victimizing even its long-time customers.
Wells Fargo Problems Far From Over as Investigations and Lawsuits Expand
"Alex Polonsky was watching Senator Elizabeth Warren of Massachusetts lay into Wells Fargo’s chief executive, John Stumpf, on 20 September when he finally had enough.
He picked up the phone and called Jonathan Delshad, who would soon become his lawyer. Polonsky used to work for Wells Fargo, but according to his lawsuit, he was demoted and later terminated for not meeting his sales quotas.
The bank has recently come under scrutiny for such quotas after it was revealed that for years, thousands of its employees had been opening unauthorized accounts in order to meet them.
More than 2m such accounts were opened without customers’ permission and more than 5,300 Wells Fargo employees have been fired – with about 1,000 being dismissed each year over the past five years.
At the same time, employees like Polonsky were fired for not meeting their quotas."
Surely, the complete Western financial collapse will just be a matter of time, and contrary to some assertions, it’s not something that the Khazarian bankers are fretting much about.
They have already invested their loot in China, India and even in Russia. They have profited from every systemic shift which have happened before.
But unlike before, they will now have a two-pronged approach which assures their continued occupation of the Halls of Power in the West.
Aside from the simple transfer of financial assets to the “winning side” which they don’t have full control of anymore, they will also be using the event to install in the West what they have been eagerly egging on, and that is the full digitization of fiat currencies, and the full integration of European human resources into their quantum supercomputer AI-based economic system.
In order to effect this gigantic automated NWO plan, the United States has recently transferred its authority over the ICANN;
“A nonprofit organization that is responsible for coordinating the maintenance and procedures of several databases related to the namespaces of the Internet – thereby ensuring the network’s stable and secure operation...”
- to the United Nations, in addition to all measures already in the pipeline, e.g. drone squadron, surveillance mechanisms, armed police, etc.
This march towards Technocratic Dictatorship will continue unless the people in the US and Europe will take a decisive action against the PuppetMasters right in their own countries.
To make these regressive changes happen, the United Nations is already conditioning the minds of its subjects about “the 3rd leg of the global financial crisis – with prospect of epic debt defaults.”
UN Fears Third Leg of the Global Financial Crisis – With Prospect of Epic Debt Defaults
"The third leg of the world’s intractable depression is yet to come. If trade economists at the United Nations are right, the next traumatic episode may entail the greatest debt jubilee in history.
It may also prove to be the definitive crisis of globalized capitalism, the demise of the liberal free-market orthodoxies promoted for almost forty years by the Bretton Woods institutions, the OECD, and the Davos fraternity.
“Alarm bells have been ringing over the explosion of corporate debt levels in emerging economies, which now exceed $25 trillion. Damaging deflationary spirals cannot be ruled out,” said the annual report of the UN Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD).
We know already that the poisonous side-effect of zero rates and quantitative easing in the US, Europe, and Japan was to flood developing nations with cheap credit, upsetting their internal chemistry and drawing them into a snare. What is less understood is just how destructive this has been.
Much of the money was wasted, skewed towards “highly cyclical and rent-based sectors of limited strategic importance for catching up,” it said.
Worse yet, these countries have imported the deformities of western finance before they are ready to cope with the consequences. This has undermined what UNCTAD calls the “profit-investment nexus” that ultimately drives growth and prosperity.
The extraordinary result is that some countries are slipping backwards, victims of “premature deindustrialisation”. Many of them have fallen further behind the rich world than they were in 1980 despite opening up their economies and following the global policy script diligently.
The middle income trap closed in on Latin America and the non-oil states of the Middle East a long time ago, but now it is beginning to close in such countries as Malaysia and Thailand, and in some respects China. “The benefits of a rushed integration into international financial markets post-2008 are fast evaporating,” it said.
If policymakers fail to mitigate the negative impacts of unchecked global market forces, then a turn to protectionism could trigger a vicious downward spiral for everyone.
… What is clear is that world will soon need a massive and coordinated spending push by governments to create demand and bring the broken global system back into equilibrium. UNCTAD is entirely right about that.
The key phrase of that article is “the next traumatic episode may entail the greatest debt jubilee in history” which may sound good until we realize that they are just resetting the same old fiat debt-based slavery system because the derivative bubble numbers are getting so large, it complicates the manipulations even more, much like they reset the calendar from BCE to CE, or AD, to hide those countless genocides that their bloodlines have committed thousands of years ago.
At the same time, and in addition to simplifying the whole corrosive system, what these economic gurus are trying to project is that economics and finance are so complicated, but the solution still lies within that same grossly defective monetary system of controlling resources.
There can never be anything better than this debt slavery quicksand in spite of the existence of exotic technologies that would render the whole economic system obsolete.
It must be known to all, that the progressive BRICS are not suppressing these same exotic technologies but are gradually raising global awareness to the fact, as some Russian scientists have already announced the discovery of an industrial method to produce any element, known and unknown, which runs counter to the economics of scarcity, at the press of a button.
China, for its part, is already manufacturing and selling HHO kits to increase the fuel efficiency of existing internal combustion engines, or eliminate the use of fossil fuels altogether.
A HHO system is basically a small device that uses electricity to release hydrogen based gas from water, called HHO, which is then directed into a vehicle’s air intake system. The “new air”, is enriched with hydrogen now – and it is highly explosive. This enriched air can now be mixed with less fuel in order to achieve the same explosive inside the engine. This is basically how HHO kits save fuel.
The dense fog of highly distractive lies and deceptions is covering both sides of the Atlantic. But here in Asia, the options are pretty clear, i.e. continued participation of the Globalist Empire, or the total separation through a parallel system of the BRICS Alliance’s New Silk Roads, CIPS bank transfer system, and a separate internet backbone.
But just like the Syrian crisis, the ultimate solution to the Western financial crisis is the total defeat of the Khazarian Criminal Syndicate which has full control of the Western governments, before the march towards global prosperity can commence in earnest.
Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist
October 5 2016 | From: BePure / Sott Last week I attended a conference by Dr Julia Rucklidge from the University of Canterbury where she presented her groundbreaking research on the treatment of mental health disorders such as ADHD, bipolar, depression and anxiety using therapeutic doses of micronutrients.
More and more we are seeing that what we eat, and what we absorb from our food choices, affect more than our physical appearance and physical fitness.
Related: Nutrition And Mental Health
Yes these things are important, but actually there are numerous benefits to eating a nutrient-dense diet with supporting products that don’t get mentioned. And they should. Our mental health is something that affects every interaction we have with ourselves, our families, our work colleagues and our friends.
The takeaway message from this conference is the prevalence of mental health problems in the modern world is concerning. According to Dr Rucklidge:
“There is a very real danger of mental health care bankrupting our society in terms of cost and social implications.”
In this blog I’m going to address the link between nutrition and mental health. There are many other factors involved in the prevention and treatment of mental illness. We are only addressing nutrition in this blog as it is such an important factor to consider.
The Whole Picture
One in ten New Zealanders are on antidepressants. This is an eight-fold increase in total prescription numbers from 1998.
There has been a four-fold increase in claimed disability financial support due to psychiatric disorders in New Zealand from 1991 to now. Both these figures are supplied through Statistics New Zealand’s annual reports.
In a period of time where more “cutting edge medicines” have been researched, developed and trialled on our population, rates of mental health disorders continue to rise.
The long term results from the National Institute of Mental Health’s (NIMH) MTA study found that children taking medication for ADHD for longer than 24 months showed “significant markers not of beneficial outcome, but of deterioration… medicated children were also slightly smaller, and higher delinquency scores.” Source: The MTA cooperative randomised clinical trial.
It’s fair to say our current gold standards are not working, so what else has changed in this time period?
Food And Stress
This increase in mental health conditions follows the same exponential rise of obesity and type two diabetes from the 1970s to now. We know that the rise in medical knowledge and the availability of medications hasn’t resolved the problem, nor has a 300% increase in gym memberships, so what has changed to negatively affect our mental and metabolic health?
I firmly believe, and the evidence supports this idea, that what we are eating and the nutrients we give to our bodies drastically affect our weight, energy, metabolic health AND mental health in both negative and positive ways.
For many people gluten, refined grains and sugar can cause problems affecting everything from digestion, mood, skin disorders like rashes and eczema, to joint pain, weight gain, migraines, thyroid disorders, mental health disorders and behavioural issues such as ADHD.
Gluten is a protein found in wheat, barley, and rye, and is what gives bread its stretch. Many nutritionists now believe many people - not just those with gluten intolerance or Celiac Disease - should avoid gluten as it is a known contributor to leaky gut.
This is problematic for mental health conditions because if serotonin is not kept within your gut and digestive tract, it cannot engage in chemical reactions within your brain to increase your mood.
Refined grains and sugar cause blood sugar spikes and energy crashes as insulin is produced to mitigate the quick rush of glucose and fructose. You can read in length about the problem with refined grains and sugar.
Lastly, the stress of modern living has a huge impact on our mental health. Cortisol is a stress hormone that is activated by everything from traffic, fighting with a loved one, worry, anxiety, excessive caffeine intake and even exercise. Cortisol initiates our fight or flight response in our nervous system. In ancestral times this response was necessary for fleeing from danger.
In the modern world, we perceive danger to be everywhere (i.e we release cortisol) despite the fact we aren’t running away from a lion. This constant flood of cortisol prevents our “rest and digest” nervous system from operating. This prevents recovery from exercise or the day’s stressors, the production of growth hormone and serotonin as well as preventing sleep and digestion.
Managing stress is critical for those people with mental health concerns.
The Brain Gut Connection
Current research in the field of microbiome health and mental health conditions confirms the theory our stomach is our second brain. There are several reasons for this. The first is Serotonin.
Serotonin is your happiness hormone. It is a neurotransmitter that relays messages from all areas of your brain to your cells. An imbalance or deficiency in serotonin is thought to influence the brain in a way that causes depression.
Up to 70% of your bodies total serotonin lives in your digestive tract. If you have leaky gut, a food intolerance or gut dysbiosis through poor diet or antibiotic use, the serotonin can leak out of your gut and is then unable to do its job in your brain.
The second factor has to do with the nutritional and energy demands of our brains. Our brains are approximately 2% of our body weight. However, it consumes 20-40% of our metabolism. In other words, it is constantly and disproportionately demanding nutrients and oxygen. One litre of blood enters your brain every minute, carrying whatever nutrients it has access to.
Giving it nutrient dense food and access to as many nutrients as possible is critical for mental health.
So What Can We Do?
Dr Rucklidge’s research suggests we need to ensure good nutrient-density in our diets and use therapeutic doses of micronutrients to support mental health conditions.
“Micronutrients such as zinc, vitamin D, Essential Fatty Acids and many more have been used in many open label trials across anxiety, sleep issues, bipolar disorder and ADHD.
All have shown significant reductions in psychiatric and psychological symptoms. Response rates range from 50-80% improvements."
Source: Dr Julia Rucklidge at the University of Canterbury.
The current medical model seeks to use medication first before addressing stress, food, sleep and nutrient deficiencies. I would personally love to see this equation flipped. If we can address dietary and lifestyle factors first, along with nutrient support, while using medication sparingly on a case-by-case basis, we can greatly improve the mental health of our nation.
If you or a loved one are currently struggling with depression-like symptoms, bipolar ADHD or anxiety please seek assistance. You can contact your GP or health care provider, the BePure team at email@example.com, www.depression.org.nz or the depression helpline at 0800 111 757.
He is well-known for his pioneering work in developmental psychology at Harvard University, where he has spent decades documenting how babies and small children grow, and is an exceptional and highly-regarded researcher.
So it may be surprising to learn that he believes the diagnosis of ADHD (attention deficit hyperactivity disorder) is an invention - and only benefits the pharmaceutical industry and psychiatrists.
Mislabeling Mental Illness
"That is the history of humanity: Those in authority believe they're doing the right thing, and they harm those who have no power", says Jerome Kagan.
In an interview with Spiegel, Kagan addressed the skyrocketing rates of ADHD in America, which he attributes to "fuzzy diagnostic practices."
He illustrated his point with the following example:
Say fifty years ago you have a 7-year-old who is bored in school and exhibits disruptive behavior. Back then, he would be labeled as lazy. But today, that same child is said to suffer from ADHD. That's why we've seen such a dramatic increase in the disorder.
Every child who is having problems in school is sent to see a pediatrician, who then claims it's ADHD and prescribes Ritalin.
"In fact, 90 percent of these 5.4 million kids don't have an abnormal dopamine metabolism. The problem is, if a drug is available to doctors, they'll make the corresponding diagnosis," he said.
"We could get philosophical and ask ourselves: "What does mental illness mean?"
If you do interviews with children and adolescents aged 12 to 19, then 40 percent can be categorized as anxious or depressed.
But if you take a closer look and ask how many of them are seriously impaired by this, the number shrinks to 8 percent.
Describing every child who is depressed or anxious as being mentally ill is ridiculous.
Adolescents are anxious, that's normal. They don't know what college to go to. Their boyfriend or girlfriend just stood them up. Being sad or anxious is just as much a part of life as anger or sexual frustration," Kagan told Spiegel.
What are the implications for the millions of children who are inaccurately diagnosed as mentally ill? Kagan believes it's devastating because they think there is something fundamentally wrong with them.
He's not the only psychologist to raise the alarm about this trend, but Kagan and others feel they're up against:
"An enormously powerful alliance: pharmaceutical companies that are making billions, and a profession that is self-interested."
Kagan himself suffered from inner restlessness and stuttering as a child, but his mother told him: "There's nothing wrong with you. Your mind is working faster than your tongue." He thought at the time: "Gee, that's great, I'm only stuttering because I'm so smart." If he had been born in the present era, he most likely would have been classified as mentally ill.
ADHD isn't the only mental illness epidemic among children that worries Kagan, depression is another.
In 1987, about one in 400 American teenagers was using an antidepressant. By 2002, the numbers leaped to one in 40.
He feels it's another overused diagnosis, simply because the pills are available.
Instead of immediately resorting to pharmaceutical drugs, he thinks doctors should take more time with the child to find out why they aren't as cheerful, for instance. At the very least, a few tests should be carried out - and an EEG for certain, especially since studies have shown that people who have heightened activity in the right frontal lobe respond poorly to antidepressants.
Kagan remembers going into a textbook-type depression after a major research project he was involved with failed. He had insomnia and met all the other clinical criteria for depression. But since he knew what the cause was, he didn't seek professional help. After six months, the depression was gone.
Under normal circumstances, he would have been diagnosed as mentally ill by a psychiatrist and put on medication.
But here lies an important distinction: when a life event overwhelms us, it's common to fall into a depression for a while. But there are those who have a genetic vulnerability and experience chronic depression; they are mentally ill.
It's crucial to look not only at the symptoms, but the causes.
This is where psychiatry drops the ball, as it's the only medical profession that establishes illness on symptoms alone.
Such a blind spot opens the door for new maladies - like bipolar disorder, which we never used to see in children. As it stands today, nearly a million Americans under the age of 19 are diagnosed with it.
"A group of doctors at Massachusetts General Hospital just started calling kids who had temper tantrums bipolar. They shouldn't have done that. But the drug companies loved it because drugs against bipolar disorders are expensive. That's how the trend was started. It's a little like in the 15th century, when people started thinking someone could be possessed by the devil or hexed by a witch," said Kagan.
When asked if there are alternatives to pharmaceutical drugs for behavioral abnormalities, Kagan said we could look at tutoring, as an example, for kids diagnosed with ADHD. After all, it's never the ones who are doing well in school that are diagnosed, it's always the children who are struggling.
$40 Billion US In Aid To Israel: For Whom And For What? + Documentary Reveals How Israel Convinces Americans: “Palestine Occupies Israel”
October 4 2016 | From: Sott / GlobalResearch / Various Recently, the United States just renewed military aid to Israel in a decade-long, $38 billion deal - the largest of its kind in American history.
It represents a significant increase in aid, roughly $3.8 billion a year - expected to be supplemented by additional assistance through US Congress - up from $3 billion per year previously.
The Atlantic in an article titled, Why Does the United States Give So Much Money to Israel?, attempted to explain the reasoning behind the otherwise unreasonable and unprecedented assistance by claiming:
“Defenders of the deal would say it's necessary. Dalton described the uptick in spending as a natural extension of the long-standing relationship between the United States and Israel, "as well as close ties between those countries and their peoples."
She described the "fraught neighborhood" surrounding Israel: war-torn Syria to the northeast, Hezbollah-influenced Lebanon to the north, and an Islamist insurgency in Egypt's Sinai to the south, all of which help explain the historically high promise of $5 billion in missile funding over the next 10 years."
However, experienced geopolitical analysts will point out that the United States does not have "friends," "allies," or "relationships" - only interests and those who serve them.
And while The Atlantic attempts to explain the deal as a means of maintaining a "relationship," it and other publications admit that there are "strings attached." If examined carefully, these strings reveals just what interests this supposed "relationship" serves.
CNBC would say just that in its article, Big US military aid package to Israel has strings attached, claiming:
“...it's structured so that more Israeli defense spending goes to U.S. companies. Israel's long-standing special arrangement for funds from the United States previously allowed Israel to spend 26 percent of the money in Israel - on Israeli-made defense products. But that provision is being phased out over the first five years of the deal."
In other words, the ten year, $38 billion aid package is first and foremost welfare for US defense contractors, not Israel whose own defense spending adds up to $16 billion per year - dwarfing annual US "aid." The deal is to encourage further Israeli dependency on America - dependency that lends Washington further leverage over both Israel and the region.
The purpose of aid and those who have arranged it on both the Israeli and American sides of the negotiating table is to continue directing Israel's domestic and foreign policy to suit America's interests, not the Israeli people's.
An Israel at peace with its neighbors in a stable Middle East and North Africa is an Israel that negates the supposed need of a US presence in the region. It also negates the need for such extravagant defense spending in both Israel and the United States.
CNBC would also reveal that the new assistance package would include provisions making it difficult for Israel to lobby for additional spending unless war broke out.
Considering the track record of various Israeli regimes, does one suppose this is an incentive for Israel to avoid conflict, or actively seek it out?
In every way the aid deal is meant to perpetuate unpopular regimes, unpopular and inhumane policies, as well as perpetuate conflict and human misery.
The role the US plays in "stabilizing" the Middle East is revealed instead as a constant conspiracy to overturn it.
US, Israel, and Saudi Arabia - Trifecta of Conflict and Instability
The only other nation in the Middle East sowing as much conflict and instability as Israel's current regime is Saudi Arabia. It has flooded Iraq and Syria with militant groups triggering years of devastating war as well as directly launched an extensive air and ground war against neighboring Yemen.
Saudi Arabia - like Israel - is the recipient of extensive US backing. While the US made history by granting Israel unprecedented foreign aid, it sealed with Saudi Arabia recently an equally historic and unprecedented weapons deal amounting to some $60 billion - a single deal significantly larger than the 10 year aid package the US is providing Israel.
Israel's Haaretz would report in its article, U.S. Announces $60b Arms Sale to Saudi Arabia, Says 'Israel Doesn't Object', that:
“The United States plans to sell up to $60 billion worth of military aircraft to Saudi Arabia, the U.S. State Department announced on Wednesday in a move designed to shore up a region overshadowed by Iran.
Andrew Shapiro, the assistant secretary of state for political-military affairs, told a news conference the U.S. administration did not anticipate any objections to the sale from Israel, traditionally wary of arms sales to nearby Arab countries."
Indeed, Israel does not object to US weapon deals with Saudi Arabia. Despite feigned adversity between the two regimes, the governments of Israel and Saudi Arabia work in tandem toward a singular regional vision with very few points of contention and with the common denominator being the way each nation's role enhances their joint sponsor - the United States - and its hegemony over the region.
It is then not surprising to see US-funded Israeli forces defending Saudi subsidized terrorists on the Golan Heights coordinating violence against Syrian forces throughout the destructive, ongoing Syrian conflict.
Unlike Saudi Arabia, which does not exist as a functioning legitimate nation-state beyond its petrodollars and its US-backed military power, Israel does possess the economic infrastructure and human capital to transition into a functioning, independent nation-state - if only its population can overcome the engineered strategy of tension that has ensnared it for decades and the regime behind it.
The United States' $38 billion is to ensure that regime remains in power for another 10 years, the strategy of tension continues to play out, and the Israeli people, as well as their neighbors are denied any opportunity to live in peace and move forward in progress for another decade to come.
Rather than underwriting Israel's security for the next decade, the US is ensuring Israel struggles under another 10 years of uncertainty, perpetually impending war, all while its regime continues to partner with neighboring regimes - including Saudi Arabia and Turkey - to undermine regional stability and further threaten the future of the Israeli people and the survival of the Israeli nation.
The Israeli regime's signing of yet another compromising, dependency-inducing aid package with the United States is proof once again that Israel's own government constitutes the Israeli nation's worst enemy.
Comment: Perhaps Israel has been given too little credit here for its manipulative controls, global infiltration and concentration of pathocracy.
Documentary Reveals How Israel Convinces Americans: “Palestine Occupies Israel”
In this episode of ‘Behind the Headline,’ host Mint Press Mnar Muhawesh meets Sut Jhally, an expert on media manipulation and propaganda. In the film ‘The Occupation of the American Mind,’ Jhally and others examine how high-paid spin doctors control the media message on Israel.
Following the Holocaust, the world community - led by the United States and Britain - sought to create a European Jewish-only state.
This humanitarian move, though, utterly failed in respecting the humanity of the land’s indigenous inhabitants - Christian and Muslim Palestinians.
Starting in December of 1947, their land and property was seized and destroyed to make way for the state of Israel, where white only European Jews would live . Over 750,000 Palestinians were expelled and over 10,000 were killed by the British and US armed Zionist militias, and later Israeli forces, during the Nakba, an Arabic word meaning “catastrophe.”
Those expelled by the Nakba and their Palestinian descendants who make up the world’s largest refugee population in the world are not allowed to return to their land.
Meanwhile, special interest groups like the American Israel Public Affairs Committee, or AIPAC, buy their way into the hearts and minds of our elected officials. Ever wonder why Israel gets $3 billion in annual military funding from Uncle Sam? Connect the dots from the campaign contributions to the spending bills.
There’s a lot riding on our relationship with Israel: Apart from serving as a proxy for U.S. relations in the Middle East and Africa, Israel is America’s second-top destination for arms exports. Yep - the country’s that’s no bigger than the state of New Jersey is basically a black check for the military-industrial complex.
But not all Americans are on board with the notion of Israel as the victim of Palestinian oppression.
A new documentary, “The Occupation of the American Mind,” brings attention to how Israel’s public relations campaign has successfully manipulated the narrative of the Israel-Palestine conflict — in that, it’s not a conflict at all but a matter of modern-day colonialism, ethnic cleansing and apartheid.
Today I’m joined by Sut Jhally, executive producer of “The Occupation of the American Mind” and a professor of communication at the University of Massachusetts. The film was produced, written and directed by Loretta Alper and Jeremy Earp.
I asked Jhally to explain how Americans are being kept in the dark about Palestine, and how that prevents a mass movement against Israeli apartheid from forming in the U.S.
Learn more about the US war in Afghanistan fueling the worldwide heroin crisis, and Israel’s occupation of American minds:
Transparent Budgeting At Its Best - The City Of Barcelona Is Showing The Way
October 4 2016 | From: YanisVaroufakis / DiEM25 Imagine a city or state budget where citizens could see at a glance where every euro, pound or dollar went or came from, which services were paid for by their taxes or rates, the distribution of the tax burden across different regions etc.
You don’t need to imagine it. The City of Barcelona has delivered it.
Transparency is the oxygen of democracy. Opacity (or ‘confidentiality’, as the insiders prefer to call it) is the harbinger of bad decisions undermining Europe’s common good.
Have you ever wondered why Europe’s unemployment rate is stuck at levels last seen in the United States in 2009?
Have you noticed how, for six years now, the Eurogroup produces monthly communiqués announcing that the end of the crisis is… just around the corner?
Did you know that, at this very moment, your own members of European Parliament can only see the negotiating documents that will shape the impending EU-US trade treaty (and thus determine the future of paid work, social welfare, innovation and environmental protection) as long as they swear that they will not tell you what these documents say?
Are you aware of the fact that there are ten thousand (!) lobbyists in Brussels whose job is to have regular secret meetings with your representatives in the EU for the purpose of persuading them to accept rules and regulations that often go against your interests?
Without knowing how your representatives behave on your behalf in Brussels and in Frankfurt, you have no control over them. Democracy then becomes a sham and EU decision-making adds error upon error.
Today, if you want to see any of the documents that shape Europe, or to read what your ministers said on your behalf in some pivotal meeting, you simply couldn’t. Nor will your grandchildren be able to see them in the decades to come as no minutes, transcripts or records are kept formally.
Is it any wonder then that the European Union institutions no longer enjoy the trust of Europe’s citizens?
Is it surprising that the European Union is at an advanced stage of disintegration?
No, it is not. It is, rather, the natural result of the cloak of secrecy enveloping decision-making at the level of the EU.
What is DiEM25?
DiEM25 is a pan-European, cross-border movement of democrats. We believe that the European Union is disintegrating. Europeans are losing their faith in the possibility of European solutions to European problems.
At the same time as faith in the EU is waning, we see a rise of misanthropy, xenophobia and toxic nationalism.
If this development is not stopped, we fear a return to the 1930s. That is why we have come together despite our diverse political traditions - Green, radical left, liberal - in order to repair the EU.
The EU needs to become a realm of shared prosperity, peace and solidarity for all Europeans. We must act quickly, before the EU disintegrates.
October 2016: The Most Consequential Month Of The Millennium
October 3 2016 | From: CosmicConvergence
Never in the history of the world has so much anticipation and anxiety been focused on the outcomes of a single month.
According to astrologers and oracles, psychics and prophets, pundits and politicos, October of 2016 has been foreordained as a month of great events and awesome surprises.
Not only does the astrology stack up in such a way so as to indicate a month of HUGE happenings, so, too, have many powerful predictions been made by various oracles as compelling prophecies have been uttered by modern-day prophets.
Just why is October so Momentous?
First it happens to perfectly align with the Hebrew month of Tishri. Elul 29 falls on October 2nd which means the rest of the month until the 31st matches up with Tishri. This single point of fact means that the whole month of October has the potential to unfold in a manner that brings major revelations and unparalleled change.
The primary reason for this is that the end of the Biblical Shemitah Jubilee (also known as the Super Shemitah) takes place on Sunday, October 2. This sole calendrical event will set up the rest of the month for an anything goes, anytime, anywhere context.
However, most of the real action is guaranteed to occur right here in the good ole USA (as well as Europe and the Mideast). Because the destiny of the Modern State of Israel (MSI) is joined at the hip with that of the United States, outcomes for one will greatly affect the other. And those outcomes will come fast and furiously.
The upshot of this quite lopsided relationship (between the USA and Israel) is that one can easily take down the other, just as they have supported each other since the birth of the MSI in 1947. It is, however, the Super Shemitah that holds the key for the great unraveling that is about to take place.
For the utter predictability of the Shemitah years is a well established pattern and cannot be denied in view of the historical events of epic proportions which always occur.
For the newcomer, witness 9/11 in the Shemitah year of 2001; witness the stock market crash of 2008, witness the various market crashes of 2015 along with the bankruptcies of Greece and Puerto Rico. Going back to 1994 there was the great bond market crash and bankruptcy of Orange County. All of these were Shemitah years.
The critical point here is that 2016 represents the end of a major Shemitah cycle making it the Super Shemitah. Therefore, what takes place during the month of October (Tishri according to the Judaic tradition) will have great consequence for the entire world community of nations.
Whatever occurs will likely be triggered on Monday, October 3rd since October 2nd is a Sunday. We may not even see that trigger in the MSM, although something quite HUGE just happened on Friday.
Astrology for October is Quite Tumultuous and Validates the Shemitah
This October will see a number of transits and other astrological events that will create extraordinary tension and opportunity for change. Most real change comes at the barrel of a gun. Isn’t that true in life in general? Who ever gives up their comfort food unless a serious health condition forces them to?
Does the sugarholic (or alcoholic, or caffeine addict, or nicotine addict, or coke addict, or gambler, or Smartphone addict, or endorphin addict, etc.) ever just stop gratifying their addiction… unless it becomes truly life-threatening?! Sounds like a certain politician presently running for POTUS irrespective of her diagnosed Parkinson’s disease, Subcortical vascular dementia and Post concussive syndrome.
Well that’s exactly where things are for the Oligarchy of 1% that currently runs Planet Earth. For it is the pathological love of money (and psychopathic addiction to power) that has pushed them firmly into the seats of power and influence around the globe.
However, their grip on that virtually absolute power is now loosening.
And the astrology shows us how this is happening. Nevertheless, it’s even more important to understand that it is the ruled (the 99%) who ultimately permitted the tyrannical rulers to run their tyranny on them.
Oligarchs Gone Wild
With Uranus, Neptune and Pluto in houses controlled by the 1%, the 1% decided what if anything ever warranted protest or needed reform (Uranus). They were empowered to choose which ideals would guide us (Neptune). They also decided who should hold power, how it should be wielded and why (Pluto).
For much of the time, the oligarchs also decided what was logical and legal (Saturn), who would become wealthy, how wealthy they would become, who would share in that wealth and why (Jupiter).
For going on half a century, the oligarchs made virtually all the rules. They won every hand. They decided every case. By the end, they called every shot.
But that was us, drinking our own oligarchic koolaid. We followed the yellow brick road that we ourselves had paved to global oligarchy.
Only by understanding that it is the 99% who also walked down the very same “yellow brick road”, can the spell of the love of money be broken. There’s absolutely nothing inherently wrong with money itself; rather, it is the energetic charge associated with HOW it is earned, and HOW it is spent.
Each Month has its own Astrological Imprint
The following breakdown of the primary days in October may not be comprehensible to most. Nonetheless each one serves as a critical marker during a month - October - that is typically full of surprises. This month will be no different and will quite likely see some of the most kariotic surprises of all time.
The following short description of the primary astrological makers for October ought to be kept handy throughout the month. Each of these days has the potential for being a defining moment for the 3rd Millennium.
October unfolds with a series of collapses, astrologically tied to these dates:
October 5th - when Mars squares Jupiter.
October 7th - when Sun squares Pluto
October 15 - when Sun conjuncts Uranus
Then the big one on October 19 - when Mars conjuncts Pluto. This alignment happens every 2 years, but in light of the earlier October dates this is the one that will give a big kick to all the Pluto aspects in October.
The Gray Swans of 2016
There is no question about the many and diverse gray swans that now lurk in every location across the planetary civilization.
They were set up this way so that when the other shoe dropped every single resident of the planet would be affected by something, somewhere. In this way, each individual will be challenged to respond to the coming events in a proactive, courageous and life-affirming manner.
11. Organized civil unrest that escalates to prolonged violence in multiple US cities which triggers martial law and a permanent re-calibration of the social consciousness vis-à-vis a collective, national awakening to a starkly different definition of America on all levels — from its 1776, constituent DNA to the US’ perceived status through the eyes of the rest the world.
Let’s face it, it doesn’t get any bigger than this one. November 8th is surely the biggest election in the history of the USA. Hence, what occurs (or does not occur) during the month of October will dictate the final outcome of this election cycle.
As for dramatic political surprises, here’s one that just happened:
We haven’t seen “October Surprises” like those that will be dropping out of the sky over the next 30 days. If ever there was a time to really hang onto your hat, this month is it.
Of course, the real $64,000 question is whether Obama will “wag the dog” for Hillary? There are many concerning developments in Syria that point directly to the Obama Administration deliberately inflaming a regional war as a distinct prelude to a World War III. These folks seem hellbent to do whatever is necessary to shoehorn Hillary Clinton into the Oval Office.
As for Donald Trump’s response to her presidential aspirations, the following video portrays The Donald as such a no-nonsense speaker of the truth that his performance is entirely UNPRECEDENTED IN ELECTION HISTORY.
Should he continue to increase the number and intensity of these truth bombs over the course of October, Hillary will have acquired the worst case of political PTSD ever!
Since this essay focuses on astrology, it is of paramount importance to understand that 2016 - until January 27, 2017 - is the Chinese Year of the Red Fire Monkey. Yes, Donald Trump is a quintessential Fire Monkey tearing apart the whole jungle as it should be.
Bernie Sanders had a similar energy on his side, but he wimped out. The key point is that everyone needs to awaken their inner “Red Fire Monkey” because that is exactly what it’s going to take.
The energies are conspiring to create a surprising reversal of fortune for the ruling elites, but the job must be performed by We the People.
However, there is only one way to pull off such a reversal. Every concerned soul must step up when they are called to do so. In the Year of the Red Fire Monkey there is simply no stopping those who truly align with the dharma of the indomitable Monkey.
In ancient Eastern lore, Lord Hanuman, perhaps the greatest Fire Monkey of all time, was known to be supremely powerful, unrivaled off the battlefield, and invincible in war.
October 2016 will be written about in future history books as the most consequential time frame of the era.
Whether the events are dramatic or the developments are paradigm-shattering, what does transpire in the next four plus weeks will radically alter society, profoundly change Western civilization and deeply transform the planetary order.
What’s Happening Outside Keenan’s Reach - The Illegal Casinos Are Closing Down
October 3 2016 | From: Farouk Currently the global Stock Market capitalization stands about USD 69 Trillion, with an average daily turnover of around USD 190 Billion. The size of the international Bond Markets in outstanding issues is USD 140 Trillion and with daily trading volumes around USD 700 Billion.
Global Currency Trading dwarfs Stock and Bond Markets with an estimated turnover of USD 5.3 Trillion DAILY. And as this is essentially an unregulated market based on “pair swaps” (one currency swapped for another) it is impossible to estimate actual annual turnover and market capitalization.
The global Derivatives Market is another unregulated financial hedge market with an essentially an unknown number of bets being placed on any number of hedging situations associated with Stock, Bond, Commodity and/or Currency Market conditions. Global Derivative market size estimates vary between USD 800 Trillion to over USD 4-6 Quadrillion in outstanding bets most of which are backed by NOTHING.
And to all this can be added Commodity Exchanges, Credit Card Companies and interlocking International Corporations in various major economic sectors.
All of these markets are simple gambling operations. They produce virtually nothing except BETS in poorly or un-regulated markets dominated by Central Banks, major international banks, large hedge funds and trusts, pension funds and insurance companies who automatically trade using computer algorithms and direct collusions between these main traders resulting in price fixing scams.
There is no real “Free Market Trading”.
It is all “rigged”.
What would happen if all that daily traded money were to be spent on real productive development?
OH! I can hear the screams from Wall Street! “WE NEED FREE TRADING MARKETS!”
1,001 Excuses will come. Rats trying to save their sinking ship and their cushy jobs that produce nothing. Most of these shysters have never run a productive business and cannot see beyond their adrenalin gambling addictions and money playpens.
It is clear that the World is transitioning from the “Debt Slavery Model” to a newer paradigm of more equitable balancing of financial wealth, particularly within the Middle Class populations that are the productive backbone of all economies.
This will result in a reduction of funds flowing into gambling markets and an increase in funding real projects that produce real things.
We do not expect these global markets to close completely, except for Currency and Derivative Markets, but merely down-size their trading activities by channeling funds to productive or new investment opportunities and because currencies will be asset (GOLD) backed in accordance with the Paris Accords.
Stock Markets that have been FIAT INFLATED by Central Banks and the FED will have to fall as stocks and companies they represent will fall back to historic and real value levels.
Expect 50+% drops in US, European and Japanese stocks as a direct result of real revaluation and a major decline in bank liquidity to these markets resulting in margin calls and further downward pressures.
Bond markets will also fall because of the lack of market liquidity and corporate revaluations but will rebound with higher interest rates. Underwriting for new issues will be difficult but due to a lack of new issues, those that do get underwritten will enjoy higher margins and increased market demand. New Bonds may face a Seller’s Market if they can find underwriters.
The derivatives market is, in a word, gigantic, often estimated at more that $1.2 quadrillion. Some market analysts estimate the derivatives market at more than 10 times the size of the total world gross domestic product, or GDP. The reason the derivatives market is so large is because there are numerous derivatives available on virtually every possible type of investment asset, including equities, commodities, bonds and foreign currency exchange.
We do advocate closing down the Derivative Markets entirely as these produce only hedge bets currently far beyond the Global GDP and thus are absolutely un-recoverable. This is clearly bringing down the “Too Big To Bailout” Banks like Deutsche Bank who will collapse the entire derivatives market, not “IF”, but “When” it goes into receivership or financial restructuring.
Similarly, Currency Markets will be totally unnecessary once a country’s currency is gold backed and issues are pegged to that value or to the value of a single international reserve currency (International Trade Dollars issued by a new International Central Clearing Bank).
Currency Pegging eliminates trading margins and the ability of major financial players from influencing currency price movements. Gold and real asset backing together with internationally agreed currency revaluation rates essentially freezes exchange rates.
What these financial market changes will do is to release TRILLIONS in capital investments into real development projects globally.
This will sprout new industries in renewable and free energy, electric autonomous vehicles, vertical farming, sea ranching, cities in the sea, and advances in AI and virtual reality networking. These and many more are known technologies that just have yet to be fully financed. All that is about to change.
Generally through various financial redistribution programs and the Golden Dragon Family’s gold backing of all currencies, there will be a financial re-saturation of the Middle Class on a global basis.
Not everyone will be rich all of a sudden, but wealth dispersion at all lower levels will be gradually accomplished. Happy Days ahead for most of humanity.
Happy Days will not be coming to many Governments though. These governments will be kicked out as they were part of the primary cause for the raping of the middle classes through ever increasing taxation and over-spending.
The announcement of the US returning to its REPUBLiC roots will be the harbinger call for global political reform.
Neil Keenan is a very important pin prick in this Western Financial Fiat Bubble. His and his team’s efforts to reclaim control over the Global Collateral Accounts are fundamentally altering the Western Banking World by financially restructuring the underlying assets that the Western Banking is based on.
Before the ink dried on the Bretton Woods Agreement, the Western Banksters were already stealing and illegally using these account funds, legally negating and voiding the Agreement and any subsequently related agreements. The theft and abuse of these GCA’s is well documented, thus a day in Court can never be avoided (and that is coming soon).
Neil’s organizing the first BRICS boat trip has forever altered the financial World. A whole new financial structure has quickly emerged that almost all the countries of the World have now signed onto the BRICS Group, AIIB and its secure financial transfer network.
All countries are now well prepared for the gold backed RV’s and GCR’s that are to follow shortly.
Neil still has some unfinished business to attend to with officially taking charge of the Global Collateral Accounts (GCA).
That has been made much easier with the pending final ratification of the Paris Accords that now launches the global gold and asset backed currencies, RV’s and GCR’s as this causes a mandatory compliance and the abandonment of issuing fiat currencies.
The next step for Neil is to secure the GCA’s which is basically a legal battle of house cleaning with the FED, Bank of England, Bank of International Settlements, the top Swiss Banks and the rest of the European Banks and financial services organizations that have been illegally and fraudulently feeding at this financial trough for the past 50-years.
If there has ever been a bigger ball of string to unwind, this one takes top spot.
Neil’s job is not to pull the financial underpinnings out from under the Western financial empire, but is more to place the ownership of these financial institutions into the proper hands of those depositors whose money actually funded these institutions through the GCA’s.
This will most likely be some serious negotiations concerning transfers of ownership from those who illegally and fraudulent.
US Dollar Disaster Looms? China And Russian Currencies Break Away October 2 2016 | From: TheDailyBell / Various
Russia leaves the Dollar based monetary system and adopts a system of Sovereign Currency.
The implications are phenomenal! “In 1990 the first priority of Washington and the IMF was to pressure Yeltsin and the Duma to “privatize” the State Bank of Russia, under a Constitutional amendment that mandated the new Central Bank of Russia, like the Federal Reserve or European Central Bank, be a purely monetarist entity whose only mandate is to control inflation and stabilize the Ruble. In effect, money creation in Russia was removed from state sovereignty and tied to the US dollar.”
Comment: Insiders report that the Cabal in the US is planning on dropping the US Dollar but before that they must have control over much of the gold in the Global Collateral Accounts, however this is not going to be allowed to happen.
2016: "The Stolypin club report advises to increase the investment, pumping up the economy with money from the state budget and by the issue of the Bank of Russia”. Putin decided to follow the Stolypin club advice as the new monetary policy of the country.
Money is changing fast and the US dollar is going to crash.
Here’s an excerpt from yet another recently published article (translated from the Russian) describing how the ruble may now evolve (here).
“We must nationalize the ruble. What does it mean? It means that we must separate the internal markets from the external ones.
… Thus, the first step for Russia is secession from the IMF and others similar institutions designed to keep the entire world in bondage. The dollar noose must be cut.
Now the amount of printed rubles will not be determined by how many dollars we have but by the actual needs of our economy.
… We have absolutely no need in the central bank in its current form, but we do need a financial regular.
Under any regime, it was the Treasury that performed this function. Let it remain the same now regardless of the official name. It may continue to be called the Central Bank. If the essence is changed, there is no need in changing plaques."
You can also see an article (here) that goes into this issue more deeply and claims that Putin has in mind backing a portion of the ruble with gold as well. (We should note there are claims the ruble is backed by gold already.)
The dramatic – historical – Russian currency changes (if these articles are accurate) seem a little difficult to discern in full at this moment, but obviously things are changing fast. And they are changing for China’s “money” as well. In fact, some have speculated China and Russia could launch a joint, gold-backed currency (here, see bottom of article).
At the beginning of October, the yuan joins the IMF’s SDR basket (here). This means that major international institutions can issue bonds payable in yuan (actually RMB, the Chinese external currency).
And that is just what has happened already. The World Bank is issuing a large yuan/RMB tranche and this will be the first of many (here).
Investors who want to place funds in RMB rather than dollars will use the new yuan/RMB-based instruments. The US will continue to print dollars but those dollars may not find a home abroad so easily. Instead they may circulate back into the US economy creating significant price inflation.
The US was able to do so much damage domestically and abroad because of its virtually unlimited spending power. It’s been able to prosecute endless, horrible wars and imprison up to five percent of its adult population at any one time.
Now things are changing. Between the Russian announcement and yuan/RMB convertibility, the US will gradually have more trouble printing money at will. Perhaps the corrupt military-industrial complex will be impelled to shrink and large-scale social programs like the wretched Obamacare will have more difficulty with funding as well.
We are well aware that the same banking influences that created the monstrous, modern state is ruining US and the West generally in order to build up a more febrile internationalism.
It seems natural, of course, as “directed history”always does. But it is not natural in the slightest. From what we can tell, it is pre-planned.
Remember both the IMF and the World Bank are controlled by the US. And yet it is these two organizations that are facilitating the rise of the yuan/RMB.
[Important Point: "Pre-planned" does not always mean by the Cabal, nor that if it was the Cabal who pre-planned it, that it will go their way - as numerous insiders will attest.]
Also, please pay attention to how Russia will issue rubles into the economic system (from the same translated article we quoted previously):
“How can we calculate [how many rubles Russia needs]? In exactly the same way as the United States calculates the amount of dollars needed for its economy. Just as the European Union does the same.
The best justification would be that from now on Russia issues rubles based on the value (in rubles) of all natural resources explored on its territory. It is quite amusing that subsequent steps are no rocket science; they are dictated by common sense itself. Since we are breaking down the disadvantageous system."
Putin may be taking a big step, but by circumventing his central bank (initially imposed by the West) he can be seen as moving toward more state control of Russian currency.
And for years, we have debated heatedly with people like Ellen Brown (here) who believe that federal governments can do a much better job of printing money than quasi-independent central banks. Good Lord! What’s wrong with a little monetary freedom?
All Putin has to do if he wants a healthy currency is declare that the new ruble will be backed by gold and that its issuance will be a private or regional matter.
Let a thousand gold mines bloom. Let the circulation of gold and its related paper notes travel up or down depending on quantity and demand – not the determinations of yet another shadowy, elite clique.
This is the way the US ran before the Civil War and created one of the world’s most prosperous and freest cultures. Those in the US live yet on the dregs of that “golden” period.
But this is not well understood. As time goes on the often-illiterate alternative media may join in hosannas for Putin’s upcoming currency shift. But, again, just because “Russia” will now control its currency instead of a central bank reporting to the IMF, doesn’t necessarily create a better system.
Of course, the argument will be made this sort of system is what Hitler installed in Nazi Germany in order to create the German “miracle” of the 1930s (which we are supposedly not able to talk about). But that system might have destroyed itself over time. Surely it would have.
To begin with, such systems may work very well. But since the “money” is being created by human deciders rather than the competitive market, distortions are inevitable. Price-fixing, which is what it is, never works.
And while we are making the point that this newfound ruble freedom may not be so profound as advertised, let us note that the advent of a currency war is being accompanied by military tension as well.
Conclusion: Whether such tensions are legitimate or dramatized is difficult to say. But given elite banking control of so much around the world, we would not be surprised if we are simply being exposed to a gigantic performance of sorts directed from the top down.Ironically, despite apparent “setbacks,” London’s City surely leads the way.
Related: Stocks jump, euro edges up as Deutsche Bank rebounds
Green Gestapo Says You're Mentally Ill If You Challenge Climate Change + Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie October 2 2016 | From: Infowars / NaturalNews
Any opposition to the party line constitutes "culpable insanity."
Dr. Roy Spencer of the University of Alabama at Huntsville annoyed the climate-extremist establishment a couple of years ago by describing them as “climate Nazis.”
Related: Climate Swindle - Who wants to be a carbon trillionaire?
Recently several of these creatures wrote a supposedly “learned” paper in an obscure journal, saying that anyone who, like Roy and me, raises legitimate questions about the magnitude of Man’s influence on climate or the disproportionate cost of making largely non-existent global warming go away, must be suffering from a psychiatric disorder.
These climate Nazis said that those who dare to question the Party Line on the weather should be regarded as suffering from “identity-protective cognition” and “conspiracist ideation.” I was among those they named.
In Communist Russia, before its defeat at the hands of the triumvirate of liberty – Ronald Reagan, Margaret Thatcher and Pope John Paul II – opponents of the regime whom the dictators had not executed were instead flung into psychiatric institutions, on the ludicrous ground that any opposition to the Party Line constituted culpable insanity.
Lord Christopher Monckton
(Author if this article)
The intellectual pygmies who are the inheritors of the dictators, conveniently forgetting the 250 million people whom communist and fascist socialism sent to their deaths in the 20th century, are now whining that we who have exposed their climate scam should be locked away in state psychiatric prisons, there to be “re-educated” to cure us of the wicked notion that science, not politics, is the way to determine the magnitude (if any) and cost (if any) of the climate problem (if any).
Well, I’ve had enough.
I’ve written to the editor of the obscure journal, to the president of the editor’s university and to the presidents of the universities that provide nests for two of the paper’s authors, to warn them that in Europe, to ensure that the arrogant and un-self-critical totalitarianism that killed so many in the last century will kill none in this, we now have hate-speech laws that make the publication of the offending paper falsely accusing us of lunacy an imprisonable criminal offense.
One of the co-authors, one Cook, recently appointed to a third-rank university in the United States, falsely stated in an earlier paper that 97% of climate scientists had said recent global warming was mostly man-made, when his own records – now in the hands of the fraud police – show he knew the true figure was not 97% but 0.5%.
Lest you should think that my comparing these wretches with the totalitarians of old is unjust, I have obtained a picture of Cook dressed up in his favorite uniform, a parody of a Nazi SS uniform. The photograph bears the self-describing caption Reichsführer-SS J. Cook.
I have sent copies of this photograph to the president of Cook’s new “university,” together with a request that I should be permitted to set straight the crooked record of poisonous and criminal hate-speech that Cook and his ghastly co-authors have published to my detriment.
Watch this space!
Footnote: My recent speech to the London climate conference exposing a huge error at the heart of the climate models – an error without which no one will ever worry about our effect on the climate – is causing major concern among the ranks of the ungodly. It’s unusual for a mathematical presentation to gather 10,000 hits in a week, but it’s happened. If you haven’t seen it yet:
Don’t miss the speech that makes the climate Nazis squirm.
If you like Classical music, you’ll enjoy a recording of the piece I played onstage in the conference hall during the closing-night party. It’s Schubert’s Sechs Ecossaisen der Ehemaligen, six little Scottish dances played as an oran talaidh or lullaby in the dreamy Highland style. If baby won’t sleep, play this resonant recording and all will be well. Enjoy!
Lord Christopher Monckton is a well-known journalist, public speaker, UKIP activist and “global warming” skeptic who also invented the mathematical puzzle Eternity. You can find him at the Lord Monckton Foundation.
Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie
The highly-politicized climate change debate rages on as we approach the crucial 2016 U.S. presidential election, despite an ever-growing body of evidence revealing the fact that "catastrophic man-made global warming" is nothing more than an elaborate hoax.
And the November election may prove to be a victory for the hoaxers, according to experts who happen to be among those who dare to challenge the spurious climate change narrative.
[Note: David Wilcock, within his vast body of research and writings has pointed out that: "[He] used official NASA sources to prove that the Sun, planets, and satellites [moons, asteroids etc.] in our system are becoming brighter, hotter, and more magnetic at a remarkable speed."]
When Plutocrats Own The Weather & Nobody Is Buying The “Climate Change” Hoax Anymore
One of these experts is Weather Channel founder John Coleman, who is now warning that the election could prove to be a "tipping point" in favor of people like Al Gore, who continues to amass vast fortunes based on the global warming scam.
In a recent interview with Climate Depot, Coleman said:
“Al Gore may emerge from the shadows to declare victory in the 'global warming' debate if Hillary Clinton moves into the White House. Yes, if that happens and the new climate regulations become the law of the land, they will be next to impossible to overturn for four to eight years."
Climate change proponents remain undeterred in their mission, ignoring numerous recent scientific findings indicating that there has been no warming trend at all for nearly two decades.
Al Gore's dire predictions of the melting of polar ice on a massive scale have proved to be completely false. In fact, in 2014 - a year that was touted as being "the hottest ever" in the Earth's history - there were record amounts of ice reported in Antarctica, an increase in Arctic ice, and record snowfalls across the globe.
Debunking the "97 Percent" Lie
On top of those "inconvenient truths," the White House's assertion that 97 percent of scientists agree that global warming is real has been completely debunked. Several independently-researched examinations of the literature used to support the "97 percent" statement found that the conclusions were cherry-picked and misleading.
More objective surveys have revealed that there is a far greater diversity of opinion among scientists than the global warming crowd would like for you to believe.
From the National Review:
"A 2008 survey by two German scientists, Dennis Bray and Hans von Storch, found that a significant number of scientists were skeptical of the ability of existing global climate models to accurately predict global temperatures, precipitation, sea-level changes, or extreme weather events even over a decade; they were far more skeptical as the time horizon increased."
Other mainstream news sources besides the National Review have also been courageous enough to speak out against the global warming propaganda - even the Wall Street Journal published an op-ed piece in 2015 challenging the Anthropogenic Global Warming (AGW) pseudoscience being promulgated by global warming proponents.
And, of course, there are the more than 31,000 American scientists (to date) who have signed a petition challenging the climate change narrative and 9,029 of them hold PhDs in their respective fields. But hey, Al Gore and his cronies have also ignored that inconvenient truth, as well.
Many of those scientists who signed the petition were likely encouraged to speak out in favor of the truth after retired senior NASA atmospheric scientist John L. Casey revealed that solar cycles are largely responsible for warming periods on Earth - not human activity.
Al Gore and Cronies Continue Getting Richer from the Global Warming Hoax
But the global warming crowd continues to push their agenda on the public while lining their pockets in the process. If you're still inclined to believe what Al Gore has to say about global warming, please consider the fact that since he embarked on his crusade, his wealth has grown from $2 million in 2001 to $100 million in 2016 - largely due to investments in fake "green tech" companies and the effective embezzlement of numerous grants and loans.
You might want to take all of this information into serious consideration before casting your vote in the November election.
Red Cross Built Exactly 6 Homes For Haiti With Nearly Half A Billion Dollars In Donations
October 1 2016 | From: Propublica / Various
The neighborhood of Campeche sprawls up a steep hillside in Haiti’s capital city, Port-au-Prince. Goats rustle in trash that goes forever uncollected. Children kick a deflated volleyball in a dusty lot below a wall with a hand-painted logo of the American Red Cross.
In late 2011, the Red Cross launched a multimillion-dollar project to transform the desperately poor area, which was hit hard by the earthquake that struck Haiti the year before. The main focus of the project — called LAMIKA, an acronym in Creole for “A Better Life in My Neighborhood” — was building hundreds of permanent homes.
Today, not one home has been built in Campeche. Many residents live in shacks made of rusty sheet metal, without access to drinkable water, electricity or basic sanitation. When it rains, their homes flood and residents bail out mud and water.
The Red Cross received an outpouring of donations after the quake, nearly half a billion dollars.
The group has publicly celebrated its work. But in fact, the Red Cross has repeatedly failed on the ground in Haiti. Confidential memos, emails from worried top officers, and accounts of a dozen frustrated and disappointed insiders show the charity has broken promises, squandered donations, and made dubious claims of success.
The Red Cross says it has provided homes to more than 130,000 people. But the actual number of permanent homes the group has built in all of Haiti: six.
After the earthquake, Red Cross CEO Gail McGovern unveiled ambitious plans to “develop brand-new communities.” None has ever been built.
Haitians outside a Red Cross field hospital in Carrefour, Haiti, on Dec. 14, 2010, 11 months after a magnitude 7.0 earthquake hit the country's capital, Port-au-Prince
Aid organizations from around the world have struggled after the earthquake in Haiti, the Western Hemisphere’s poorest country. But ProPublica and NPR’s investigation shows that many of the Red Cross’s failings in Haiti are of its own making.
They are also part of a larger pattern in which the organization has botched delivery of aid after disasters such as Superstorm Sandy. Despite its difficulties, the Red Cross remains the charityof choice for ordinary Americans and corporations alike after natural disasters.
One issue that has hindered the Red Cross’ work in Haiti is an overreliance on foreigners who could not speak French or Creole, current and former employees say.
In a blistering 2011 memo, the then-director of the Haiti program, Judith St. Fort, wrote that the group was failing in Haiti and that senior managers had made “very disturbing” remarks disparaging Haitian employees. St. Fort, who is Haitian American, wrote that the comments included, “he is the only hard working one among them” and “the ones that we have hired are not strong so we probably should not pay close attention to Haitian CVs.”
The Red Cross won’t disclose details of how it has spent the hundreds of millions of dollars donated for Haiti. But our reporting shows that less money reached those in need than the Red Cross has said.
Where did the half billion raised for Haiti go? The Red Cross won’t say.
Lacking the expertise to mount its own projects, the Red Cross ended up giving much of the money to other groups to do the work. Those groups took out a piece of every dollar to cover overhead and management. Even on the projects done by others, the Red Cross had its own significant expenses – in one case, adding up to a third of the project’s budget.
In statements, the Red Cross cited the challenges all groups have faced in post-quake Haiti, including the country’s dysfunctional land title system.
“Like many humanitarian organizations responding in Haiti, the American Red Cross met complications in relation to government coordination delays, disputes over land ownership, delays at Haitian customs, challenges finding qualified staff who were in short supply and high demand, and the cholera outbreak, among other challenges,” the charity said.
The group said it responded quickly to internal concerns, including hiring an expert to train staff on cultural competency after St. Fort’s memo.
Minouche Lamour, a member of the Community Platform for Development in Campeche, says she doesn't see how millions of dollars from the Red Cross could have been spent in her neighborhood
While the group won’t provide a breakdown of its projects, the Red Cross said it has done more than 100. The projects include repairing 4,000 homes, giving several thousand families temporary shelters, donating $44 million for food after the earthquake, and helping fund the construction of a hospital.
"Millions of Haitians are safer, healthier, more resilient, and better prepared for future disasters thanks to generous donations to the American Red Cross,” McGovern wrote in a recent report marking the fifth anniversary of the earthquake."
In other promotional materials, the Red Cross said it has helped “more than 4.5 million” individual Haitians “get back on their feet.”
Oops. Busted - The Order of St. John; a secret society under deep cover - hidden in plain sight, a classic esoteric 'laughing at the goyim who are too stupid to see' hallmark. Compare the St. John logo with the flag above. St. John is admittedly run by The Knights of Malta. Similarly, Red Cross has it's origins in the esoteric and was influenced by John D Rockefe;ler. While the Freemasons are lees inclined to admit their stewardship directly. Charities? Throw your money away if you like. It is quite well known nowadays that most of the money given to charity organisations never get's to where it was intended. Those pulling the strings simply play on peoples good nature
It has not provided details to back up the claim. And Jean-Max Bellerive, Haiti’s prime minister at the time of the earthquake, doubts the figure, pointing out the country’s entire population is only about 10 million.
"No, no,” Bellerive said of the Red Cross’ claim, “it’s not possible.”
When the earthquake struck Haiti in January 2010, the Red Cross was facing a crisis of its own. McGovern had become chief executive just 18 months earlier, inheriting a deficit and an organization that had faced scandals after 9/11 and Katrina.
Inside the Red Cross, the Haiti disaster was seen as “a spectacular fundraising opportunity,” recalled one former official who helped organize the effort. Michelle Obama, the NFL and a long list of celebrities appealed for donations to the group.
The Red Cross kept soliciting money well after it had enough for the emergency relief that is the group’s stock in trade. Doctors Without Borders, in contrast, stopped fundraising off the earthquake after it decided it had enough money. The donations to the Red Cross helped the group erase its more-than $100 million deficit.
The Red Cross ultimately raised far more than any other charity.
A year after the quake, McGovern announced that the Red Cross would use the donations to make a lasting impact in Haiti.
We asked the Red Cross to show us around its projects in Haiti so we could see the results of its work. It declined. So earlier this year we went to Campeche to see one of the group’s signature projects for ourselves.
Street vendors in the dusty neighborhood immediately pointed us to Jean Jean Flaubert, the head of a community group that the Red Cross set up as a local sounding board.
Sitting with us in their sparse one-room office, Flaubert and his colleagues grew angry talking about the Red Cross. They pointed to the lack of progress in the neighborhood and the healthy salaries paid to expatriate aid workers.
"What the Red Cross told us is that they are coming here to change Campeche. Totally change it,” said Flaubert.
“Now I do not understand the change that they are talking about. I think the Red Cross is working for themselves.”
The Red Cross’ initial plan said the focus would be building homes — an internal proposal put the number at 700. Each would have finished floors, toilets, showers, even rainwater collection systems. The houses were supposed to be finished in January 2013.
The Red Cross promised to build hundreds of new homes in Campeche but none have been built. Many residents still live in crude shacks. (Marie Arago, special to ProPublica)
None of that ever happened. Carline Noailles, who was the project’s manager in Washington, said it was endlessly delayed because the Red Cross “didn’t have the know-how.”
Another former official who worked on the Campeche project said, “Everything takes four times as long because it would be micromanaged from DC, and they had no development experience.”
Shown an English-language press release from the Red Cross website, Flaubert was stunned to learn of the project’s $24 million budget — and that it is due to end next year.
"Not only is [the Red Cross] not doing it,” Flaubert said, “now I’m learning that the Red Cross is leaving next year. I don’t understand that.”
(The Red Cross says it did tell community leaders about the end date. It also accused us of “creating ill will in the community which may give rise to a security incident.”)
The project has since been reshaped and downscaled. A road is being built. Some existing homes have received earthquake reinforcement and a few schools are being repaired. Some solar street lights have been installed, though many broke and residents say others are unreliable.
The group’s most recent press release on the project cites achievements such as training school children in disaster response.
The Red Cross said it has to scale back its housing plans because it couldn’t acquire the rights to land. No homes will be built.
Other Red Cross infrastructure projects also fizzled.
In January 2011, McGovern announced a $30 million partnership with the U.S. Agency for International Development, or USAID. The agency would build roads and other infrastructure in at least two locations where the Red Cross would build new homes.
But it took more than two and a half years, until August 2013, for the Red Cross just to sign an agreement with USAID on the program, and even that was for only one site. The program was ultimately canceled because of a land dispute.
A Government Accountability Office report attributed the severe delays to problems “in securing land title and because of turnover in Red Cross leadership” in its Haiti program.
Other groups also ran into trouble with land titles and other issues. But they also ultimately built 9,000 homes compared to the Red Cross’ six.
Asked about the Red Cross’ housing projects in Haiti, David Meltzer, the group’s general counsel and chief international officer, said changing conditions forced changes in plans. “If we had said, ‘All we’re going to do is build new homes,’ we’d still be looking for land,” he said.
The USAID project’s collapse left the Red Cross grasping for ways to spend money earmarked for it.
“Can we fund Conrad’s hospital? Or more to PiH[Partners in Health]? Any more shelter projects?”
Jean Jean Flaubert says the Red Cross promised to transform his neighborhood. “Now I do not understand the change that they are talking about,” he said. (Marie Arago, special to ProPublica)
It’s not clear what helicopter idea McGovern was referring to or if it was ever carried out. The Red Cross would say only that her comments were “grounded in the American Red Cross’ strategy and priorities, which focus on health and housing.”
Another signature project, known in Creole as “A More Resilient Great North,” is supposed to rehabilitate roads in poor, rural communities and to help them get clean water and sanitation.
But two years after it started, the $13 million effort has been faltering badly. An internal evaluation from March found residents were upset because nothing had been done to improve water access or infrastructure or to make “contributions of any sort to the well being of households,” the report said.
The Red Cross says 91% of donations went to help Haitians. That’s not true.
Instead of making concrete improvements to living conditions, the Red Cross has launched hand-washing education campaigns. The internal evaluation noted that these were “not effective when people had no access to water and no soap.” (The Red Cross declined to comment on the project.)
The group’s failures went beyond just infrastructure.
When a cholera epidemic raged through Haiti nine months after the quake, the biggest part of the Red Cross’ response — a plan to distribute soap and oral rehydration salts — was crippled by “internal issues that go unaddressed,” wrote the director of the Haiti program in her May 2011 memo.
Throughout that year, cholera was a steady killer. By September 2011, when the death toll had surpassed 6,000, the project was still listed as “very behind schedule” according to another internal document.
The Red Cross said in a statement that its cholera response, including a vaccination campaign, has continued for years and helped millions of Haitians.
But while other groups also struggled early responding to cholera, some performed well.
"None of these people had to die. That’s what upsets me,” said Paul Christian Namphy, a Haitian water and sanitation official who helped lead the effort to fight cholera. He says early failures by the Red Cross and other NGOs had a devastating impact.
“These numbers should have been zero.”
So why did the Red Cross’ efforts fall so short? It wasn’t just that Haiti is a hard place to work.
"They collected nearly half a billion dollars,” said a congressional staffer who helped oversee Haiti reconstruction.
“But they had a problem. And the problem was that they had absolutely no expertise.”
Lee Malany was in charge of the Red Cross’ shelter program in Haiti starting in 2010.
He remembers a meeting in Washington that fall where officials did not seem to have any idea how to spend millions of dollars set aside for housing. Malany says the officials wanted to know which projects would generate good publicity, not which projects would provide the most homes.
"When I walked out of that meeting I looked at the people that I was working with and said, ‘You know this is very disconcerting, this is depressing,’” he recalled.
The Red Cross said in a statement its Haiti program has never put publicity over delivering aid.
Malany resigned the next year from his job in Haiti.
"I said there’s no reason for me to stay here. I got on the plane and left.”
Transitional shelters like these on the outskirts of Port-Au-Prince, paid for by the Red Cross, typically last three to five years.
Sometimes it wasn’t a matter of expertise, but whether anybody was filling key jobs. An April 2012 organizational chart obtained by ProPublica and NPR lists 9 of 30 leadership positions in Haiti as vacant, including slots for experts on health and shelter.
The Red Cross said vacancies and turnover were inevitable because of “the security situation, separation from family for international staff, and the demanding nature of the work.”
The constant upheaval took a toll. Internal documents refer to repeated attempts over years to “finalize” and “complete” a strategic plan for the Haiti program, efforts that were delayed by changes in senior management. As late as March 2014, more than four years into a six-year program, an internal update cites a “revised strategy” still awaiting “final sign-off.”
The Red Cross says it provided homes to more than 130,000 Haitians. But they didn’t.
The Red Cross said settling on a plan early would have been a mistake. “It would be hard to create the perfect plan from the beginning in a complicated place like Haiti,” it said. “But we also need to begin, so we create plans that are continually revised.”
Those plans were further undermined by the Red Cross’ reliance on expats. Noailles, the Haitian development professional who worked for the Red Cross on the Campeche project, said expat staffers struggled in meetings with local officials.
"Going to meetings with the community when you don’t speak the language is not productive,” she said. "Sometimes, she recalled, expat staffers would skip such meetings altogether.
The Red Cross said it has “made it a priority to hire Haitians” despite lots of competition for local professionals, and that over 90 percent of its staff is Haitian. The charity said it used a local human resources firm to help.
Yet very few Haitians have made it into the group’s top echelons in Haiti, according to five current and former Red Cross staffers as well as staff lists obtained by ProPublica and NPR.
That not only affected the group’s ability to work in Haiti, it was also expensive.
According to an internal Red Cross budgeting document for the project in Campeche, the project manager – a position reserved for an expatriate – was entitled to allowances for housing, food and other expenses, home leave trips, R&R four times a year, and relocation expenses. In all, it added up to $140,000.
Compensation for a senior Haitian engineer — the top local position — was less than one-third of that, $42,000 a year.
Shelim Dorval, a Haitian administrator who worked for the Red Cross coordinating travel and housing for expatriate staffers, recalled thinking it was a waste to spend so much to bring in people with little knowledge of Haiti when locals were available.
"For each one of those expats, they were having high salaries, staying in a fancy house, and getting vacation trips back to their countries,” Dorval said.
“A lot of money was spent on those people who were not Haitian, who had nothing to do with Haiti. The money was just going back to the United States.”
Soon after the earthquake, McGovern, the Red Cross CEO, said the group would make sure donors knew exactly what happened to their money.
The Red Cross would “lead the effort in transparency,” she pledged. “We are happy to share the way we are spending our dollars.”
That hasn’t happened. The Red Cross’ public reports offer only broad categories about where $488 million in donations has gone. The biggest category is shelter, at about $170 million. The others include health, emergency relief and disaster preparedness.
After the earthquake, Red Cross CEO Gail McGovern unveiled plans to “develop brand-new communities.” None has ever been built.
It has declined repeated requests to disclose the specific projects, to explain how much money went to each or to say what the results of each project were.There is reason to doubt the Red Cross’ claims that it helped 4.5 million Haitians.
In other cases, the figures were low, and in others double-counting went uncorrected.
In describing its work, the Red Cross also conflates different types of aid, making it more difficult to assess the charity’s efforts in Haiti.
For example, while the Red Cross says it provided more than 130,000 people with homes, that includes thousands of people who were not actually given homes, but rather were “trained in proper construction techniques.” (That was first reported by the Haiti blog of the Center for Economic and Policy Research.)
The figure includes people who got short-term rental assistance or were housed in several thousand “transitional shelters,” which are temporary structures that can get eaten up by termites or tip over in storms.
It also includes modest improvements on 5,000 temporary shelters.The Red Cross also won’t break down what portion of donations went to overhead.
McGovern told CBS News a few months after the quake, “Minus the 9 cents overhead, 91 cents on the dollar will be going to Haiti.
And I give you my word and my commitment, I’m banking my integrity, my own personal sense of integrity on that statement.”
But the reality is that less money went to Haiti than 91 percent.
That’s because in addition to the Red Cross’ 9 percent
overhead, the other groups that got grants from the Red Cross also have their own overhead.
In one case, the Red Cross sent $6 million to the International Federation of the Red Cross for rental subsidies to help Haitians leave tent camps.
The IFRC then took out 26 percent for overhead and what the IFRC described as program-related “administration, finance, human resources” and similar costs.
Beyond all that, the Red Cross also spends another piece of each dollar for what it describes as “program costs incurred by the American Red Cross in managing” the projects done by other groups.
The American Red Cross’ management and other costs consumed an additional 24 percent of the money on one project, according to the group’s statements and internal documents. The actual work, upgrading shelters, was done by the Swiss and Spanish Red Cross societies.
"It’s a cycle of overhead,” said Jonathan Katz, the Associated Press reporter in Haiti at the time of the earthquake who tracked post-disaster spending for his book, The Big Truck That Went By.
“It was always going to be the American Red Cross taking a 9 percent cut, re-granting to another group, which would take out their cut.”
Given the results produced by the Red Cross’ projects in Haiti, Bellerive, the former prime minister, said he has a hard time fathoming what’s happened to donors’ money.
"Five hundred million dollars in Haiti is a lot of money,” he said. “I’m not a big mathematician, but I can make some additions. I know more or less the cost of things. Unless you don’t pay for the gasoline the same price I was paying, unless you pay people 20 times what I was paying them, unless the cost of the house you built was five times the cost I was paying, it doesn’t add up for me.”
A resident in a Port-Au-Prince transitional shelter paid for by the Red Cross.
This story was co-published with NPR. Mitzy-Lynn Hyacinthe contributed reporting. Design direction by David Sleight, production by Hannah Birch.
If you have information about the Red Cross or about other international aid projects, please email firstname.lastname@example.org.
Can Russia Learn From Brazil’s Fate? Cabal Meddling In South America
October 1 2016 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / NewEasternOutlook / Various
William Engdahl recently explained how Washington used the corrupt Brazilian elite, which answers to Washington, to remove the duly elected President of Brazil, Dilma Rousseff, for representing the Brazilian people rather than the interests of Washington [see follow up article below].
Unable to see through the propaganda of unproven charges, Brazilians acquiesced in the removal of their protector, thereby providing the world another example of the impotence of democracy.
Everyone should read Engdahl’s article. He reports that part of the attack on Rousseff stemmed from Brazil’s economic problems deliberately created by US credit rating agencies as part of Washington’s attack to down grade Brazilian debt, which set off an attack on the Brazilian currency.
Brazil’s financial openness made Brazil an easy target to attack. One might hope that Vladimir Putin would take note of the cost of “economic openness.” Putin is a careful and thoughtful leader of Russia, but he is not an economist. He has confidence in neoliberal Elvira Nabiulina, Washington’s choice to head the Russian central bank.
Note: The rest of Paul Craig Robert's article has not been republished here. Whilst he is a very smart man on many matters the rest of this article demonstrates his fundmental lack of understanding of the central banking system. His belief that Russia needs to rely upon it's central bank, while it is still under the unfluence of the Rothschild cabal - is woefully misinformed.
He is right in the idea that any country would be better to rely on itself for financing itself - doing that by using a privately-owned foreign central bank is insane - and how we have come to be in this mess in the first place. Mr. Roberts is not playing the game with all of the pieces on this matter but you can read his full article here.
Washington Tries To Break BRICS – Rape Of Brazil Begins
Washington’s regime change machinery has for the time being succeeded in removing an important link in the alliance of large emerging nations by railroading through a Senate impeachment of the duly elected President, Dilma Rousseff.
On August 31 her Vice President Michel Temer was sworn in as President. In his first speech as president, the cynical Temer called for a government of “national salvation,” asking for the trust of the Brazilian people. He indicated plans to reform, and has also signaled his intention to overhaul the pension system and labor laws, and cut public spending, all themes beloved of Wall Street banks, of the International Monetary Fund and their Washington Consensus.
Now after less than three weeks at the job, Temer has unveiled plans for wholesale privatization of Brazil’s crown jewels, starting with oil. The planned Wall Street rape of Brazil is about to begin.
It’s important to keep in mind that elected President Rousseff was not convicted or even formally charged with any concrete act of corruption, even though the pro-oligarchy mainstream Brazil media, led by O’Globo Group of the billionaire Roberto Irineu Marinho, ran a media defamation campaign creating the basis to railroad Rousseff into formal impeachment before the Senate.
The shift took place after the opposition PMDB party of Temer on March 29 broke their coalition with Rousseff’s Workers’ Party, as accusations of Petrobras-linked corruption were made against Rousseff and former president Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva.
On August 31, 61 Senators voted to remove her while 20 voted against removal. The formal charge was “manipulation of the state budget” before the 2014 elections to hide the size of the deficit.
She vehemently denies the charge.
Indeed, the Senate issued its own expert report that concluded there was:
"No indication of direct or indirect action by Dilma” in any illegal budgetary maneuvers. According to the Associated Press, “Independent auditors hired by Brazil’s Senate said in a report released Monday that suspended President Dilma Rousseff didn’t engage in the creative accounting she was charged with at her impeachment trial.”
Under an honest system that would have ended the impeachment then and there. Not in Brazil.
In effect, she was impeached for the dramatic decline in the Brazilian economy, a decline deliberately pushed along as US credit rating agencies downgraded Brazilian debt, and international and mainstream Brazilian media kept the Petrobras corruption allegations in the spotlight.
Importantly, the Senate did not ban her from office for 8 years as Washington had hoped, and she has promised an electoral return. The Washington-steered Temer has until end of 2018 to deliver Brazil to Temer’s foreign masters before his term legally ends.
Notably, Temer himself was accused of corruption in the Petrobras state oil company investigations. He reportedly asked the then-head of the transportation unit of Petróleo Brasileiro SA in 2012 to arrange illegal campaign contributions to Temer’s party which was running a Washington-backed campaign to oust Rousseff’s Workers’ Party.
Then this June, only days into his serving as acting president, two of Temer’s own chosen ministers, including the Minister of Transparency, were forced to resign in response to allegations that they sought to subvert the probe into massive graft at Petrobras.
One of the two, Temer’s extremely close ally Romero Jucá, was caught on tape plotting Dilma’s impeachment as a way to shut down the ongoing Petrobras corruption investigation, as well as indicating that Brazil’s military, the media, and the courts were all participants in the impeachment plotting.
In brief, the removal of Dilma Rousseff and her Workers’ Party after 13 years in Brazil’s leadership was a new form of Color Revolution from Washington, one we might call a judicial coup by corrupt judges and congressmen.
Of the 594 members of the Congress, as the Toronto Globe and Mail reported, “318 are under investigation or face charges” while their target, President Rousseff, “herself faces no allegation of financial impropriety.”
The day after the first Lower House impeachment vote in April, a leading member of Temer’s PSDP party, Senator Aloysio Nunes, went to Washington, in a mission organized by former Bill Clinton Secretary of State Madeline Albright’s lobbying firm, Albright Stonebridge Group.
Nunes, as president of the Brazilian Senate’s Foreign Relations Committee, has repeatedly advocated that Brazil once again move closer to an alliance with the US and UK.
Madeline Albright, a Director of the leading US think-tank, Council on Foreign Relations, is also chair of the prime US Government “Color Revolution” NGO, the National Democratic Institute (NDI). Nothing fishy here, or? Nunes reportedly went to Washington to rally backing for Temer and the unfolding judicial coup against Rousseff.
A key player from the side of Washington, Rousseff’s de facto political executioner, was, once again, Vice President Joe Biden, the “Dick Cheney” dirty operator-in-chief in the Obama Administration.
Biden’s fateful Brazil trip
In May, 2013, US Vice President Joe Biden made a fateful visit to Brazil to meet with President Rousseff. In January 2011 Rousseff had succeeded her Workers’ Party mentor, Luis Inacio Lula da Silva, or Lula, who constitutionally was limited to two consecutive terms.
Biden went to Brazil to discuss oil with the new President. Relations between Lula and Washington had chilled as Lula backed Iran against US sanctions and came economically closer to China.
In late 2007 Petrobras had discovered what was estimated to be a mammoth new basin of high-quality oil on the Brazilian Continental Shelf offshore in the Santos Basin.
In total the Brazil Continental Shelf could contain over 100 billion barrels of oil, transforming the country into a major world oil and gas power, something Exxon and Chevron, the US oil giants wanted to control.
In 2009, according to leaked US diplomatic cables published by Wikileaks, the US Consulate in Rio wrote that Exxon and Chevron were trying in vain to alter a law advanced by Rousseff’s mentor and predecessor in her Brazilian Workers’ Party , President Luis Inacio Lula da Silva.
That 2009 law made the state-owned Petrobras chief operator of all offshore oil blocs. Washington and the US oil giants were not at all pleased at losing control over potentially the largest new world oil discovery in decades.
Lula had not only pushed ExxonMobil and Chevron out of the controlling position in favor of the state-owned Petrobras, but he also opened Brazilian oil exploration to the Chinese, since 2009 a core member of the BRICS developing nations with Brazil, Russia, India and South Africa.
In December, 2010 in one of his last acts as President, Lula oversaw signing of a deal between the Brazilian-Spanish energy company Repsol and China’s state-owned Sinopec. Sinopec formed a joint venture, Repsol Sinopec Brasil, investing more than $7.1 billion towards Repsol Brazil.
Already in 2005 Lula had approved formation of Sinopec International Petroleum Service of Brazil Ltd as part of a new strategic alliance between China and Brazil.
In 2012 in a joint exploration drilling, Repsol Sinopec Brasil, Norway’s Statoil and Petrobras made a major new discovery in Pão de Açúcar, the third in block BM-C-33, which includes the Seat and Gávea, the latter one of the world’s 10 largest discoveries in 2011. USA and British oil majors were nowhere to be seen.
Biden’s task was to sound out Lula’s successor, Rousseff, about reversing that exclusion of US major oil companies in favor of the Chinese. Biden also met with leading energy companies in Brazil including Petrobras.
While little was publicly said, Rousseff refused to reverse the 2009 oil law in a way that would be suitable to Biden, Washington and US oil majors. Days after Biden’s visit came the Snowden NSA revelations that the US had also spied on Rousseff and top officials of Petrobras.
She was livid and denounced the Obama Administration that September before the UN General Assembly for violating international law. She cancelled a planned Washington visit in protest. After that, US-Brazil relations took a dive.
After his May 2013 talks with Rousseff, Biden clearly gave her the kiss of death.
Before Biden’s May 2013 visit Dilma Rousseff had 70% of popularity rating. Less than two weeks after Biden left Brazil, nationwide protests by a very well-organized group called Movimento Passe Livre, over a nominal 10 cent bus fare increase, brought the country virtually to a halt and turned very violent.
The protests bore the hallmark of typical “Color Revolution” or Twitter social media destabilizations that seem to follow Biden wherever he makes a presence. Within weeks Rousseff’s popularity plummeted to 30%.
Washington had clearly sent a signal that Rousseff had to change course or face serious problems.
The Washington regime change machine, including its entire array of financial warfare operations ranging from a leaked PwC audit of Petrobras to Wall Street credit rating agency Standard & Poors’ downgrade of Brazil public debt to junk in September 2015, went into full action to remove Rousseff, a key backer of the BRICS New Development Bank and of an independent national development strategy for Brazil.
Selling the Crown Jewels
The man who has now manipulated himself into the Presidency, the corrupt Michel Temer, worked as an informer for Washington the entire time.
In documents released by Wikileaks, it was revealed that Temer was an informant to US intelligence since at least 2006, via telegrams to the US embassy in Brazil classified by the Embassy as “sensitive” and “for official use only.”
Washington’s man in Brazil, Temer, has lost no time appeasing his patrons in Wall Street. Even as acting President this May, Temer named Henrique Meirelles as Minister of Finance and Social Security.
Meirelles, a Harvard-educated former President of the Brazilian central bank, was President of BankBoston in the USA until 1999, and was with that bank in 1985 when it was found guilty of failing to report $1.2 billion in illegal cash transfers with Swiss banks.
Meirelles is now overseeing the planned selloff of Brazil’s “crown jewels” to international investors, a move that is intended to gravely undercut the power of the state in the economy.
Another of Temer’s key economic advisers is Paulo Leme, former IMF economist and now Goldman Sachs Managing Director of Emerging Markets Research. Wall Street is in the middle of the Temer-led economic rape of Brazil.
On September 13, Temer’s government unveiled a massive privatization program with the cynically misleading comment,
"It is clear the public sector cannot move forward alone on these projects. We are counting on the private sector.”
He omitted to say the private sector he meant were his patrons.
Temer unveiled plans that would complete the country’s largest privatization in decades. Conveniently, the process us to be completed by end of 2018, just before Temer’s term must end.
The influential US-Brazil Business Council detailed the privatization list on its website. The US-Brazil Business Council was founded forty years ago by Citigroup, Monsanto, Coca-Cola, Dow Chemicals and other US multinationals.
Tenders for the first round of concessions will be issued before the end of this year. They will include privatization of four airports and two port terminals, all auctioned in the first quarter of 2017.
Other concessions include five highways, one rail line, bidding on small oil blocks and a later round for large, mainly offshore, oil development blocks. As well the government will sell selected assets currently controlled by its Minerals Research Department plus six electric power distributors and three water treatment facilities.
The heart of his planned privatization are, not surprisingly, Joe Biden’s coveted state oil and gas companies along with chunks of the state Eletrobrás power company. Temer plans to get as much as $24 billion from the selloff. Fully $11 billion of the total are to come from sale of key oil and gas state holdings.
Of course, when state assets such as huge oil and gas resources are sold off to foreign interests in what will clearly be a distress sale, it is a one-off deal.
State oil and gas or electric power projects generate a continuing revenue stream many times any one-off privatization gains. Brazil’s economy is the ultimate loser in such privatization. Wall Street banks and multinationals are of course, as planned, the winner.
On September 19-21, according to the US-Brazil Business Council website, the Brazilian government’s key ministers for infrastructure including Minister Moreira Franco; Minister Fernando Bezerra Coelho Filho, Minister of Mines and Energy; and Minister Mauricio Quintella Lessa, Minister of Transport, Ports and Civil Aviation, will be in New York City to meet with Wall Street “infrastructure investors.”
This is Washington’s way, the way of the Wall Street Gods of Money, as I title one of my books. First, destroy any national leadership intent on genuine national development such as Dilma Rousseff.
Replace them with a vassal regime willing to do anything for money, including selling the crown jewels of their own nation as people like Anatoli Chubais did in Russia in the 1990’s under Boris Yeltsin’s “shock therapy.”
As reward for his behavior, Chubais today sits on the advisory board of JP MorganChase. What will Temer and associates get for their efforts remains to be seen. Washington for now has broken one of the BRICS that ultimately threaten her global hegemony. It is not likely to bring any lasting success if recent history is any guide.
F. William Engdahl is strategic risk consultant and lecturer, he holds a degree in politics from Princeton University and is a best-selling author on oil and geopolitics, exclusively for the online magazine “New Eastern Outlook.”
Dangerous Products That We’re Unknowingly Using In Our Day-To-Day Life
+ The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t September 30 2016 | From: NewEasternOutlook / EnvirowatchRangitikei / Varous
In today’s highly controversial and aggressive world, virtually anything can present a threat to the life of a human being, not just wars, climate change, or short-sighted and often criminal actions of certain politicians.
As it has been shown by a number of scientific studies, the activities of a number of American corporations present a very real threat the well-being of the population mainly due to the use of genetically modified substances in their products while manufacturing substandard health and beauty aids.
The truth is that it’s the people of developing countries that are being affected by these fraudulent business practices the most, since Western corporations try to suppress any information about the health effects of their products to obtain maximum profit.
At the end of the twentieth century British scientists have come to a sensational conclusion that parabens are capable of penetrating the skin barrier and are being accumulated in the tissues of the body, causing cancer, hormone system failures, endocrine system suppression, and skin diseases.
Research made this finding while studying malignant tumors in breast tissue, all of which contained parabens, Later on, these findings were confirmed by Canadian and French scientists.
Parabens are artificial preservatives that are often used in the pharmaceutical and cosmetic industry by a number of Western corporations.
Even though they are effectively increasing the shelf life of a product, while remaining relatively cheap to use, parabens pose a serious threat to human health and well-being.
From time to time one can come across articles on the harmful effects of parabens in Europe and the United States, forcing certain companies to replace parabens with less harmful preservatives. However, the markets of developing countries, especially those with hot and humid climates, are flooded with Western cosmetic products that contain the dangerous substance.
In order to attract international attention to this danger, the French Le Monde went as far as to publish a list of the 400 Western pharmaceutical products containing parabens and that are, therefore, dangerous for use or consumption.
In this list one may find the baby cream Biafine, such cough medicines as Clarix, Codotussyl, Drill, Hexapneumine, Humex, Pectosan, and Rhinathiol, stomach relief medicine such as Maalox, Gaviscon, Josacine, and antibiotic Zinnat, along with a list of other drugs produced by Western corporations and actively advertised for mass consumption.
As it has been pointed out by French journalists, numerous studies have shown that drugs from this list compromise the functioning of the hormone system, especially the reproductive ability of men and women, and may result in cancer.
At the same time, scientists are stressing the danger of hydro-alcoholic gels which were brought to the market in the wake of the artificially created hysteria around the “danger” of the so-called “bird flu,” the H1N1. These gels are advertised as the ultimate solution for sanitizing hands and body in the absence of soap.
A study carried out by the University of Missouri and published in the Plos ONE journal shows that hydro-alcoholic gels make a person more susceptible to Bisphénol-A.
In 2010, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) officially recognized that Bisphénol-A is harmful to human health due to the negative effect it has on brain functions and the reproductive system. It also causes a number of cancers (in both women and men) – in particular, prostate cancer, breast cancer as well as autism, depression, reproductive and endocrine systems failure, delays in brain development, diabetes, obesity, and cardiovascular disease.
Yet another study conducted in Argentina showed that 85% of the women’s hygienic pads presented a serious threat to women since they contain the chemically hazardous substance known as glyphosate.
This fact was revealed by researchers of the National Argentine University of La Plata at a recent congress of physicians in Buenos Aires, upon examining sanitary towels and sanitary pads produced with the use of genetically-modified cotton that was grown using Roundup herbicide of the American company Monsanto-Bayer.
As we learn from this study,after the use of this herbicide, all cotton products contain this carcinogenic substance. For this reason, there’s been a massive movement in many countries through the collection of signatures to force such producers as Tampax or Always to state the composition of their products.
The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t
This information is from well known Dr Mercola. If you go to the link you can download his free ebook, an excellent resource that will show you how to protect yourself and your loved ones from health risks by choosing the best water to drink and bathe in.
Need I repeat? We need to be vigilant in what we expose ourselves to today because corporate interests are such that they will focus on profits not on your health. Be vigilant and be informed.
What if that clear, clean-looking liquid you use every day – to quench your thirst, to bathe and shower in, and to wash your dishes and laundry in contributed to dozens of everyday ailments, including…heart attacks, tiredness, sinus problems, sperm count, risk of miscarriage, a weakened immune system and many more.
Truth is, the water we use in and around our homes is far from the fresh, pure resource you might assume. And the worst part is…
Americans are ingesting from 300 to 600 times what the Environmental Protection Agency considers a “safe” amount while chlorine itself is relatively benign, and was created to help keep us free from infectious diarrheas, it reacts with organic materials which already dissolve in water, forming chemicals (known as DBP’s) that are over 100 times more toxic than chlorine…
According to the U.S. Council of Environmental Quality, the cancer risk to people who drink chlorinated water is 93 percent higher than among those whose water does not contain chlorine.
The residents of a small town in Pennsylvania who ate diets rich in saturated animal fats and milk had no heart attacks – until they switched from mountain spring water to fluoridated water.
Research from the University of Nijmegen in the Netherlands discovered that people who swam in chlorinated pools or polluted waters as children had 2.2 to 2.4 times the risk of developing melanoma compared to those who did not swim in chlorinated waters.
Male smokers who drank chlorinated tap water for more than 40 years had double the risk of bladder cancer as smoking males who drank non-chlorinated water.
12 Proven Natural Therapies To Prevent And Relieve Migraines + Migraines Linked To Certain Heavy Metals And Mineral Deficiencies September 30 2016 | From: GreenMedInfo
The World Health Organization in 2007 estimated that migraine headaches are responsible for more lost years of healthy life in the U.S. than multiple sclerosis, epilepsy, ovarian cancer, and tuberculosis combined.
Every year nearly one in five westerners experience some form of migraine attack. One in 25 will have headaches lasting at least 15 days per month.
Results showed the most common foods causing reactions were wheat (78%), oranges (65%), eggs (45%), tea and coffee (40% each), chocolate and milk (37% each), beef (35%), and corn, cane sugar, and yeast (33% each). When patients avoided an average of 10 common foods there was a dramatic fall in the number of their headaches per month. And 85% of patients became headache-free.
Acupuncture has been used in China for centuries to treat migraine headache. In a multi-center randomized controlled study published in the journal Headache, migraine patients were divided into three groups. One group received real acupuncture treatments and the other two groups received sham acupuncture.
Each patient received one treatment session and was observed over a period of 24 hours. Pain was measured using the Visual Analog Scale (VAS).
After two hours only the real acupuncture group showed any improvement in pain. After four hours the decrease in the VAS score for the real acupuncture group was up to 10 times more than the sham groups. Within 24 hours 40.7% of the patients in the real acupuncture group experienced complete pain relief and 79.6% did not experience recurrence or intensification of pain.
Compared to the control group, the SMT group had significant improvement in migraine frequency, duration, disability, and medication use.
About 22% of the SMT group reported more than a 90% reduction of migraines. In addition, about 50% more reported significant improvement in the symptoms of each episode. More than 80% of patients reported stress as a major factor for their migraines, and researchers suggested that chiropractic care improves conditions related to that stress.
Compared to the control group, the exercise group reported significantly less migraine pain intensity.
Other forms of exercise proven to improve migraines include qigong and yoga.
5. Mindfulness Therapy
A randomized study in the journal Headache reported that migraine sufferers who participated in an 8-week mindfulness-based stress reduction program had 1.4 fewer migraines per month than controls. In addition, their headaches were less severe.
After a six-month gluten-free diet, one of four celiac patients had no migraine attacks, and the remaining three patients experienced an improvement in frequency, duration, and intensity of migraine.
7. Coenzyme Q10
A deficiency of CoQ10 may be common in migraine sufferers. Doctors from the Cincinnati Children's Hospital Medical Center measured CoQ10 levels in 1,550 pediatric and adolescent patients. Those with low levels started taking 1 to 3 mg/kg of body weight per day of CoQ10. After a few months patients on CoQ10 reported fewer headaches and less disability.
At the end of three months 61.3% of patients had a greater than 50% reduction in the number of days with migraine headache. Mean migraine frequency also dropped by 55.3% and there were no side-effects.
And a double-blind, randomized Swiss study compared 100 mg of CoQ10 taken three times a day to placebo in 42 migraine patients. After three months it found CoQ10 was superior to placebo for attack-frequency, headache-days and days-with-nausea.
An Italian study of 24 adolescents found that Ginkgolide B, a constituent of ginkgo biloba, was effective as a preventive treatment in reducing migraine frequency. It also lowered the need for migraine medications.
Patients taking 60 mg of ginkgo biloba twice a day for four months reduced the average number of migraines from 3.7 to 1.2, and reduced length of migraines on average from 40 minutes to 17.6 minutes.
A study from the University of Colorado Anschutz Medical Campus School of Medicine found that medical marijuana decreases migraine frequency. Doctors treated 121 migraine sufferers with various forms of medical marijuana including inhaled and edible forms. Most subjects used more than one form of marijuana and used it every day.
Headache frequency decreased from 10.4 to 4.6 headaches per month, and 39.7% of patients reported positive effects. In addition, 19.8% reported fewer headaches and 11.6% reported aborted migraines. Another 11.6% reported negative effects especially with edible marijuana.
10. B Vitamins
High homocysteine levels have been linked to migraine. In a randomized, double-blind placebo, controlled trial of 52 migraine patients vitamin B cut migraine disability in half. Every day, patients took either a placebo or a combination of 2 mg of folic acid, 25 mg of vitamin B6, and 400 micrograms of vitamin B12.
After six months homocysteine was reduced by 39% in the B vitamin group but was not reduced with placebo. Headache frequency and pain severity were also reduced, whereas there was no reduction in the placebo group.
Another study published in Neurology found that high-dose riboflavin (vitamin B2) helps prevent migraines. Researchers compared riboflavin (400 mg per day) and placebo in 55 migraine patients in a randomized trial. After three months, riboflavin beat the placebo in reducing attack frequency.
In addition, 59% of patients had an improvement of at least 50% in their number of headache days compared to only 15% of patients taking the placebo.
After four months, 77% of all patients reported a reduction in the frequency of migraine attacks of at least 50%. Attack frequency was reduced by 63%. And 91% of patients felt substantially or at least slightly improved after 4 months of treatment.
In a study of adults, researchers at the Albert Einstein College of Medicine in New York found that butterbur extract effectively prevents migraines. Doctors gave 245 migraine patients either a placebo, or 75 mg of the butterbur extract or 50 mg of butterbur extract.
Over 4 months of treatment, migraine attack frequency was reduced by 48% for the 75 mg group, 36% for the 50 mg group, and 26% for the placebo group. The proportion of patients with a 50% or more reduction in attack frequency after 4 months was 68% for patients in the 75 mg group and 49% for placebo.
Migraines Linked to Certain Heavy Metals and Mineral Deficiencies
For millions of people, migraines can not only be severe, but also mysterious.
When a person tries to connect their migraine with something they might eat or do, they are looking for something typically called a trigger. This is not necessarily the cause of the migraine, but it might be related to the migraine – especially if it repeats itself prior to every migraine.
Better than a trigger is a metabolic diagnostic indicator. This could be, for example, a fasting blood sugar level, a high CRP level during a time with repeated migraines or some other diagnostic measurement.
The reason why diagnostic indicators can be more important than triggers is because diagnostic indicators can also allow us to understand the metabolic cause – and a possible solution for the migraine. This contrasts with a trigger, where a potential solution may only relate to removing that particular trigger, but doesn't get to the root of the problem.
Removing one trigger may lead to continued migraines following other triggers. This can be a never-ending process. This leaves some people dealing with migraines for decades without a solution.
But discovering a diagnostic indicator will help us determine a larger-scale strategy to remove the migraine.
Testing Migraineurs for Heavy Metals and Minerals
New research from Turkey's Yuzuncu Yil University has utilized a diagnostic indicator to discover the potential link between heavy metals, minerals and migraines.
The diagnostic tool is quite simple: A blood analysis using atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
The researchers tested 50 people – 25 of whom had been diagnosed with migraines. The other 25 people were healthy control subjects. None of those tested were taking any antioxidant or multivitamin supplements. Also, none smoked, or had an alcoholic addiction, abused drugs, had liver or kidney disease, a heart condition or inflammatory condition.
Those who suffered from migraines were admitted to the hospital and received a diagnosis and treatment program consistent with the recommendations of the International Headache Society.
Certain Heavy Metals Linked to Migraines
The researchers found that the migraine patients had significantly higher levels of certain heavy metals compared with the healthy control group. The heavy metals found in higher levels among the migraine patients were:
Cadmium: The migraine group had an average of .36 micrograms per deciliter (ug/dl) compared to an average of .09 ug/dl among the healthy controls. That means the migraineurs had on average of four times the cadmium in their blood compared with the control group.
Iron: The migraineurs had an average of .97 ug/dl of this mineral – sometimes considered a heavy metal – in their bloodstream. Meanwhile, the healthy controls averaged less than half that amount, with .48 ug/dl.
Lead: The migraineurs had an average of 1.48 ug/dl of this heavy metal in their bloodstream. The healthy controls had an average of .70 ug/dl – again less than half the levels of the migraineurs.
Manganese: This is considered both a mineral and heavy metal – as are all of the above - depending upon the levels found. This and the others above are normally found in miniscule amounts in healthy persons. The migraine sufferers had an average of 2.30 ug/dl of manganese. The healthy controls had levels of .62 in their bloodstream. This means the migraineurs had nearly four times the manganese levels found in the healthy group.
Certain Mineral Deficiencies Also Linked to Migraines
The research also found that the migraine sufferers had notable deficiencies in certain minerals. Here are the heavy hitters:
Copper: The migraine sufferers had an average of 4.63 ug/dl of copper in their blood. Meanwhile, the healthy group had an average of 8.90 ug/dl of copper. This means the healthy group had nearly double the levels of this important mineral.
Magnesium: The migraineurs had an average of 10.58 ug/dl of this important mineral in their bloodstream. Meanwhile the healthy controls had an average of 34.51 ug/dl in their blood. This means the healthy controls had about 350% - or three and a half times – the levels of magnesium in their blood compared the migraine sufferers.
Zinc: The migraine sufferers had an average of .24 ug/dl of this important mineral. This contrasted greatly with the healthy group, which had an average of 5.77 ug/dl of zinc in their bloodstreams. This means the healthy group had over 24 times the levels of zinc in their blood compared to the migraine sufferers!
The Importance of Mineral Balancing
Mineral balance is critical to health. Many studies have linked numerous conditions with either heavy metal toxicity or a deficiency in certain minerals. As mentioned above, those elements considered heavy metals are present in most natural foods and healthy people, but in very small amounts. They are thus to be considered microminerals within the context of our body.
Other minerals – such as calcium, magnesium, zinc and others – are considered macrominerals within the body because our body requires greater amounts of these minerals. These - and even the microminerals – are used in the body for numerous functions.
These include enzyme functions and the production of hormones, neurotransmitters and many others. Some minerals – such as calcium and magnesium – are also used by nerve cells to facilitate the transmission of electrical impulses.
Interestingly, when the body is deficient of a particular type of mineral, our metabolism will typically substitute another type of mineral for that function – one with a similar atomic configuration. This substitution often leads to suppressed metabolism – which can result in greater amounts of inflammation and greater fatigue, stress - and now we can say - a greater risk of migraines.
Other studies have confirmed that many conditions are linked with heavy metal toxicity and mineral deficiencies.
These include dementias, cancers, autistic spectrum disorders, brain disorders and so many others. Research has linked heavy metals to increased oxidative damage – which are linked to these and many other disorders.
This also includes artery diseases, as high cadmium levels have been linked to thickened arteries and atherosclerosis. This of course can relate directly to migraines, as migraines often relate to poor microcirculation, especially around the brain and neck region.
With regards to brain disorders in particular, lead has been linked with brain cancer and brain issues because it readily crosses the blood-brain barrier.
As for therapeutic use of minerals for migraines, both magnesium and zinc have been used for migraines.
Clinton’s nose began to grow from the very start, as she asserted that the nation needs to “finally guarantee equal pay for equal work” for women in her opening statement. The notion that women on average do not receive the same pay as men - the 77 cents to a dollar myth - has been proven false repeatedly.
The fact is that it is already illegal to pay men and women different wages for the same work if they have the same experience. The 77 cents myth is derived from looking merely at average income accrued over a lifetime, and ignores the fact that men on average tend to work longer hours, often work in higher paying industries, and spend more active years in the work force.
"When confronted by Trump about her former strong support for the Trans-Pacific Partnership, Clinton claimed that she “hoped it would be good deal.”
The truth of course is that she called it the “gold standard” of trade deals.
Clinton also advocated raising taxes on the wealthy based on the premise that they do not currently pay enough. “I think it’s time to suggest that the wealthy pay their fair share,” she said. The truth is that America has the most progressive tax system in the developed world - the top 10 percent contribute over half of all income tax revenue.
Bizarrely, Clinton claimed that "slashing taxes on the wealthy hasn't worked." Her comment implied that slashing taxes on the wealthy is why the economy is in such poor shape currently. This is an odd thing to say, considering Obama has been in office for the better part of eight years and has done anything but slash taxes for anyone.
When Trump said he wished to lower the corporate tax rate, Hillary said: "We've looked at your tax proposals. I don't see changes in the corporate tax rates … you're referring to that would cause the repatriation."
Clinton and her team couldn't have been looking very hard, as Trump's plan to lower to corporate tax rate from 35 percent to 15 is written quite clearly on the economic plan posted on his website.
Taking time to remind the country that Clinton's success is due in large part to her surname, she asserted that "my husband did a pretty good job in the 1990s." Clinton, like all Democrats, loves to take credit for the financial stability of her husband's presidency. Of course, it was the Republican-controlled Congress led by Newt Gingrich that blocked Clinton's desired spending measures and balanced the budget.
Only Hillary: With Hillary Clinton campaigning for the White House, it’s hard to determine the truth from the lies - especially with the biased media. But we know the truth - it is only Hillary who has a questionable and incriminating track record.
Clinton also claimed that in being party to the Iran deal she helped "put the lid on Iran's nuclear program." But many said the deal guarantees no such thing. Indeed, it rests entirely on Iran's acting in good faith and upholding their end of the bargain.
When Trump defended the use of stop-and-frisk policies in New York City, Clinton attacked them as unconstitutional and asserted "it was uneffective it did not do what it needed to do."
This is simply false.
"Data from the few cities that report police stops show their effectiveness," Dennis C. Smith, professor of public policy at the Robert F. Wagner Graduate School of Public Service at New York University, wrote in The New York Times in 2012 .
"My trend analysis with SUNY Albany professor Robert Purtell found that the increased use of stops correlated significantly with accelerating drops in most of the major crimes. A Harvard study of policing in Los Angeles under William Bratton, when crime dropped significantly, reported a surge in stops by the L.A.P.D. [with per capita stop rate higher than N.Y.P.D.]," Smith continued.
Perhaps Clinton's most egregious lies were two concerned with emails. "I made a mistake using a private email," Clinton said.
Of course, Clinton didn't use a "private email." She used multiple private email servers. The word mistake implies Clinton didn't know she was doing anything wrong, a claim belied entirely by the fact that so many of her aides and associates pleaded the Fifth or were granted immunity by the FBI - not to mention the fact that many of them engaged in the destruction of evidence and that she herself made false exculpatory statements.
Finally, in visiting her favorite Trump-Putin conspiracy theory, Clinton claimed that "Donald publicly invited Putin to hack into Americans."
The truth, as is obvious from the context of his words, is that Trump was calling on the Russians to release Clinton's missing emails in the event that they already had them.
Clinton may have proven her ability to hold her own against Trump one-on-one Monday night, but she also proved her complete disregard for the truth and willingness to lie to the American people.
Is October Breast Cancer "Awareness" Or "Industry" Month?
September 29 2016 | From: DrMcDougall
October is commonly known as "Breast Cancer Awareness Month." This is an annual, international campaign organized by major charities to increase the awareness of breast cancer and to raise funds for research.
"A lot of awareness has been created, but unfortunately there has been no useful progress made in finding the cause, or for effectively preventing, treating, or curing breast cancer."- HORSESHIT
Comment: In 100 years of 'modern medicine' research not ONE cure for ANY DISEASE has ever been allowed to emerge through the medical establishment - because the upper echelons of the establishment are not interested in cures or addressing causes - only in addressing symptoms - for profit.
Slowly people are waking up to this, especially with the news of natural cures being so successful, remedies that the pharmaceutical industry CANNOT PATENT and therefore cannot CONTROL not PROFIT from. And so they lobby to have real, natural remedies SLANDERED and OUTLAWED.
So, put your coins in the buckets but know that you are further funding the medical establishment that will NEVER RELEASE A CURE FOR CANCER if they have their way.
We do not have a Healthcare System - that label is a farce. We have
a Sickness Industry. Driven by the mandates and objectives of the 'elite' at the top. They have no interest in wellness nor cures.
They wish to keep you as sick as they can for as long as they can whilst extracting as much money from you as they can in the process. This is not just about money, but consolidation of power and population control, otherwise known as Eugenics.
The campaign's efforts have, however, increased the number of women diagnosed with breast cancer, primarily by encouraging mammograms, and the use of powerful treatments, such as surgery, radiation, and chemotherapy.
The conflicts of interest between businesses sponsoring breast cancer awareness campaigns while at the same time profiting from breast cancer diagnosis and treatment have resulted in October also being known as "Breast Cancer Industry Month."
The same year that the Breast Cancer Awareness Month campaign was founded (1985) as a team effort between the American Cancer Society and a pharmaceutical company (AstraZeneca), I wrote McDougall's Medicine: A Challenging Second Opinion.
This book includes a comprehensive chapter on the testing and treatment of breast cancer. After reading this scientifically backed material (click the link over the book cover) you will be shocked to learn that medical doctors and scientists have known for more than 30 years about the harms that are still being done to women.
Countless women have been subjected to life-damaging fear, testing, biopsies, radiation, breast amputations, drugs, and death, with little, if any, improvement in the quality or quantity of their lives.
The reason this inhumanity continues is that the business of diagnosing and treating breast cancer generates a great deal of money for medical practices, far more than would be generated through alleviating women's suffering.
Three major articles that made worldwide headlines were published this year (2015) during Breast Cancer Awareness Month (October), proving that the ineffective ways women have been cared for is widely known. McDougall's Medicine: A Challenging Second Opinion shows you that this is old news.
The first article was published in JAMA Oncology and was a 20-year study of more than 108,000 ductal carcinoma in situ (DCIS)* patients who had undergone treatment.
The headline-grabbing news was the finding that there was no significant difference in survival among women who had a mastectomy, a lumpectomy, or a lumpectomy followed by radiation. Surgery and/or radiation do not save lives (not even for women with invasive cancer).
This organization now recommends that most women should start annual screenings at age 45 rather than at 40, and also advises switching screening to every other year at 55. This update also recommends no routine physical breast exams to be performed by doctors, concluding that there is no evidence that these exams save lives.
The third study was published in the New England Journal of Medicine and found the rate of cancers that have spread beyond the breast when detected has stayed stable since 1975, meaning that mammograms are not preventing the most deadly (metastatic) forms of breast cancer.
McDougall's Medicine: A Challenging Second Opinion can be ordered as a PDF and found in libraries and secondhand bookstores. However, you can read this chapter on breast cancer now by clicking on the book cover above.
*DCIS refers to the formal name, ductal carcinoma in situ. This condition is also referred to as stage 0 breast cancer. The implication is that the abnormal "cancer appearing" cells remain in the milk ducts and show no evidence of spread to other parts of the body. Because the cells have not spread, DCIS is really not cancer.
Many doctors and scientists are calling for a new name for this condition in an effort to reduce the fear and over-treatment caused by the word "cancer."
The conclusion is that old people who are Democrats are the only remaining group that barely trusts the media. This mistaken trust is due to their enculturation. For older Democrats belief in government takes the place of Republican belief in evangelical Christianity.
Older Democrats are firm believers that it was government under the leadership of President Franklin D. Roosevelt that saved America from the Great Depression. As the print and TV media in the 21st century are firmly aligned with the government, the trust in government spills over into trust of the media that is serving the government.
As the generation of Democrats enculturated with this mythology die off, Democratic trust rates will plummet toward Republican levels.
It is not difficult to see why trust in the media has collapsed. The corrupt Clinton regime, which we might be on the verge of repeating, allowed a somewhat diverse and independent media to be 90% acquired by six mega-corporations. The result was the disappearance of independence in reporting and opinion.
The constraints that corporate ownership and drive for profits put on journalistic freedom and resources reduced reporting to regurgitations of government and corporate press releases, always the cheapest and uncontroversial way to report.
With journalistic families driven out of journalism by estate taxes, the few remaining newspapers become acquisitions like a trophy wife or a collector Ferrari.
Jeff Bezos, CEO and founder of amazon.com, handed over $250 million in cash for the Washington Post. Jeff might be a whiz in e-commerce, but when it comes to journalism he could just as well be named Jeff Bozo.
On September 12, Washington Post reporter Cindy Boren dropped the Washington Post below the level of the supermarket tabloid, National Enquirer. One must wonder where her editor was.
One could possibly conclude that Cindy Boren and her Washington Post editor were having fun with Omalu, except that the article repeated the unfounded allegation that circumstantial evidence according to a UK inquiry associates Putin with the poisoning death of Litvinenko.
In other words, first Litvinenko, now Hillary.
If circumstantial evidence is to be the Washington Post’s guide, then clearly that evidence suggests that the neoconservatives, well-ensconced in high government positions and desperate for a New Pearl Harbor in order to launch their wars of hegemony in the Middle East, are responsible for 9/11.
Yet the Washington Post has a full-time reporter whose job is to disparage conspiracy theories while the Washington Post itself launches the conspiracy theory of the century: Putin And Trump Conspiracy Poisons US Democratic Candidate for President.
If intelligence, or perhaps simply sufficient time in Americans’ lives to investigate the news, were not in such short supply, possibly Americans would reflect on what the benefit is of being driven by Washington into conflict with Russia and China.
UN Peace Council: The US Media Is Lying To The American People. The War In Syria Is Not A Civil War, It's A Proxy Invasion By The United States.
US Peace Council Representatives CONFRONT a hostile American press after visiting Syria, and learning that the American people are being lied to, grossly lied to.
A long video, but worth watching if you care to know the truth about what is going on in Syria and how Obama has been lying to us... again.
Tribalism: New Mini-Documentary Reveals How Globalist Manipulators Hijack The Animalistic Control Centers Of Your Brain
September 28 2016 | From: NaturalNews
My new mini-documentary unveils exactly how globalist manipulators hijack the animalist control centers of your brain.
If you're ever wondered how globalists manage to convince the masses that Islamic terrorism doesn't exist, that half the population is gay or transgender, that national security is hatred and bigotry or that government dictatorships are rooted in love and compassion, you must see this video.
This video joins the series of mini-documentaries I've recently released on the subject of mass awakening.
Whatever You Do, Do Not Use Google "Allo": Snowden
September 27 2016 | From: RT
Google Allo, the new “smart” chat app launched on Wednesday, is ‘dangerous’ and should be avoided, according to whistleblower Edward Snowden.
Allo, designed to unseat chat pack leader WhatsApp, promises to deliver quick conversations with features like; “Smart Reply” that can guess your answers and respond to messages with just the tap of a button, and “Google Assistant”, which answers your questions and helps you search for things directly in your chat.
How does Allo plan on predicting your every word and witty emoji, you ask? “The more you use it, the more it improves over time,” which basically means they’ll collect and store as much of your data as possible and then use artificial intelligence to guess your replies.
However, the efficiency of time-saving typing may end up costing customers their already compromised privacy.
When Google first announced the introduction of Allo earlier this year they, too, had planned end-to-end-encryption in “Incognito Mode” and assured they would only store messages transiently, rather than indefinitely.
However, it now appears that Google won’t be doing that after all. Wednesday’s announcement revealed Google plans to store all conversations that aren’t specifically started in “incognito mode” by default.
As Snowden pointed out, last year every single one of the NSA and FBI’s 1,457 surveillance requests was granted by the US foreign intelligence surveillance court… and Allo’s stored data (i.e. your data) will be fair game too.
In contrast, all of WhatsApp’s chats are encrypted and unreadable - although they did announce last month that they will now be sharing your contacts and who you talk to with Facebook.
September 27 2016 | From: RobBryant
Modern theories tell us that there are ten spatial, or "space-like" dimensions to our reality. With this project I have developed a creative way to use a variation of what's known as the "point-line-plane-postulate" to visualise those ten dimensions.
This is a concept that most would have thought was impossible for the human mind to comprehend. How can we do this?
We start with a point. Like the point we know from geometry. It has no size, no dimension. It's just an imaginary idea that indicates a position in a system. A second point then can be used to indicate a second system, but it too is of an indeterminate size. To create the first dimension, all we need is a line passing through any two points...
Continue, you will be glad you did...
Boeing's "You Just Wait" Ad Reveals 100 Year Partial Disclosure Timeline - Analysis: Disproving Partial Disclosure, Insider Testimony, And Steering Collective Consciousness Toward The Full Disclosure Timeline September 26 2016 | From:Sitsshow
The Aerospace technology giant Boeing is celebrating their centennial or 100-year anniversary in 2016. [Buckle up for this bohemoth]
A campaign was launched in late 2015 along with a 30-second advertisement that debuted in early 2016 with the title You just wait.
It features interplanetary spacecraft, solar energy technology, colonies on Mars, and claims to have taken the world "across the universe and beyond." For those who may not be aware, the narrative presented in the commercial sounds glaringly similar to the testimony of secret space program (SSP) insider and whistleblower Corey Goode. The researcher, writer, and presenter David Wilcock also brings forth information that lends credence to this narrative, but there are many others.
The following article provides an overview of the insider testimony that correlates with the Boeing advertisement as well as the partial disclosure agenda currently rolling out to the public. In addition, an analysis of the ad and its subtle influencing methods will be conducted suggesting that it is an effort to steer the collective consciousness of humanity into accepting a limited disclosure scenario.
Goode became aware of this deceptive disclosure effort as a result of his contacts in the SSP Alliance and is doing everything he can to alert the public. This is because an alliance within the higher level SSP - whom he is connected to - is seeking full disclosure.
Full Disclosure vs. Partial Disclosure
This full disclosure scenario, as proposed by the SSP Alliance, and their allies, calls for a complete end to slavery in all its forms (the Babylonian money-magic system), the release of all hidden information and suppressed technology, and a truth and reconciliation style tribunal of the Cabal and their underlings.
If the SSP Alliance gets their way, so much of the truth will be made public that attempting to institute a new form of slavery will be almost impossible. Clearly, the criminal syndicates operating on Earth and beyond want to do everything they can to stop this effort, including releasing advertisements that entice the public to accept a partial disclosure narrative.
But for those unaware of the insidious machinations of the Cabal (also known as the Illuminati, the New World Order, and so on) - those in power who have shaped the planet into a glorified form of modern day feudalism or slavery - the partial disclosure initiative will sound like a saving grace; because that's what it's designed to do.
It's designed to pacify the people who are the most aware while selling the unaware masses on a space-age style form of neo-enslavement.
Under this limited disclosure agenda, only some of the truth will be revealed to the public and even that will take 100 years. According to Goode and his contacts in the SSP Alliance, the Cabal-run groups, and their allies, have brokered an agreement with certain Earth-based alliances to begin this partial disclosure effort.
Apparently, this agreement was made in late 2015 and bolstered in 2016, but this plan was most likely developed much earlier.
In a report issued in June of 2015, Goode stated that he attended a Super-Federation Council meeting wherein the first public allusion of a limited disclosure plan was mentioned:
"The person at the podium then asked that there be no more Alliance Disclosures through myself or the people I am talking to including David Wilcock until after an agreed upon date in late November of 2015. They said that a well-known public servant would be sacrificed in the operation to implement their plan for an incremental disclosure."
Whether or not the "well-known public servant" was sacrificed remains unclear. On the other hand, partial disclosure efforts have continued to pour out into the public domain.
These take on the form of entertainment media, such as films, television shows, and video games, as well as innuendo from science related propaganda outlets, like NASA.
For example, the initial discovery of exoplanets several years ago was a complete paradigm shift in the way science deals with the search for extraterrestrial life.
Prior to this development, it was widely accepted in academia that humanity would most likely never find extraterrestrials - at least not anytime soon. Anyone searching for ETs with seriousness was quietly ridiculed and maligned - but not anymore. This is in part due to the discoveries of the Kepler Mission focusing on the search for habitable exoplanets.
Revised Drake Equation
To exemplify this shift, consider that the Drake Equation was "updated" recently.
This mathematical model from the mid 20th century was a boon for those unwilling to acknowledge the possibility of life evolving elsewhere in the cosmos.
In its original form, the equation asserted that it was a statistical certainty that life doesn't exist in the cosmos. But for those in the know, clearly, this isn't true. Earlier this year, a team of scientists proposed changes that completely shifted how we look at the universe.
"Adam Frank is a professor of physics and astronomy at the University of Rochester who helped co-author a paper proposing changes to the Drake Equation, which incorporate Kepler's exoplanet observations.
The team revised the framework of several factors so that instead of asking how likely is it that ET civilizations exist, it instead asks how likely is it that our civilization is the only one to have existed."
The new form of the Drake Equation suggests that it is nowa mathematical certainty that ancient ET cultures evolved and then went extinct many times over.
Isn't it interesting what changing some of the factors can do to shift the results?
This new conclusion is an almost an 180º shift from the previous view. Take a moment to appreciate that within 10 years time, humanity went from "we are totally alone in the universe" to "extinct ancient ET cultures probably existed everywhere."
And it just so happens that in the partial disclosure plan put forth by the Cabal, a central part is the admission of ancient ruins from ET cultures being found throughout the solar system and beyond.
To be clear, Goode and other insiders have confirmed that it is true ancient ruins have been found all throughout the solar system and local star cluster. However, there are also countless extraterrestrial civilizations that have made contact with humanity in the relatively short time the SSP has been active, within the past 100 years.
Goode states that there are at 40 to 60 extraterrestrial groups with longstanding outposts within the solar system, which have maintained a Super Federation alliance to ensure their agendas come to fruition.
This federation has been actively conducting 22 genetic, social, and spiritual experiments on Earth for thousands of years.
The point being that the partial disclosure narrative only reveals extinct ancient ET cultures and makes no mention of contemporaneous non-terrestrial activities - a half-truth with the power to espouse many false impressions in the minds of the unaware masses.
Ceres Bright Spot
The Ceres bright spot is another point of soft disclosure laying the foundations for a limited disclosure event, as presented by David Wilcock. The planetoid captivated extraterrestrial enthusiasts when, in 2015, the Dawn spacecraft captured images of incredibly bright objects in one of the craters on the desolate surface.
Image Source. Ceres Bright Spot seen as it moves from the sun-facing side. Here the luminosity doesn't appear to be reduced as one would expect if it was reflecting sunlight off a surface, leading some to conclude these lights are artificial in nature.
Although mainstream science tells us these bright spots are nothing but reflective ice fields, certain analysts have suggested that the luminosity is too great to be a natural reflection.
The discovery of thousands of exoplanets, the revising of the Drake Equation, and the Ceres bright spot are each playing a part in preparing humanity for disclosure.
And while these items will certainly be a part of a disclosure event, without the whole truth, it may not be the full disclosure experience many have been waiting for. These the points alone provide a basis for the Cabal-run media to push the limited disclosure plan, and as was mentioned earlier, involves the devulgence of ancient ruins left by ET races.
Another element involves a narrative in which human beings were created from an ancient race of ET giants, known in the SSP as the progenitors or the Ancient Builder race.
To be clear, these elements are a part of the story, but not the whole truth. As such, gaining an understanding of what the whole picture looks like is essential to discerning the limited disclosure effort from the complete or full one.
What Would Partial Disclosure Look Like?
When the big push starts - which we are in the early stages of now - it will seem like the truth has finally been revealed: decades worth of banker fraud will be exposed, war criminals will be arrested, the 9/11 conspiracy will be unveiled, UFOs will be connected to black budget government projects (USAPs), and a financial reset or debt forgiveness will take place.
And for those unaware of the greater truths - especially those related to higher level SSP activity - this will seem like our prayers have finally been answered. And again, all these things will probably be part of a full disclosure event, and as such, the Cabal needs certain features to be present within the limited disclosure plan in order to gain support from the public.
The limited plan calls for releasing information about lower level secret space program activity only; nothing about the over 900 extraterrestrial groups we've been actively trading with; nothing about the over 60 million people who were enslaved by the programs during the Brain Drain era of the 1960's.
And nothing about hundreds of thousands of people who go missing every year disappearing into highly immoral human trafficking operations with extraterrestrial races; nothing about the true power of our collective consciousness and its ability to affect reality; nothing about the organic evolution timeline and the complete fraud of transhumanism; nothing about the malevolent AI (Artificial Intelligence) that has infected the minds of so many high ranking societal figures, and so on.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
In short, the partial disclosure agenda is nothing more than a softer and more palatable form of mass mind control and slavery.
It is an attempt by despotic elites to regain control over the human population, which is presently showing signs of an organic mass awakening.
It will do this by enticing the unawakened and unaware masses to accept a technological leap in society, which will seem like it imparts more freedoms but in reality, causes greater dependency and reliance on the would-be masters of this world.
One of the justifications for this plan, on the part of some of these Earth-based alliance groups pushing for partial disclosure, is that because the West had their 100 years of financial dominance (the Federal Reserve System), the East wants their turn to be masters of humanity. But slavery is still slavery, even if the shackles are a little less heavy.
The following is a compilation and summary of Goode's relevant high-level SSP testimony, the partial disclosure agenda, and how the Boeing Centennial advertisement is most likely a propaganda piece to entice the public into accepting limited disclosure.
The advertisement, You just wait, as we will discuss blow, has all the hallmarks of predictive programing and subtle influencing.
In order to fully comprehend the difference between partial and full disclosure, as well as understanding the events that have occurred behind the scenes leading up to the present, we must review the history of the secret space program, how it has developed in modern times, as well as a nefarious Cabal or Illuminati that has worked to enslave the planet. In the process, we'll make clear the logical fallacies of the partial disclosure plan, hopefully immunizing the reader's mind from the trappings of subtle manipulation.
By the end, it should hopefully be abundantly clear what we the people of this world can do to effect beneficial change for the future.
Let me say that I think we are at a crucial time in history, when the future of the planet will be decided by those who have spent so many years tirelessly investigating, researching, and coming to understand the greater truths of this world.
The truther movement or awakening community is uniquely empowered to act as catalyzing agents for an unparalleled age of light and life, the golden age prophesied in antiquity.
But this won't happen from the comfort of an armchair or behind a computer screen.
The planet has fallen into tyranny because the people have been enticed to forget their rightful place as custodians of truth, goodness and freedom for all. We've allowed ourselves to be indoctrinated into all manner of self-destructive beliefs based in selfishness that have kept us distracted and divided for eons.
Therefore, our task as a people seeking real change and an end to the paradigms of enslavement is to find the courage to set aside any idea, belief, or point of view that fuels unreasonable division and infighting, while at the same time developing compassion, tolerance and true healing for oneself and others.
The tools of abundance are the same methods used to heal oneself and the world, and these are the same tools we need to unite to spread the whole truth far and wide. This article is an effort to provide the reader with more of the whole truth so that they will be empowered to discern the false partial disclosure agenda.
It is this partial disclosure agenda that is so clearly revealed in the 30-second advertisement by Boeing.
Once the full disclosure narrative has been presented, we will analyze the Boeing video to demonstrate the subtle conditioning techniques employed. Hopefully by the end of this article, the reader will be able to recognize the tone of the video with ease.
PS: This article was originally written in March of 2016. Corey Goode was kind enough to review this writing and offer insights to enhance what is provided. I have since that time revised sections and added updated portions to include developments that have happened since that time.
The Early Secret Space Programs
The backstory to this partial disclosure agenda is important to understand. For those who are well versed with this history, feel free to skip ahead to the section entitled "Materially Disproving the Basis of Partial Disclosure"
Here are some of the key points of this very long and complex history. I took the liberty of presenting only essential portions of the narrative. For a broader outline of the history see the below-linked article.
In modern times, several secret societies or occult groups in control of various nation-states, operating behind a veil of government secrecy, developed space programs using advanced technologies hidden from the public eye.
The two groups of greatest influence are the German and American secret space programs, which eventually merged in the 1950's and 60's to form a singular multinational corporate conglomerate. This was an umbrella of many different individual and often compartmentalized programs referred to as the Secret Space Program.
Prior to the merger of the German and American programs, the Germans were leading the advancement of aerospace technology in pre-World War II Europe. Some of what emerged had advanced as a result of reverse engineering ancient flying craft known as the Vimana during the 1920's and 30's, as well as documents recovered from antiquity describing antigravity devices.
During this time, the Germans were conducting expeditions all over the world in an effort to recover ancient technology, sacred texts, and secrets kept by various priesthoods. For example, they traveled to the Himalayas and encountered several Tibetan monastic orders who were allegedly in possession of incredibly advanced technical drawings of antigravity craft, as well as possessing records of Earth's early history, passed down through oral tradition. It was through the interrogations of some of these monks that they heard of whole civilizations living within the Earth's crust.
Other advances in the early German program occurred as a result of mediumship, or as it is termed today, channeling, via the Virl Society in post World War I Germany. This group made contact with several advanced races, one being a Nordic-looking group calling itself the Agartha Network, which apparently has dwelt within the Earth's crust for millions of years.
This group claims to be the first humans to have evolved on the planet and has provided assistance to surface populations in many instances throughout history. They are xenophobic in nature, appearing to other groups as gods or extraterrestrials in an effort to hide their home locations from war-like groups on the surface.
Another race contacted by the Germans was the Draco, an extraterrestrial reptilian group with imperialistic intentions and behavior. According to William Tomkins, another SSP whistleblower and insider, the early German program decided to ally itself with the more militaristic Draco group, and apparently solidified their alliance in 1939. Tompkins also states that it was the Draco in addition to other alliances which "handed over" smaller subterranean caverns below the ice of Antarctica.
Image Source. A map of antarctic bases, some of which were first built out by the Germans, supplied by Corey Goode
Through their alliances, the German program made great advances during the World War II era of history. They developed spacecraft capable of exploring the solar system and beyond, as well as receiving support from their otherworldly contacts in ancient city sites in Antarctica.
The Germans built advanced bases there and set up facilities on the Moon and Mars, with the protection of their Draco allies. By the start of the war, the German group had advanced so far beyond the parent nation that they could rightly be called a breakaway civilization; no longer dependent on Germany and its resources to further their agenda.
When the Germans realized that the war was not going to end in their favor, they evacuated key personnel and equipment in the German SSP to Antarctica.
The site was already well established prior to the Nazi conquests of Europe, and by the time they were defeated, the antarctic Germans had enjoyed nearly 10 years of uninterrupted development and expansion.
But with the loss of the war, the isolated Germans lacked the industrial resources and infrastructure to accomplish their lofty goals of space exploration and conquest, realising this, they turned their gaze to the American programs and the industrial might of the United States.
The Germans Take Over the American Military Industrial Complex
After the war, thousands of top level German scientists and engineers were recruited into the American military industrial complex via Project Paperclip. The Americans had made some advancements of their own by reverse engineering extraterrestrial craft recovered from certain crash sights like Roswell New Mexico in 1947, as well as recovered SSP technology from Germany during WWII.
But the Americans were far behind the Germans in technology, advancement and exploration of space.
The Germans had made great leaps and bounds due to their non-terrestrial allies and by the time of Project Paperclip, they had almost perfected space travel, employing technology so advanced that the Americans could have easily mistaken it as extraterrestrial in origin.
The Germans wanted to continue development of their programs, but due to the lack of infrastructure and resources, needed the industrial might of the United States.
Their plan was to deceive the Americans by providing them older advancements of Alien Reproduction Vehicles, while slowly infiltrating and taking over the military industrial complex, exploiting the manufacturing power of the US.
The Americans had a similar goal of infiltrating the German group and stealing their technology for themselves.
The Americans discovered that the Germans had a base in Antarctica, and in 1947, sent Admiral Byrd with a large naval fleet to invade and destroy the German presence, recovering technology in the process.
According to William Tompkins, the Germans were assisted by their off-world allies, using advanced particle beam weapon technology and perfected antigravity craft to beat the Americans into submission. But it appears that total destruction of the American fleet was not the goal, although the Germans could have easily annihilated the ill prepared invasionary forces.
This was most likely because the Germans wanted the Americans to limp back and make clear to the military leadership at the time that the they were not equipped to deal with the Germans in an outright conflict. This would provide the Germans the intimidation they needed to force the Americans into a partnership.
The Americans quickly retreated back to the US. Top Brass within the secretive American group was perplexed by what Byrd reported, and they began to interrogate Paperclip Germans in an effort to understand what was happening. The Paperclip Germans were secretly in communication with their allies in Antarctica and beyond.
They discovered a point of weakness in the American intelligence apparatus and wanted to take full advantage of it. This weakness was the American policy of hiding the discovery of extraterrestrial life from the public.
The Americans decided after the 1947 Roswell crash, to cover up the UFO phenomenon. During several whitewashes, such as Project Blue book they made an effort to maintain a strict level of secrecy, which the Germans took full advantage of.
They realized that the Americans hold over the people was partially due to the energy industry, based on fossil fuel.
If word got out that antigravity free-energy technology was being developed in secret, the American elite would lose control of the population.
This was another point of pressure the Germans could use to force the Americans to sign treaties that gave the them access to much needed industrial resources.
The Germans were going to engage the Americans by threatening to disclose the truth about the existence of UFOs and advanced technology.
This German threat would be made by a show of force and superiority in the US capitol. In 1952, several German highly advanced spacecraft flew over Washington DC, as well as several other sorties over major US cities. They also landed and made direct contact with civilians in the US, presenting themselves as Nordic-looking extraterrestrials.
The Billy Meier case, in particular, could be one such account of a German SSP contactee experience, according to Corey Goode and other insider sources.
Apparently once the Americans got word of Meier's personal contact with otherworldly beings, they dispatched several agents to gather information about the encounter. They presented a series of images to Meier of women that looked like the beings he described, one of which was Maria Orsic, a Vril Society medium and German SSP asset.
Apparently, when Meier saw the photo of Orsic, he immediately identified her as the being that made contact with him.
Maria Orsic (left) artist depiction of her alleged appearance during the Billy Meier's case
In short, the Germans learned from their Nordic allies that appearing to the surface population as extraterrestrials had its advantages. While the Meier case didn't occur until the mid 1970's, it could be one of the better examples of false extraterrestrial contact, if certain sources promoting this version of events are to be believed.
After a quiet period, the Germans eventually forced the military industrial complex of the US to sign treaties that culminated in the union of both groups, but the Germans were the clear victors.
President Dwight D. Eisenhower made his infamous 1961 address, warning that the military industrial complex was out of control, potentially because he knew the Germans had completely taken it over.
After this merger, the now aligned secret space program saw the emergence of several different SSP factions and an industrial scale expansion into space.
These developments would realize the emergence of lower level secret space programs that partially acted as a cover to shield higher level operations from the more aware "read-in" persons in the military industrial complex.
In other words, while a forefront of the higher level SSP progressed at a furious pace, a limited version was also developed that acted as a screen to hide other programs.
As a result, the information made available to UFO researchers over the years ranges in complexity and is often contradictory in nature. Some whistleblowers, who had access to top secret information, to be sure, were not fully made aware of what was advanced in all the various secret space programs.
Compartmentalization is used to such an extent that one program may be completely unaware of a deeper branch within their own ranks. Steven Greer is one such researcher who has focused on this aspect of what is called Unacknowledged Special Access Programs (USAPS), which intentionally create cover projects for the chief purpose of obfuscating more secretive activities.
After the American military industrial complex was taken over by the Germans, a major industrialization effort of space began. The Americans had many aerospace companies that wanted to develop and expand their operations into space using advanced technology hidden from the public.
The Germans already had several bases in the solar system at this time and now allied with the Americans, had the infrastructure needed to maximize production for furthered expansion. Corporate interests in the military industrial complex learned of German mining facilities in the Asteroid belt (care of the Paperclip Germans) and wanted to exploit the resources and technology developed by them.
The greed of these corporate giants, one of which being the aerospace company Boeing, allowed the newly merged SSP to flourish.
The Interplanetary Corporate Conglomerate
Interplanetary Corporate Conglomerate (ICC) is a massive multinational SSP faction that formed to manage the expansion effort into space. Nearly every aerospace and technology company on the planet enjoys membership in this heavily secretive and powerful organization.
Over the next 20 years, leading up to the 1980's, a huge recruitment process took place known as the "Brain Drain" era of the 1960's. Millions of top level scientists, engineers, and great thinkers were brought into the program, placed in sites throughout the solar system to further advancement.
In many cases these people and their families were recruited under false pretenses, being told they would be living like "the Jetsons" in a fantastic space age setting. When they arrived at their new off-world location, they would be forced to work in an industrial facility as literal slaves for a Nazi-style run operation.
The ICC would use slave labor, the same method employed by the Nazis during the war, to advance their agenda.
The technology developed through recovered artifacts found on ancient extraterrestrial sites in the solar system secured the SSP a lucrative trading position with other races in the galaxy.
In addition, human biology and genetic material is also highly sought after by non-terrestrial races, which this morally repugnant group had no issues providing in exchange for various items of interest.
At present, the ICC is involved in human trafficking, either in direct slave trade or by selling biological material to extraterrestrial races. Apparently a large portion of people who go missing every year, are taken off-world and traded like chattel to other groups.
The Dark Fleet
The Dark Fleet is an enigmatic faction that is arguably the oldest of the programs. According to Goode, it emerged through the early German and Draco alliance, greatly advancing this factions capabilities as a result of their cooperation.
The ICC faction helped develop technology for the Dark Fleet but its activities and goals remain mysterious. What little is known about them tells us they primarily work outside of the solar system along side their Draco allies in conquest and defense of acquired territory.
Artists depiction of the Dark Fleet base and spacecraft on the Moon based upon detail provided by Corey Goode
The development of Solar Warden came about as a result of several money laundering schemes, one of which was the Star Wars program or Strategic Defense Initiative, spoken of by President Ronald Reagan in the 1980's.
Gary McKinnon hacked into defense department computer systems in 2010, revealing the existence of a special access program given the name Solar Warden, lending further credence to the notion of this faction's existence.
Solar Warden is responsible for policing the solar system, keeping an eye on all incoming and outgoing traffic, and standing as a modest military force against potential threats.
According to Goode, the skies above the Earth are abuzz with extraterrestrial activity, and in some cases, groups enter in an effort to steal resources, technology or biological material. A protective force was required to keep watch and defend against aggressive smaller groups that enter our stellar neighborhood.
Goode claims to have spent 20 years working on a science research vessel in the Solar Warden program from 1987 to 2007. After leaving the program, he was age regressed, brought back in time to the moment he left, and had his memories wiped or blank-slated.
But due to his Intuitive Empath training, he is part of a small population of program participants capable of recovering most of their lost memories. Apparently blank-slating is a common practice for the SSPs at large, especially in the MILAB programs.
The Global Galactic League of Nations (GGLN) is a compartmentalized version of the secret space program.
The higher level program participants - member nations like the US - knew that intelligence services of other nations would eventually discover their activities and decided to offer a "token gesture" in the form of a multinational United Nations-style space program, providing cover for higher-level SSP projects.
This faction is mainly focused on scientific research, not directly involved in the more nefarious aspects of the ICC, such as human trafficking.
This faction was also how the upper-level SSPs procured cooperation in the recovery of downed ET craft, which was and is taking place using advanced energetic technology developed from Tesla's discoveries.
In exchange for their cooperation, which required assisting American teams in recovering downed ET craft, these nations were granted admission into the GGLN, and presumably believed that this was the extent of the secret government programs in space - a deceptive compartmentalization tactic used by the upper-level programs.
Military Factions:Lower Level Secret Space Programs
In the midst of these deep cosmic space programs many lower-level heavily compartmentalized projects were created for various purposes, one of which was to add further cover.
This faction serves as a layer of secrecy between military intelligence services and deep black SSP projects.
It is these lower level factions and their related Earth-based alliances that are of key importance in understanding the limited disclosure agenda. This is partially because the compartmentalized narrative they are provided is a good match for the extinct ancient ETs half-truth story.
The lower level secret space program, like the Global Galactic League of Nations, serves a function, but is primarily purposed to hide the higher level programs. Again, the intelligence services of industrialized nations, such as the United States, England, France, Germany, and so on, were tracking unidentified objects in the skies for decades.
In order to protect higher level operations from these more in the know groups, a close to Earth orbit cover story needed to be developed and promulgated.
According to Bruce, an insider that has revealed information to David Wilcock, the narrative told to most of these lower level operatives is as follows:
"A here are no extraterrestrials in the solar system at this time. The objects tracked in the sky that some consider extraterrestrial UFOs are actually advanced military spacecraft. We have near-Earth-orbit and high-Earth-orbit space platforms, and more advanced spacecraft that has been hidden from the public for decades.
There are ancient ruins left in the solar system from extraterrestrials, an advanced progenitor race, the Ancient Builders - but they have long since left. Anything we do encounter that isn't ours is part of a group of future humans that have access to time travel technology. These future humans came back into our timeline hundreds of times, assisting humanity to restart civilization after major and minor cataclysms.
So there are no current aliens, just humans, either secret military activities or future humans."
These lower level programs are heavily militaristic and believe that they have access to the highest level of secrecy on the planet; they think they are the top of the totem pole andthat no one knows more than they do.
This group, and its narrative, serves as a compartmentalized bubble or barrier that shields higher level operations from persons embedded within deep black projects here on Earth.
Essentially, anytime information about higher level programs are leaked to the public, a lower level insider will come out saying that "it's all BS" or untrue. In other words, this group is essentially a microcosmic SSP specifically designed to hide the macrocosmic secret space programs.
Composite of images allegedly caputring Flying Triangle craft, sometimes associated with the TR-3B TRINITY craft developed by McDonnell Douglas
According to Goode, in many cases these operatives have no idea that other operations exist, making it very easy to shield higher level activity. Often in an effort to maintain pride in their organization, any information related to higher level activity that makes it to the public is quickly de-bunked by these lower level operative whistleblowers and insiders.
This irreconcilable nature of lower level insider testimony and higher level accounts has greatly confused the Ufology community.
As an example of this, consider the exemplary, yet contradictory nature of the whistleblower narratives gathered by interviewer Kerry Cassidy of Project Camelot, and others like Project Avalon - which to their credit - is arguably a wealth of insider data yet to be deciphered and discerned into a cohesive narrative.
The fact that so many insiders have a different worldview handed down from their superiors suggests that narratives within the SSPs vary to a great extent in order to facilitate compartmentalization and simultaneously befuttle the public once insiders begin to reveal themselves.
The Secret Space Program Alliance
The SSP Alliance is a group of defectors within the programs at large that realized humanity and the people of Earth have been oppressed by a nefarious group of quasi-Nazis they call the Secret Earth Government and their criminal syndicates.
The people of Earth know this group by many names, such as the Cabal, Illuminati, the NWO, the banking Elite, the Dark Occultists, and so on.
Artist depiction of a Secret Space Program Alliance arm badge
Solar Warden was the first faction to break away from the ICC controlled SSP, which according to Goode, took place in the early 1990's. They began to overtly go against the Cabal-run SSP in earnest during the early 2000's and beyond.
Since that time, other defections have slowly taken place, bolstering the SSP Alliance in its ability to combat Cabal-run secret space programs.
The SSP Alliance intends on ending the current era of secrecy and enslavement for the people of Earth and liberate enslaved people in the solar system. Their stated purpose is to take possession of advanced technology and facilities in the hands of Cabal-run SSPs, to eventually hand them over to the people in a way that ensures no one group has an advantage over any other.
They plan to do this in what they call massive data dumps or a complete release of all hidden information, history and technology. But in order for these data dumps to be taken seriously by the public, they think two things would need to happen, a catalyzing event and coordination with ground-based liberation groups.
A Catalyzing Event to Reveal "The Matrix"
First a trigger event of some kind is required to jostle the people out of their Stockholm syndrome. The uneasy truth is that the Cabal have coaxed the vast majority of humanity into actually wanting to be enslaved - albeit not in an overt fashion.
For example, it has been said, the love of money is the root of all evil and in a way this is true because the monetary system is an key componant in the systems of enslavement.
In order to help comprehend the current state of consciousness of humanity and how powerfully the masses have been indoctrinated to accept slavery, consider what Morpheus from the highly symbolic Matrix film said:
Morpheus: Unfortunately, no one can be told what the Matrix is. You have to see it for yourself.Morpheus: The Matrix is everywhere. It is all around us. Even now, in this very room. You can see it when you look out your window or when you turn on your television.
You can feel it when you go to work, when you go to church, when you pay your taxes. It is the world that has been pulled over your eyes to blind you from the truth. Neo: What truth?
Morpheus: That you are a slave, Neo. Like everyone else you were born into bondage. Into a prison that you cannot taste or see or touch. A prison for your mind.
Morpheus: The Matrix is a system, Neo. That system is our enemy. But when you're inside, you look around, what do you see? Businessmen, teachers, lawyers, carpenters. The very minds of the people we are trying to save. But until we do, these people are still a part of that system and that makes them our enemy.
You have to understand, most of these people are not ready to be unplugged. And many of them are so inured, so hopelessly dependent on the system, that they will fight to protect it. [Bolding added.]
The system that Morpheus is describing here is our participation in the matrix of control via our thoughts, beliefs and actions - that's why it is a "prison that you cannot taste or see or touch. A prison for your mind."
Of course, no one consciously thinks to themselves, "I want to be a slave in the Cabal's NWO," but by our participation in the matrix, we breathe life into it, we consent to it, and we enslave ourselves. In this way there no bystanders, only those working for freedom or those acquiescing to slavery. But on this score, everyone's doing the best they can with what they have to work with.
The Cabal's pyramid of power and control is founded on the people's participation, and if the people see the truth and change themselves, the whole structure will come tumbling down.
This is what they fear most, hence endless divide and conquer tactics to keep the people distracted with infighting, all while the Cabal quietly proceeds with their agenda.
The unawakened cannot see the matrix for it is because if they did, their reality bubble - to use Goode's term - would burst. The sleeping masses are too involved in the way they currently live their lives and don't want to give that up, even if it means the whole planet is enslaved and suffers as a result.
The medical condition describing when someone continues to do things that are ultimately destructive to themselves or others - beyond their control - is an addiction.
The masses are addicted to the Cabal and the destructive society they forced us to create. This means that a reality check moment is needed, similar to an intervention, where the truth about what we created is presented to us so we can realize the error of our ways as a people and choose a different path as a collective.
This catalyzing event could come in the form of a financial collapse, or other triggers. When people are content and satisfied, when they are fat on bread and distracted by circuses, they usually aren't interested in self-reflection and change.
As such, we need to cut off the source of the addictive tendency, and imploding the financial system is one way to cover all the different types of distractions out there, as they usually require money in some fashion.
Before an addict can find the courage to face their addiction, they usually need to feel the burn of what they have chosen. Humanity's participation is essential so as to ensure free will is honored and a truly sovereign and free society emerges from the ashes of this one.
Money in general, has the psychological effect of distorting value perception. Instead of being able to see the value in something inherently, we've been trained to consider it in terms of money, how much it costs or how much we stand to gain.
For example, people generally wouldn't lie to another person, just for the sake of doing it but if you offer them enough money, they would usually happily do what is asked of them, especially if you give them a justifiable excuse for doing so.
Why? Because in certain areas of life we tend to value money more than their own integrity, although we don't think of it this way.
The point is that money has become our artificial value system, a type of cosmic drug that keeps us addicted to separation, scarcity, and slavery - but not all financial systems are like this. Like all addictions, the only way to overcome them is to stop taking the drug and allow the soul to heal.
Ground-based Cooperation for Data Dumps
After a catalyzing event, when the hypnotic trance of the masses has been broken, then the second item of the data dumps can occur; but in order for it to be effective, it must be presented seriously.
In other words, the SSP Alliance needs a ground-based ally capable of disseminating the information to the people en masse.
And this is where the problem currently lies. The ground-based alliances are not willing to accept a full disclosure scenario. In addition, the present state of the awakening community is not organized enough to handle such a huge task.
Some might be thinking to themselves:
"Who cares if they don't have help from ground-based groups, do the data dumps anyway!"
As we just discussed, due to pandemic PTSD and Stockhome syndrome, most people are too attached to the status quo for emotional support to even consider the whole truth, let alone be willing to listen to a large presentation of the facts.
People have been trained to fear change at all costs, and as such, even if the truth was pouring in from all sides, most people won't accept it because it would also mean the end of their world.
In addition, without media participation or at least a large enough dissemination force (like a grass roots disclosure effort), the Cabal could easily "debunk" any information that comes out, with the well-trained captives of the matrix drinking deep from the cup of government disinformation.
And since most people don't want to hear the truth anyway, they will jump at the chance to dismiss the data dumps and continue to believe in the false reality that provides them comforts in life.
Coordination with ground-based groups is essential to ensure people have the best opportunity to receive the truth. The good news is, due how humanity has been programmed to accept information on blind faith, it will be very easy to reach the masses through the media.
People rely on TV, Radio, News outlets and so on, to tell them what is real, so if even a handful of media outlets defected to the SSP Alliance, joining the full disclosure initiative, the data dumps could be very effective, very quickly. The propaganda machine of the Cabal could end up being their greatest downfall, as we use the mass media itself to spread the truth like never before.
This Full Disclosure plan will deal a death blow to the paradigm of artificial scarcity and the Babylonian money magic slavery system that has dominated civilization for millennia. The SSP Alliance goal is to restore truth, prosperity, and freedom to all people, everywhere. Given that pandemic ignorance has enabled the Cabal to maintain control over the people, only the whole truth released to all people can ensure no further manipulation takes place.
COBRA is another insider and spokesman for a resistance group. He claims to represent a gathering of extraterrestrials, inner-Earth peoples and ground-based forces under the common banner of the Resistance Movement. Since early 2012, he has been releasing information related to the secret space program, ongoing alliance activities to free the planet, an energetic shift of the solar system - all under the banner of what he calls The Event.
While some aspects of COBRA's narrative conflict with Goode's, the overall intention of the Resistance Movement (to free the planet and have a full disclosure event) are in harmony with the SSP Alliance's intention.
This means that the respective groups within the awakening community that have rallied behind these figures need not divide themselves and prevent unification towards common goals.
And there are still countless other groups, such as the Silver Legion, Ashtar Command, the Galactic Confederation, the Galactic Federation, and so on, all claiming to be here with the goal of freeing the planet and providing assistance to humanity.
What remains unclear is if all these groups are real tangible efforts or if they are elaborate disinformation campaigns orchestrated by the Cabal. Regardless, the people who believe in them do so because of the ideas presented, all of which demonstrates the common bond we share in the quest for truth and freedom.
Which spokesman, narrative, resistance group or alliance we like the most isn't as important as the singular goal that unites them all: freedom for humanity.
For far too long the Cabal have manipulated us into fighting amongst ourselves, that this person is wrong, or that point of view is invalid, all the while forgetting the overarching goal of truth and freedom. We may not agree on everything, but there's one thing we all want, and that's the truth.
Surely we can unite in the pursuit of truth and freedom for humanity if nothing else.
The Sphere Being Alliance
According to the SSP insider Pete Peterson, and confirmed by Corey Goode, in the early 1980's, a massive sphere the size of the planet Neptune entered our solar system. Solar Warden, which was still Cabal-run at the time, intercepted the sphere they were calling The Seeker.
After several failed attempts to communicate with the enormous object, they eventually received a transmission saying, "we are peaceful explorers." The Solar Warden craft observed thousands of smaller craft leaving a port on the side of the sphere, which was apparently 800 miles wide.
The Solar Warden craft told the Seeker to leave immediately, which it did.
The Cabal was disturbed by this event. Heretofore they near autonomy in the solar system, able to continue their plans relatively free from outside interference, save through the interactions of the Super Federation of non-terrestrial races that have worked on 22 different genetic, social, and spiritual experiments on Earth.
A decade would pass before any more spheres would be seen.
In the late 1990's, hundreds of these massive spheres began to enter the solar system, some using the Sun as a type of stargate or portal, whereas others entered from outside the solar system.
These massive objects were observed by amateur astronomers at the time, giving them the name Sun Cruisers. Dozens of Solar and Heliospheric Observatory (SOHO) images were captured showing massive objects in or around the Sun between the late 1990's and early 2000's.
The Cabal was initially excited by the appearance of these objects, believing that they were the return of their dark gods. But after no contact could be made with the spheres, they became increasingly anxious.
By the early 2000's, hundreds of spheres had entered the solar system, cloaking themselves from sight so as to avoid detection. The Cabal-run SSP was able to locate the spheres using advanced methods, but was unable to determine what they were doing and why they were here.
These spheres were so enormous and entered with such numbers that the SSP could easily have mistaken their presence as an invasionary force, and most likely did.
In the midst of this, the Cabal groups on Earth were working towards their NWO agenda, scheduled to go live in 2012. Part of the plan was to start World War III and stage a fake alien invasion using highly advanced space craft that, some say, even the lower level military factions were not aware of. The code name for this plan is Project Blue Beam.
Calm down, there could be one just like him / her / it but that's just a pretend one... example
Despite the Cabal's best efforts, they constantly encountered problems when attempting to finalize their dark NWO agenda. UFOs were apparently responsible for disabling nuclear weapons platforms, and failed attempt after failed attempt to start World War III was causing delays in their long-planned timeline.
Toward the end of 2012, thousands upon thousands of the spheres, some the size of Jupiter, continued to pour into the solar system. By this time, the SSP Alliance had already broken away and began their efforts to combat the Cabal.
The Alliance was apparently flying advanced spacecraft in front of International Space Station (ISS) camera feeds in an effort to force disclosure and alert the public.
At some point between 2013 and late 2014, the group of beings who work with the massive spheres made contact with the SSP Alliance. The SSP Alliance gave them the name Sphere Being Alliance. This group is made up of five extremely advanced non-material races, who claim to be 6th to 9th density beings.
Within the density system, the Earth is considered a 3rd density sphere, much more material than etheric in nature. The importance is that the Sphere Beings are billions of years ahead of the human race, and many of the extraterrestrial groups currently in the solar system, possessing technology so advanced it renders the most intimidating Cabal-run weaponry obsolete.
The Sphere Beings claim to be custodians of this part of the galaxy and have apparently attempted to contact humanity several times in the past, offering knowledge and wisdom. In each case, the teachings were distorted by the elite priesthoods of Earth at the time, which later evolved into the Cabal, Illuminati or secret Earth governments of today.
Artist depiction of a Blue Avian, Raw-Teir-Eir, one of the five Sphere Being Alliance races
The Sphere Beings say that due to their misguided attempts to assist humanity in the past, they are karmically tied to the evolutionary track of the Earth and the people that sojourn here.
It was their attempt to impart universal knowledge that ended up creating the dark occult mystery schools. But it was the people's compliance made possible by constant trauma that allowed slavery and tyranny to flourish.
The Sphere Beings, as the name would imply, are the group in control of the highly advanced large network of spheres that have permeated the solar system, for a very specific purpose.
These spheres are not a form of technology as we would conceive of it. According to Goode, they are actually enormous versions of one of the five Sphere Being Alliance races, the Blue Orb beings.
According to the Sphere Beings, and echoed by countless alternative science researchers, the Sun is about to go through a major energetic shift, due to incoming cosmic and galactic waves of energy as a result of our transit through the galaxy.
This shift will alter life within the solar system as we know it, and has been spoken of in countless myths and legends as the end of the Great Cycle, the Rapture, the Shift of the Ages, and so on. It has been more contemporaneously called the Ascension, a transition of life into a golden age.
David Wilcock is a researcher with over 20 years of study in to the fields of alternative science, amassing a great deal of empirical data to confirm this energetic shift he calls the Ascension.
According to Goode, the network of spheres are here to help dampen this impending energetic evolution of the solar system, which if left to follow its natural course, would be an incredible shock to the people of Earth, resulting in "end time madness" and a great loss of human life.
Apparently these evolutionary shifts take place as a natural part of cosmic evolution, but normally at this late stage, a civilization has taken the time to prepare by becoming more loving, harmonious and service to others—by transcending selfishness.
The collective consciousness of a planet determines the of polarity the shift, according to Goode and one of the Sphere Being Alliance race members, Raw-Teir-Eir. On a world filled with self-serving beings, the shift moves towards a dark NWO type planet, where the service-to-self path can be explored.
Conversely, on a world filled with altruistic unselfish beings, the shift moves toward a loving cooperative type planet - the Golden Age spoken of in myths and legend. But due to the influence of the Cabal, who planned on steering the shift into a darker manifestation, the people of Earth have not prepared enough to take full advantage of a positive transition.
In other words, the Cabal wanted to have a dark ascension, but were unsuccessful in their efforts; however, they were successful in slowing down the positive evolution of humanity. As a result, the Sphere Beings are delaying the energetic shift to give us the time to prepare, to change ourselves from within, and end the madness that has been created without.
As was stated earlier, the Sphere Beings are partially responsible for creating the Cabal, and are here to provide support for the positive transition.
The Sphere Beings are not here to rescue humanity, but provide the guidance and environmental supported needed for us to stand up and liberate ourselves.
In the process, all those who have not progressed enough along a positive track will gain the experiences needed to make the shift. That is to say, the people of Earth playing a direct role in their own liberation will simultaneously end Cabal rule while propelling us towards the so-called fourth density positive timeline spoken of in the Law of One material.
The Sphere Being Alliance contacted the SSP Alliance in an effort to provide guidance for their stated intention to free humanity. The SSP Alliance, despite their benevolent intentions, are not angelic beings, as stated by Goode. They are military minded former Cabal-run defectors and groups, with less then gracious methods.
Artists impression of recent events as described by Corey Goode
They believe they can "bomb their way out of a situation," as stated by Goode. As a result, the SSP Alliance, in its own right, has learning and growth to do just like humanity at large.
The Sphere Beings were initially working through Lt. Col. Gonzales, a member of the SSP Alliance, but after a major event toward the end of 2014, they called for Corey Goode by name. More on this later.
The Earth-based Alliances play a part in the partial disclosure and full disclosure agenda in several ways. Firstly, some of these groups have aligned themselves with the partial disclosure camp and others have gone to the opposite end of full disclosure.
As such, these groups represent one of the largest hurdles and are simultaneously crucial for bringing forward the data dumps mentioned earlier. Thus, one cannot overlook this aspect of the story.
According to Goode (and made evident by countless other spokesmen, whistleblowers, insiders and White Hats), a great many alliances have long had a desire to free the planet from the yoke of Cabal oppression and enslavement.
As one can imagine, the Cabal's methods of coercion, use of violence and intimidation have left a trail of destruction and grievance throughout history. In the process, maligned groups from all walks of life have been given a justifiable reason to seek out other groups that have the common goal of ending Cabal rule.
Some of the names mentioned should stand out as known figures in alternative media with their own stated narrative and plans for ending Cabal rule. And what should also be apparent is that some of these figures that claim mass arrests are coming, an end to the Federal Reserve System, release of free energy technology, and so on - have yet to deliver on their promises. As a result they have inadvertently caused much confusion and disillusionment within the awakening community.
Some of these groups have not been able to affect major change because of advanced time-lensing (looking into possible futures via remote viewing) and AI technology employed by the Cabal.
In this case, many plans and efforts by alliances to take actions were ultimately unsuccessful because the Cabal anticipated what was coming. And in other cases, groups disagree what the plan of action should be, and therefore, can't coordinate to effect meaningful change. Their lack of unity combined with advanced Cabal technology has crippled any plan from gaining traction.
As an side, it should be clear that the Cabal, through their greater coherence and unity, have been able to effect greater changes on Earth than all the awakening people and alliance groups combined. This may lead some to conclude that they have some kind of pre-destiny to rule the planet or that perhaps we are on a dark timeline.
However, I would argue that the primary cause for their success is co-creative coherence - individuals consenting to their plans either directly or indirectly - along with unity within their ranks. This would suggest that if the Earth-based Alliances and the awakening community can find it within themselves to work together, great change could be realized very quickly.
The Partial Disclosure Argument and Logic
Some of the aforementioned groups want a complete and total end of the paradigm of financial slavery, full disclosure and a release of hidden technology, whereas others want to have their 100 years of power and control over the planet.
For example, the Eastern financial powers, as controlled by the dynastic families of Asia, want to end the Western financial system, and install a more fair system. But ultimately the new system is still financial slavery. They want this because the West had their 100 years of the Federal Reserve System, and now they want their turn to be masters of humanity, according to Goode.
Goode also disclosed that the Cabal have spent years slowly infiltrating some of these Earth-based groups, and that many of their original intentions have become distorted. Many of the groups now calling for partial disclosure have been corrupted by these infiltrators. Even though the Cabal seems to be losing power and control at every turn, they still foolishly clamor for power; and ultimately this will be their undoing.
Developments in 2015
Now that critical aspects of the background story and key players have been revealed, we can proceed on with developments that lead to today and the partial disclosure agenda that is actively moving forward due-to the Earth-based Cabal-infiltrated alliances.
In December 2014, the Cabal attempted to destroy one of the spheres close to the Earth. The effort was captured on ISS camera feeds, which quickly stopped transmitting video after the event. According to Goode, the Cabal used one of their high tech particle beam weapons to fire at a sphere close to the Moon.
Here's an image of what was captured in the ISS feed:
Allegedly an ISS camera feed image showing one of the spheres being hit by a particle beam weapon
Apparently the red line is a particle beam discharge and object struck was a sphere glowing red-hot from the impact. According to NASA, the event was due to a facility attempting to create an artificial star.
Did ISS cam capture video of a UFO shooting a laser at Earth?
A video recorded from the International Space Station’s live video feed shows a strange red dot in space that seemingly shoots a laser beam towards Earth.
The video was captured and uploaded to YouTube by user Streetcap1 on December 5.
Although it is possible that the ISS camera captured an extraterrestrial UFO, there are other potential explanations for the strange light and the laser beam.
The video was reportedly recorded on December 5. On this date, the European Southern Observatory’s Very Large Telescope fired its laser into the sky to create an artificial star. This process is done periodically to fine-tune the observatory’s telescopes. (Source)
Goode was told that the Sphere Beings used an Aikido principle to reflect the aggressive energy of this attack back down to its place of origin. Apparently there were many high-level Cabal operatives at the facility, which was almost completely destroyed.
This was the first aggressive action taken by the Cabal against the Sphere Beings. What followed was to completely change the game for the Cabal.
Raising The Energy Barrier
According to Goode, shortly after the December 2014 attack, a massive energy barrier went up around the entire solar system and this prevents any group, human or otherwise, from leaving or entering. Communication was also heavily hindered by the raising of this barrier.
And apparently one of the Sphere Being Alliance races, the Blue Orb beings, are responsible for the barrier and the Spheres. Goode revealed during an episode of Cosmic Disclosure that the energetic barrier is itself one of these living Blue Orb beings, as well as the thousands of spheres within the solar system at this time.
As a result, the SSP factions were unable to continue their operations outside the solar system. In addition, there were dozens of groups that have been here for hundreds of thousands of years that were also trapped.
Finally, the Draco Alliance, the top of the Cabal pyramid of power was also unable to leave the solar system, and it just so happened that the bulk of this group's leadership was trapped here after the barrier was raised.
Apparently many of these groups were intending to vacate prior to the solar shift event, but are now unable to, further exacerbating an already precarious exopolitical situation.
As a result of the energy barrier going up, the SSP Alliance had even more defections coming over from Cabal-run groups. Some of these defectors brought actionable intelligence with them regarding production facilities on Mars and elsewhere in the solar system. Certain members of the SSP Alliance decided to take advantage of the situation by destroying two large production facilities, one on Mars and another undisclosed location.
During the Consciousness Life Expo, David Wilcock presented the following image from the Washington Post that he claims confirms that a large facility on Mars was destroyed.
These events occurred around February 17th, 2015. While Cabal-run facilities were destroyed, each location was populated by thousands of innocent laborers, who all lost their lives in the atrocities.
The Sphere Being Alliance, a highly moral and altruistic group, was not pleased by the events, and on February 27th 2015, shortly after these two tragedies, they decided to call on empath Corey Goode by name to represent the Sphere Being Alliance as a delegate to the SSP Alliance.
Corey Goode Requested by the Sphere Being Alliance
The SSP Alliance was already in some form of contact through their appointee Lt. Col. Gonzales and were not pleased by the Sphere Being Alliance's request for Goode.
Although Goode had a tour of duty in Solar Warden between 1987 and 2007 (being age regressed and returned back to the time he left) he had been out of the program for decades, and his former position in Solar Warden was low level. To the SSP Alliance Council, Goode was an outsider and they treated him as such.
Goode later appeared before the SSP Alliance Council where he met one of the members of Sphere Being Alliance races, the Blue Avian known as Raw-Teir-Eir. The being connected to Goode telepathically, and he began communicating a message of peace, forgiveness and personal healing to the SSP Alliance, who all but balked at the "hippy love" sentiment.
The SSP Alliance was under the impression that the Sphere Beings were going to reveal a grand plan to kick the Cabal's butt. Instead, they were scolded for the two recent atrocities against Cabal-run facilities and the collateral damage suffered as a result.
The White Royal Draco are an elite class of reptilians in the Draco Alliance. They have been cybernetically enhanced and require looshe or "fear food" generated by the Earth's population in order to survive, according to other insiders.
The Draco entered the solar system some 370,000 years ago in an effort to turn the Earth into a "fear food factory," as well as other undisclosed plans. The Cabal groups from antiquity have long worshiped these Draco as their gods; and by all accounts, the Draco used their human zealots as pawns in a cosmic game of domination and control.
The Draco also have an extra-dimensional overlord that is most likely a malevolent artificial intelligence - the same AI responsible for infecting countless human subjects and computer systems on Earth.
At some point after the energy barrier went up, a major meeting took place between the Draco Alliance and all their various Cabal underlings. The Draco claim to be the top of the Cabal pyramid of power on Earth, with various human and non-human agencies within their employ.
The Draco, being high-level Cabal figures, apparently held a meeting wherein they offered to betray all of their underlings to the SSP Alliance for safe passage out of the solar system. The other Cabal groups in attendance were completely taken aback by the offer, and a tremendous amount of infighting took place shortly after.
According to Goode, as revealed by Gonzales during the early part of 2016, the controlled implosion of the Western financial system was halted after an agreement was reached between some of the Earth-based Alliances, presumably those in the East. But despite this alleged development, the global economy, especially within Western nations, has continued to decline.
Early Talk of Partial or Limited Disclosure in July 2015
In July of 2015, a meeting took place between the human-Cabal groups and the SSP Alliance, with Goode in attendance. During this meeting, the first talk of a partial or limited disclosure plan was spoken of. Here is an excerpt from Goode's July 9th report:
"[The human elite] stated that they had been forced through generations of mind control and threats to do all of the things that they had done. They further stated that they would prefer to work with the Alliances in setting up a new financial system that was fair to all of humanity and to begin a controlled disclosure that would not expose certain crimes and incidents that would incriminate them in their lifetime.
They stated that they believed that this information would also contain too much negative details in a short time for the average person to deal with. They stated that because of people's religious beliefs and the paradigm that had been created by those currently in control that a sudden release of this information would lead to riots and suicides on a mass scale.
Taking all of that in consideration they proposed that a plan be agreed on that allowed the release of certain information and technologies while withholding the majority of information for a 50 year time period. [Bolding added.]
Gonzales and Goode were in attendance during this meeting and reported back to the SSP and Sphere Being Alliance.
Materially Disproving the Basis of Partial Disclosure
Let's pause in the narrative to review the important points of partial disclosure - as it was just presented by the Cabal during Goode's July 2015 meeting - and materially disprove each one.
The reason for doing this is to point out the flawed logic of the Cabal, to show that their reasoning is in error, and as such, that the partial disclosure proposal is not the best option - it's not even a good idea. This is important within a lawful capacity to demonstrate our competency as an awakening community.
In contract law (which is the basis of the legal system and treaties between groups), providing a superior argument is an essential part of rebutting presumptions that form the basis of implied consent, the very same consent issued by the people the Cabal rely on to further their agenda.
Instead of saying nothing, and agreeing to the logic of the partial disclosure timeline, we rebut each point to disprove any logical basis thereby invalidating the proposed agenda with precision.
In order for an agreement to be binding, the parties defined by it must have a meeting of the minds wherein any logical fallacies (inconsistencies with the truth) are discovered and addressed.
First, the Cabal groups said, they had been forced through generations of mind control and threats to do all of the things that they had done. Granted these poor souls have endured unspeakable hardship, but that is no justification to continue their harmful actions against others.
This is a statement attempting to divert culpability away from themselves, in that, they are not as responsible for their actions due to what happened to them. This statement is a reflection of victim consciousness, a state of disempowerment and trauma, requiring healing in order to transcend.
But the key point of the rebuttal is that one's own personal suffering is never a valid excuse to continue harming others. The Cabal was notified by many agents of the light that their machinations are wrong, against universal law, and immoral no matter how they look at it. When one is notified of wrongdoing and chooses to continue, they prove their incompetence and dishonor.
In law, this forms a basis for defensive actions to be taken by an honorable party. So on this score, their basis for continuing harmful actions in the form of a partial disclosure plan is unfounded and unsupported by the truth.
They said that they want to work with the Alliances in setting up a new financial system that [is] fair to all of humanity. What the "new financial system" actually ends up being is crucial; just because it's "fair to all" doesn't mean it's anymore free, honorable, or abundant for the people.
For example, a financial system based on everyone being forced to work as slaves is fair to all because everyone receives the same treatment, hence it is fair. But slavery is still slavery, and as the old saying goes, the devil is in the details. So just because they said they want a more fair system doesn't mean that we should just blindly accept it.
In order for this offer to be valid within an contractual capacity, they must define what this new system is with specificity, which they have not done. Therefore, this point lacks substance and as such cannot be taken seriously as a basis to justify partial disclosure. If the full breadth of this fairer system was outlined then we could discern if it is truly fair. Until then, it remains an empty promise.
And as an aside, externalized financial systems like the one we use today are very risky, especially when the population that uses it is not fully educated. I would argue, an ideal financial system is one based on no externalized representations of value at all, a moneyless society. For more on this, see the below linked articles.
They said they wanted to begin a controlled disclosure that would not expose certain crimes and incidents that would incriminate them in their life time. Clearly this is an effort to avoid the people's justice, to avoid being held responsible for their actions.
Now I am not advocating a French-Revolution style mass revenge of the Cabal, but like all beings of consciousness, honoring one's creations and deeds, is essential to growth and healing.
Ultimately, taking responsibility for one's actions is healing for the individual as well as those who have been harmed because it provides a way for each party to understand the whole truth so as to restore trust - negotiate a fair and equitable resolution.
On this score, avoiding justice for 50 years just prevents the healing and reconciliation that we all need to move forward.
Without all the facts, an individual can't motivate themselves to grow and change for the better. So on this basis, the proposal of delaying the truth and reconciliation tribunal is unacceptable, as it would prevent the healing everyone needs.
Moving on, they said they believed that this information would also contain too much negative details in a short time for the average person to deal with. Yes the average person is going to have a major adjustment period, but I doubt that it "would lead to riots and suicides on a mass scale."
After the World Trade Center attacks of September 11th, 2001, instead of people going crazy because of the horrors of what happened, it brought them together in a big way. New York is a city infamous for the callous indifference of the population, yet even when these hardened city dwellers were faced with a chance to unite in love and kindness, the vast majority did so.
Yes, because of people's religious beliefs and the paradigm that had been created by those currently in control, a change will be very difficult, but this is why the whole truth is needed.
Only when we make contact with the whole truth can we see the errors of the past, in this case, the errors of religious beliefs that are usually designed to make someone feel disempowered. So again, the whole truth is the only viable option. We can't change into a free and prosperous society without it, and as such, this point has no basis in truth.
Finally, they proposed that a plan be agreed on that allowed the release of certain information and technologies while withholding the majority of information for a 50-year time period. After providing their supportive logic, they state their proposal for the partial disclosure timeline.
But this proposal does not provide adequate resolution to the problems at hand. No measure of true healing, restoration of honor, or reconciliation of past crimes can take place under this plan. In other words, it is a token gesture, indicating the Cabal is not ready to truly change their ways.
From a contractual perspective, the Cabal have already positioned themselves as custodians of humanity and the planet, this agreement is already in place (e.g. the Papal Bull Unam Sanctum and the Cestui Que Vie Trusts) and implied consent was issued by the people long ago.
But part of this agreement required that the powers that be act as honorable custodians, which they have clearly failed to do. As a result, the people of Earth have a long standing right under this agreement to redress of grievance, or an opportunity to tell the Cabal they have failed to live up to their end of the bargain.
If the Cabal want to restore the trust and honor the contract, they must explicitly acknowledge all of our grievances and provide remedy to each harmed person - this is what a truth and reconciliation tribunal is designed to accomplish. And they must cease any and all actions that cause further dishonor of the agreement.
But they have done none of these things, and only paid lip service to ending their dishonorable actions that are in breach of contract and trust.
During the delay period put forth in the partial disclosure proposal, the Cabal intends on continuing their transhumanist NWO agenda, enslaving the people, and trying to start wars to depopulate the planet.
The Cabal have proven themselves to be untrustworthy, and as such, they are in dishonor insofar as the trust relationship to the people is concerned. Within universal law, when rulers dishonor the public trust, the people are empowered to overthrow them.
Considering the Cabal have not even tried to change their ways, despite saying they would, the people have prima facie evidence to move forward with a peoples uprising for an end of Cabal rule. And the universe itself will support us in this supreme effort.
Although the Cabal imply that they were considering working with the Alliances for disclosure and global change, they seem to have already been moving forward with partial disclosure well before this meeting took place. Here are some examples, in addition to the ones provided at the beginning of this article.
David Wilcock has also been covering an extensive amount of soft disclosure on his website divinecosmos.com.
So while the Cabal suggests that they have had a change of heart, presumably due-to exopolitical changes resulting from the energy barrier, it seems they haven't changed their agenda of domination and control.
And in the midst of these alleged negotiations for peace, the Cabal have continued their machinations against the people, such as, false flag attacks, financial warfare, ceaseless environmental destruction, continued poisoning of food and water, and so on.
Again, if an agreement is to be honorable and binding, made in good faith and based on a demonstration of trust, the Cabal have failed to meet their end of the bargain. Are they honoring their word? Are they making a good faith attempt to stop what they have been forced to do through generations of mind control and threats? No they haven't.
2015 saw more false flag attacks then any other year on record, all in an effort to start more conflict and trigger World War III. The financial system has also seen more manipulation than possibly any other time in history. These are not the actions of a group seeking to earn trust and cooperate to effect change.
More Talk of Partial Disclosure in October 2015
For several months there wasn't much talk of any further developments related to negotiations for disclosure. But as was mentioned earlier, draconian operations of the Cabal continued to make life difficult for the people of Earth, a lack of good faith and a demonstration of dishonor.
In October of 2015, Goode reported that the secret Earth government and their syndicates were still trying to realize armageddon via a biblical prophesy regarding the destruction of Damascus. He also said that some of the Earth-based alliances, the Asian groups, are pushing for their 100 years of financial power, by forcing an implosion of the Western controlled financial system.
Here's an excerpt from Goode's October 2015 report:
"I was told several things a few weeks ago (Intel that most write off as "fear porn") about the dynamics occurring on the planet which include the (“controlled implosion”) demise of the western controlled financial system, the fall of the leaders of certain syndicates as well as infiltration by other syndicates into various Earth Alliance Groups to push for an agreement that would allow the east to have their one hundred years of financial rule. [Bolding added.]
From the earlier proposal in July of 2015, the tone changed somewhat. The point of interest in Goode's account is that infighting and positioning is taking place on the world stage.
Dozens of cabal groups (secret government syndicates) as well as Earth-based alliances are all clamoring to have their version of a new world come to fruition; and some of these visions are not benevolent.
Goode also says the Cabal have infiltrated some of these Earth-based alliances and is actively manipulating them to accept the partial disclosure agenda, most-likely using the rationale that we disproved above.
More statements from Goode's October 2015 report:
" If this heavily pushed [partial disclosure] plan were to win out over the SSP Alliance Full Disclosure Event and Data Dump plan, we would start off with a limited disclosure that would slowly unfold into full disclosure and transition the world into new technologies and social programs that would make the transition into a “Star Trek” type society more manageable and less of a shock to society.
There is talk of limited trials of certain syndicate leaders that are the most well-known while others may receive a pass of sorts.
This is all still under fairly fluid of course but with the infiltrations of some ground-based alliance groups, a general anxiety of completely giving up a monetary system and beginning a new system of living on top of the disturbing information contained in the databases that would be “dumped”, this plan seems to be gaining more and more popularity in “think tanks” on both sides.
This is not at all how the SSP Alliance Council wants to see things unfold but cooperation of the ground alliance (Combining essential resources and infrastructure) is essential in the SSP Alliance Councils plan coming into fruition.
This has been cause of consternation between Earth Alliance groups as well as quite a lot of anger and frustration within the SSP Alliance Groups. The uncomfortable fact is that there are compromised people in both alliances and it is causing trust and fragmentation issues throughout. Infiltrating organizations, creating conflicting agendas and ideology between its members is something these syndicates seem to do almost effortlessly."
Essentially, Goode is reporting on the negotiations between Earth-based groups in their formation of the partial disclosure plan. These developments were still fluid at the time. The Cabal groups seemed to spend the time they had doing what they do best, manipulating and intimidating others into complying with their plans, by any means necessary. Possibly these Earth-based groups had a more benevolent agenda at one time.
And as frustrating as this is for the SSP Alliance, they cannot move forward with Full Disclosure independent of alliance groups on the surface.
For even if the data dumps occurred tomorrow, the propaganda machines of every major nation could easily debunk anything that managed to make it into the public arena.
Solidification of the Partial Disclosure Agenda in 2016
On January 14th, 2016 Goode released an update in regard to on going negotiations taking place between the Cabal or secret Earth government syndicates and Earth-based alliance groups.
Here is an excerpt from the report:
"The SSP Alliance meetings I attended were mostly briefings on the negotiations between the Earth Alliance Groups and the Secret Earth Governments and their Syndicates. I saw nearly half a dozen plans put forth that ranged from a NWO 2.0 with a little bit of disclosure to plans for an overt military conflict between these groups.
With the most negative forces threatening to detonate 1 to 3 super volcanoes located under the oceans. If memory serves correctly there is one large 1 in the Atlantic Ocean and 2 in the Pacific Oceans located in both hemispheres. The majority of these Secret Earth Government Syndicates however are coming to the table with the Earth Alliance to negotiate a bloodless financial coup and a limited yet slowly unfolding disclosure narrative.
The controlled collapse of Western Economics is only one front in what will be called a "different kind of Stealth World War" by History. This "world War" (that is occurring between the Secret Earth Syndicates and the various Earth Alliance Groups is being fought through proxy armies, massive hacks/electronic attacks and attacks against financial/government/corporate entities that make up the opposition.
The SSP Alliance and the Sphere Being Alliance has made it clear that we as a collective consciousness are choosing a path or future timeline. We are at a critical juncture to where our future could be one of a NWO 2.0 with some debt forgiveness, a bit of free currency and a new Babylonian Money Magic Slave System OR we have a full disclosure event during this time of social catalyst. [Bolding added.]
From this report we can infer that the Secret Earth Syndicates and the various Earth Alliance Groups are fighting against financial / government / corporate entities that make up the opposition.
This means that some of the Earth-based alliances have joined the secret Earth syndicates and their partial disclosure agenda. Furthermore, these groups are actively attacking the opposition or any group that wants full disclosure.
Based on this report, the stealth World War is focused on forcing other groups to comply with partial disclosure.
Three days after Goode released this update, the Boeing advertisement, You just wait, debuted on television. The overtones of this ad are congruent with the limited disclosure agenda, as will be detailed shortly.
Developments of 2016
In the midst of all this, several mainstream media outlets covered UFO whistleblower stories.
Arguably one of the most obvious examples of the partial disclosure agenda is season 10 of The X-files, which came back after a decade long hiatus.
The fact that the show came out right as the partial disclosure agenda was being solidified is probably no coincidence considering that it is one of the most overt presentations of secret government activity in television history.
On February 14th, 2016, Goode reported that there were developments occurring behind the scenes between the Cabal and Earth-based alliances. He cited a meeting between Henry Kissinger and Vladimir Putin as evidence, and made light of some other developments.
Here is an excerpt from that mid February 2016 update:
"[The powers that] TPT (were) are indeed showing signs of capitulation in this great struggle and negotiation between their syndicates and various Earth Based Alliance groups. Some are feigning compliance while working on dirty tricks and false flags in the background. They do not realize it will only make their situation worse.
There are many meetings between people/groups that many may scratch their heads over and wonder why the meeting is occurring. There is much that hasn't been reported recently about the quiet movement of troops to various cities in the U.S. driving in unmarked caravans and wearing plain clothes.
One tries not to get their hopes up too much but things are looking to be coming to an end for one group and a beginning for another group (their 100 years).
All the signs are there and the movement that is now occurring in the public eye is enough to cause knee jerk reaction stories and indeed they make you wonder.
Kissinger was not meeting Putin to discuss global finances or their old "friendship" in his recent flight to Moscow. IMHO you could see the shame and confusion on his face. [Bolding added.]
This excerpt implies that cohesion of various Earth-based groups towards the partial disclosure plan has taken place, things are coming to an end for one group and beginning for another (their 100 years of power). On February 16th, 2016, Goode posted an update stating he was warned to back off of the full disclosure narrative as it is 'irresponsible to the public'.
This was three days prior to Goode's scheduled appearance at the Consciousness Life Expo event. He and David Wilcock intended to present material at their Friday night talk, which would "blow the lid off of" the partial disclosure agenda.
During that talk, they did present a huge volume of full disclosure related information, data that if it were made public would make partial disclosure impossible.
This suggests that the Cabal and Earth-based alliance groups had enough agreement on the partial disclosure agenda to feel threatened by what Goode is revealing to the public. This in and of itself is a major indication that the agenda has been agreed to at some level, and is actively moving forward. And it also indicates that a grassroots effort is a clear and present danger to the partial disclosure agenda, a point we must not forget.
100 Year Partial Disclosure Boeing Ad "You just wait"
And now, without further ado, here is the analysis of the Boeing Ad.
Watch the short ad yourself to see what you can glean. Now that the background story has been presented, the theme of partial disclosure should hopefully be quite obvious.
Consider that the Cabal are masters of subliminal influencing and subconscious programming. From a psychological point of view, any information we are exposed to but don't not consciously acknowledge and understand, affects our mental processes, our desires, insights, and intuitions. This is generally referred to as Subtle Influence.
The lens through which we perceive the world is affected by the subconscious mind, influencing what we see and the meanings generated therefrom. But due to the unique perspective and experience of each person, the end result of subtle influencing is not always the same.
However, in the main, these effects act on populations in a bell curve capacity, with the majority falling in line with the desired outcome of the suggestion - if the proper pre-existing conditioning is present within an individual.
Social engineering or propaganda spread liberally throughout society through the media ensures that the masses are well conditioned to receive updates on programing with ease.
Debunkers of subliminal or supraliminal influence and predictive programming assume that if it were possible to manipulate someone's consciousness in this way, everyone should have the same reaction but this is not how the science works.
Pre-existing triggers, usually provided by indoctrination of cultural norms, provides the foundation for subliminal conditioning. This is why some advertisements work very well on some demographics whereas others have no effect.
For example, ads targeting women won't work on men because the cultural cues are different. In another example, sexual repression programming in society enables advertising with sexually suggestive imagery to stimulate these suppressed regions, usually invoking a desire for whatever product it is associated with, as we'll see in a moment.
The first program installed into a person's consciousness is the thought-form of self doubt and fear. Fear of life itself is programmed in via the use of reinforcement parenting methods, according to Joseph Chilton Pearce, author of Magical Child.
He says positive or negative reinforcement trains our children to fear life because at a young age they can't understand these techniques the way adults do, taking them very personally.
The child understand positive reinforcement as unconditional, and when there is no reinforcement it is subconsciously understood as lack of love, which slowly manifests as an abandonment complex.
Negative reinforcement has a similar and more obvious effect of making a child feel abandoned as a subtle message. Pearce says that the key is to teach our children how to explore and play, something they do naturally, with techniques that help them avoid the pitfalls of life.
Once the program of fear has been installed, it blossoms in to a host of psychological triggers that can be manipulated by subtle influence. In advertising, the feeling of inadequacy or dissatisfaction with oneself and the world can be associated with all manner of things to invoke a desire for a product in the target.
This is used to get us to buy things we think we need to feel satisfied. Subconsciously, we may not feel like we're attractive enough, smart enough, good enough for our friends and loved ones, and so on, and once this self-loathing belief has been firmly implanted, we can be baited into all sorts of things if the right buttons are pushed.
When pressured into a state of wanting or needing, a kind of mild fight or flight response occurs, taking over such that we seek or desire things to restore equanimity - "products and services" pushed by the Cabal.
Here's a fairly obvious example of a sexually targeted image, designed to stimulate the subconscious sexual programming of the observer. Interestingly enough, this candy is targeting children, which via their exposure to various forms of media, receive their sexual repression training early on in life.
In this example, the word "SEX" is made by a red skittle placed next to the word "Explosion." Notice how the first two letters of explosion are capitalized, emphasizing the supraliminal association that this product has with sex. In other words, the overt message would read something like this:
"If you feel sexually repressed and inadequate, like you just aren't getting enough good sex in your life. Look no further! Skittles can satisfy all your sexual needs."
One reason why subtle influencing works is because the mind is a storehouse of knowledge and experiences recorded as a mesh of information that psychologists call a Semantic Network.
In each moment of experience, the mind records everything in our perception as embedded concepts or ideas, along with our emotional state. We could call this a mind tree.
An object within the field of our perception is charged with meaning from past experience, present emotional states, and intuitive insights. Simply observing something subconsciously triggers recollections that associate and activate thought-forms at a subconscious level that influence our point of view and resulting moment to moment impressions.
For example, to a non-smoker, seeing an ashtray on a dining room table can invoke feelings of disgust and unpleasantness. This reaction, most would agree, affects our abilities after the fact, as a feeling of disgust often does. But these are conscious triggers, wherein we can recognize or trace back how our state of being was altered via an object in our perception.
Subtle processes work in the same way, except we don't recognize the triggering stimulus, yet the effect on our state of being is just as strong. Via subliminal (subconscious) or supraliminal (conscious) triggers, thought-forms within the unconscious can be activated that affects perception, altering our desires and methods of achieving them.
Here is a short video to emphasize the mechanics we're discussing here. The terms used by the presenter are slightly different than my own, but the conceptual framework is essentially the same.
The ability to manipulate consciousness by subtle means is well established, but just how powerfully can this work? Is it just a mild influence or can we actually be made to do specific things?
The short answer is both. The mind itself is a meaning generating machine, its constantly receiving influences from the environment and altering our consciousness as a result. So on the question of are we being influenced, the answer is most definitely yes. Now the question is, can these influences be focused such that a person's behavior can be precisely controlled?
For many reading this article, who are aware of the insidious nature of the Cabal, the answer is obvious, but in the interest of objectivity, let's assume it is not.
The following short video demonstrates, first that it is possible to alter someone's behavior by subtly influencing them in a very precise way. In order to do this, knowledge of a person's mental syntax or structure in consciousness as it is relates to the world is required. Since everyone has different life experiences, the language through which we conceptualize our reality is different.
Everyone possesses a different Semantic Network, to use the psychology term mentioned above, and as such, the larger the target population the more difficult it is to guarantee specific results.
And here is another example proving that one can produce precise behavioral results in another if the proper process is used to steer consciousness are harnessed.
At this point, it should be fairly clear that its not only possible to subtly influence a person's mind, its actively taking place in our world today. As far as how to protect oneself from subtle influencing, consider that the conscious mind's power to override suggestion can only take place if we have gained awareness.
These softer forms of mind control can only work on an individual that has not developed mental discipline to discern influence from genuine personal desire. But the good news is whether or not a desire came from a suggestion or not doesn't really matter insofar as determining if it is for our highest and best good or if it is moral and honors the rights of others.
In short, we can evaluate the ethical and idealistic factors involved in making a choice regardless of whether it came from a subtle suggestion or not, and in this way, the conscious mind - where our free will has the most power - can override even the most well crafted influencing methods.
The entire advertisement industry is based around the psychological effect of subtle influencing, with the propaganda machine of the Cabal employing suggestions at all levels of society to entice the masses into following their plans. We need only look out into the world to see the evidence and success of this.
The Suggestion: You Just Wait
Given these methods, the first thing to notice is the title, You just wait. This is an overarching command or suggestion for the whole video. Subtle suggestion works by presenting a series of ideas, concepts or information and then applying a conceptual label or bias over it. In this case, the suggestion is that all the things presented in the video youhave to wait for.
For the unawakened masses, they will receive the suggestion or programing fully, due to their lack of conscious recognition of the items presented.
When they see images of a futuristic better world of free energy, space age technology and so on, the preconditioned bias in their minds will be to reject the whole idea because they have been programmed to just wait. But as was said earlier, not everyone will have this reaction, it only works on a very specific subset of the population.
There are other layers of conditioning from society influencing the outcome due to the mind's holistic and additive nature. This is why social engineers use the same general framework in all forms of subtle conditioning so that conflicts don't arise.
One of these ubiquitous programs is the use of science fiction and the presentation of valid scientific concepts in a fantastic way that conditions the mind to label what is presented as fiction.
If we see someone in a movie using telepathy and psychic powers, we might subconsciously assume such things aren't real because they were presented in an unreal context - a fictional work. But when we have a conscious set of knowledge that overrides this subconscious program, we'll draw a different conclusion.
Subtle suggestion techniques work by presenting a series of triggers or prepackaged ideas so as to create a contextual framework for the suggestion. This is done by introducing images or lines of dialog that invoke certain ideas within the minds of the audience, which are then woven together into a narrative.
Like telling a story, one needs to present the setting or context first. Then after the proper ideas have been invoked in the viewer's mind, the whole presentation is enshrouded or encased under the umbrella of a suggestion or command.
Here is an advertisement from Lexus as an example.
The ad starts by showing a beautiful woman standing in front of the Arch de Triumph in Paris, the suggestion is: successful men want this woman. Then it goes on to show interlaced shots of the woman walking and the man driving the fancy new car; the guy that every man watching should identify with.
Then the man parks the car in front of the modern version of the Arch, the woman walks into the shot, and the man embraces her in a passionate kiss. The whole time this is happening, the dialog is making a comparison between the old and the new, suggesting that if you want to "stand out," if you want the girl, then you have to redefine sophistication, you have to redefine yourself in the way we are telling you.
Then the command or suggestion comes in at the end, this is the pursuit of perfection; or more clearly stated: a Lexus is the pursuit of perfection. In other words, if you want the girl, you need to redefine yourself by buying a Lexus.
This is classic subtle programming. I don't know the precise psychological term to describe it, but I would liken it to the inadequate, dissatisfied, self loathing technique mentioned above; whereby, we're conditioned to believe we aren't good enough, and we need the product being sold to feel whole again.
Now let's go over the transcript and imagery of the Boeing advertisement line by line.
Note: Before doing so, it should be understood that there are no black and white meanings or inferences to make when analyzing subtleties in advertisements. All interpretations are valid in the observers eye, yet the devices employed, as was stated earlier, tend to produce a bell curve effect wherein the majority of responses in a given population fall within a predetermined set.
"Welcome to the World of 2116"
1. Welcome to the world of 2116 – With this first line of dialog, the idea of a high tech future world is invoked in the minds of the audience, with a specific date associated to it of 2116.This brighter future concept is further reinforced by the high tech city skyline.
A man and what could be his daughter are marveling at the world they live in. Although it's hard to make out, they are both smiling, suggesting to the audience that they are happy and content, which most people can empathize with. When we see that other people are happy, we want to know why, because we want to be happy too, so we'll draw our attention to what they are looking at, the world of 2116. This device triggers curiosity with a bias of positivity.
This also subtly creates the pretext of dissatisfaction within the observer, because if we are drawn in by the offer to empathize with happy people, we are unconsciously telling ourselves we're not happy.
This foundation of dissatisfaction created by recognizing the satisfaction of others is a commonly used technique in the advertising industry. These techniques are so subtle most people never notice them.
The suggestion or pre-packaged idea in this section is a brighter future everyone can enjoy with those closest to them. This is a technique for enticing the audience to buy into the vision being presented; it is the bait, the carrot on a stick.
This draws the focus of the audience into the world being created by the images and dialog in the ad. The brighter future theme is the overt message everyone consciously recognizes and will be later associated with the command you just wait.
The majority of the conceptual invocation of the brighter future took place within the first few seconds of the ad, the remaining portions of the video reinforce the foundation laid down by this first scene.
"You Can Fly Across Town in Minutes"
2. You can fly across town in minutes – In this section, the general idea of a high tech brighter future is expanded. The implied inference presented in the first scene is bolstered and reinforced by the statement we can fly across town in minutes.
This notion of faster travel or commuting times is enticing to most people in the modern world who feel that precious free time is slipping through their fingers.
This scene triggers the pre-existing belief that life is too short and we need to do everything we can to get more time. This adds a level of excitement for the audience, who was already interested in a brighter future, but now has something more specific to look forward to. The scene is meant to "pull the heart strings" of the people, to sell them something tangible they consciously want.
And the view from that altitude of space would be quite breathtaking, adding even more mystique to the offer.
Just as this image is transitioning, the next line of dialog begins.
"Or Across the Globe in Under an Hour"
3. Or across the globe in under an hour – This is another section reinforcing the brighter future concept. Most people would love the idea of traveling to different parts of the globe in a short period of time.
The image of serenely content people gazing out of the cabin window adds another layer of empathetic enticement. It's almost as if the people in this scene are blissed out or on some kind of sedative.
Notice the red seat backs. Red is a subtle command color used to compel someone into action. The act being suggested by this scene is to enter into a trancelike state of wonder and amazement, to accept the suggestion to just wait. "Whole Communities Are Living on Mars"
4. Whole communities are living on Mars– The same technique of enhancing the brighter future theme is further refined in this scene, but in a personal way. In this case, there are no happy people, there are no smiling faces. Instead, we see the backside of a man quickly pointing out a marvel to his friend on the right, which invokes curiosity in the minds of the audience.
This is a conditioning device that stimulates interest and desire, to get us to sit up in our chairs and focus our attention on what they are pointing to. But the fact we can't see clearly ensures a vacuum of understanding is created, which naturally triggers an observers imagination into action.
In response to not knowing what these two are marveling at the subconscious mind generates positive images we personally are interested in, a kind of self fulfilled feedback effect of enticement. We imagine what we would be excited seeing and then subconsciously project that feeling onto the imagined world presented on the screen.
The end result is an increased excitement level in what is being presented in a personally tailored way. By this I mean, what we imagine they are looking at is reflective of what we think is exciting to us as individuals. This has the effect of drawing us into the imagined world via associating unconscious desires onto the images.
Movie teasers, as opposed to previews, employ the same methodology by showing very little but faint glimpses of a film, which causes the viewer to fill in the gaps with what they want to see, and therefore, increasing interest.
Consider that in a crowd, most people want to fit in, so if there is something captivating the group that we can't see, we'll want to know what they are focused on. This introduces a Group Think suggestion of going along with the pack or wanting to do what everyone else is doing. A secondary suggestion in addition to the personal investment device discussed earlier.
Furthermore, this is also the first scene showing actual Mars bases or communities, an obfuscation technique of "hiding the truth in plain sight."
As was outlined above, the secret space programs have had advanced bases on Mars, the Moon and elsewhere for decades. By showing us this image of Mars colonies, under the overarching suggestion of You just wait, we are being told that the partial disclosure agenda will not be revealing the existence of real Mars bases; we have to wait for that.
"And Solar Satellites Provide Earth with Unlimited Clean Power"
5. And solar satellites provide Earth with unlimited clean power – In a scene that looks like a classroom setting on Mars, the dialog states: And solar satellites provide Earth with unlimited clean power.
On the surface, this entices the audience to conceive of an environmentally responsible future, free of energy production that pollutes the planet, and who wouldn't want that?. But I think there is much more going on in this scene.
The phrase unlimited clean power is a subtle reference to free energy or over unity production methods that produce unlimited energy; but is this energy provided to the people in a free way?
I don't think it is in this case.
Immediately afterward, an image of high tech satellites are shown hovering above the Earth.
The type of clean power being refer to here is probably not decentralized "free energy" for the people. The suggestion is that a centralized power company or agency may still be at work, which is a euphemism for a Cabal-controlled energy industry, a central pillar in their matrix of control.
The systems used to produce this energy maybe free, as in over unity production methods, but it isn't free to the people, who still need to earn-a-livingto receive it.
But why depict the classroom on Mars?
Earlier, the teacher was showing her Martian students how the Earth pulls energy from the Sun. While the dialog talks of solar satellites, the imagery associated with it implies that the Earth is drawing energy and resources from Mars:
And solar satellites provide Earth with unlimited clean power. Ambiguity in relation to where these solar satellites draw their energy translates as a suggestion to the subconscious mind.
I think the inference here is that in this future version of Earth, the Martian colonies are still going to be serving the Cabal as production facilities; like the British colonies of the past were forced to serve the Crown.
Also, remember that according to Goode, these facilities on Mars are essentially slave plantations wherein the corporate interests of the ICC, home-based on Earth, can exploit the resources of the solar system. I think the suggestion here is that the disclosure of these sites to the public won't happen until 2116, and even then, they may still be glorified slave plantations.
"In Less Than a Century, Boeing Took the World from Sea Planes, to Space Planes."
6: In less than a century, Boeing took the world from sea planes, to space planes – In this scene the reinforcement of the brighter future idea continues by invoking societal propaganda of technological progress.
The modern worldview, as promulgated by the media, educational institutions, and science is that of the glory and splendor of our technological progress. It is the belief that human history is a slow and steady progression of advancement; an assumption that peoples of the past were more primitive than the people of the present, and that technology is what fueled this progress.
One alternative researcher termed this notion the belief in the Church of Progress. This modern day belief of endless technological progress is a pretext for the transhumanist agenda.
This is the idea that the future is one where man merges with machine in an effort to correct evolutionary errors in the human organism.
The partial disclosure timeline would allow the Cabal to develop a transhumanist society, wherein human beings are increasingly dependent on, and enslaved by, technology.
Goode's statement and Salla's book was released prior to the Boeing advertisements debut.
"Across the Universe and Beyond"
7: Across the universe and beyond– This is when the video transitions back to the young girl with her father. At this point, the many layers of subtle programming are reinforced again before the big reveal of the overarching suggestion.
Reading the preceding line of dialog in succession with this line suggest that Boeing developed technology in the past 100 years to take humanity from, sea planes to space planes, across the universe and beyond
"In less than a century, Boeing took the world from sea planes, to space planes; across the universe and beyond.
Of course this perfectly matches what many SSP whistleblowers have stated, that humanity possesses technology capable of "taking ET home." This glaring admission in the advertisement will be placed under the overarching subtle suggestion of You just wait, meaning disclosure of these interstellar technologies will not come until 2116.
"And if You Thought that was Amazing..."
8: And if you thought that was amazing... – The same general imagery is presented for this section, again reinforcing the splendor of a brighter technological future, but with a subtle change.
Notice that the father character is pointing toward the Moon, while the narration reads "and if you thought that was amazing..." This is the same invocation of desire or curiosity technique used above in the Martian communities scene. It is used to fan the flames of interest, to create a fervor of excitement and anticipation in the minds of the audience, all in preparation for the final overarching suggestion or command.
The father is not just pointing to the Moon, but pointing to everything else in the scene as a final attempt to get us to agree just how amazing this world is.
"You Just Wait"
9. You just wait - As they say in the film industry, this is the "money shot." This scene is where all the previous ground work culminates in a completed thought form, the suggestion or command to just wait.
They finally reveal the face of the young girl from the beginning. Notice the same calm trancelike wonder and amazement from the earlier scenes. This girl represents the inner child of the audience, that part of us that seeks novelty and the fantastic.
The audience will take all the previous suggestions of enticement and solidify them into their consciousness, by identifying with the little girl.
The command is that we must wait for all the things presented in the advertisement; we must wait till 2116; we must wait 100 years.
Seeding the Collective Consciousness of Humanity
To me, it seems obvious that the Boeing advertisement is trying to get people to believe in partial disclosure. And there's a big reason why.
Belief collapses possibilities, it collapses timelines because we usually can't imagine something beyond the limits of what is believed to be true. This is why observing a double slit experiment collapses waves into a particles.
If you believe the world is flat, anything to do with a spherical Earth sounds like disinformation. If you believe that there are no cures for cancer, you won't bother looking for them, even though they exist. If you believe you are unattractive and undesirable, you won't pursue relationships with others.
Using these very simple examples, the power of belief should be clearly recognized. Beliefs steer our consciousness toward a particular outcome, along a timeline or track.
Now belief in and of itself won't move mountains, but it will change how we see the world, and as a result what we choose to do in life. Beliefs provide a channel or pathway for our creative energy to express itself; what we think is possible determines what we will try to do.
At this point, let's go back and review what Raw-Teir-Eir said to Goode after his meeting from July of 2015.
"I had a short communication with “Tear-Eir” where, as usual, I began to report what happened and he interrupted me by raising his hand. He then communicated that much of what we call "Full Disclosure" is not in any one group's hands. As more of this info is reported by "US" that the more it awakens people and enters their mass consciousness.
That the awakening population and their mass consciousness/co-creative abilities will determine when or how soon some of these events occur. He further communicated that we should keep up what we are doing and keep the information flowing at a high rate through trusted sources.
As this information spreads among the awakened and awakening the quicker we will cause the timeline of disclosure to happen with the power of the mass consciousness that we still do not fully understand. [Bolding added.]
What Tear-Eir is telling Goode is that the collective consciousness of humanity is the deciding factor for what shapes the future: whether we have full or partial disclosure. The Cabal know this all to well and use the methods to steer consciousness in their favor.
When people see this advertisement and get excited about what is presented, they unconsciously choose to accept it; they believe in the imaginary world created.
When we desire something it is an indication the image of it is firmly placed within the mind, for we can't desire what we can't imagine. The advertisement is a tool to get us to believe in the partial disclosure timeline, and as such, use our collective consciousness to help manifest it.
This is proof of concept for what Raw-Teir-Eir told Goode after the July meeting. We now have a tangible proof of concept for steering collective consciousness to contemplate. This is a central point that must be understood properly in order to realize what we need to do next.
The Energetic Shift Could Be Delayed
On Saturday night of the Consciousness Life Expo talk, Wilcock released a critical piece of information supplied by Goode.
Apparently the Sphere Beings told the SSP Alliance that if a grassroots full disclosure effort from within the awakening community was not successful in steering the collective consciousness of humanity, the Sphere Beings would delay the solar shift for an age. This is not their choice, they must honor humanity's free will if it chooses to delay.
While many were surprised and shocked to hear this, it actually matches what the Sphere Beings have said from the beginning, as we just detailed.
To be clear, the Sphere Beings are not enforcing a partial disclosure plan, they are simply stating the fact that the collective consciousness of humanity is in charge of what happens next, not the Sphere Beings, the SSP Alliance, the Cabal or the Earth-based alliances.
And while this might sound like a cop-out by the Sphere Beings, it is consistent with their message and reinforces the idea that our destiny is truly in our hands.
Would we really want it any other way?
Wilcock's Description of Partial Disclosure
In an article by David Wilcock, he described what partial disclosure might look like.
I want to present this information so that those in the awakening community—hopefully those who see the value of a grass-root disclosure effort—will be empowered to point this out to their fellows. When you recognize the magicians trick, you are now empowered to tell others so they won't be deceived.
The Cabal groups are furious with Corey and me for interfering with this "partial disclosure" timeline. They would kill us if they could get it authorized.
They are already grooming whistleblowers who will come forward as the heroic cosmic astronauts of a new age.
Imagine the public's surprise when they are shown new ships, told these are the UFOs everyone has been seeing, and watch films of them traveling through the solar system.
Imagine the surprise of having them de-cloak in our skies and take certain selected witnesses from earth onboard to see it and film it for themselves.
Imagine the surprise of finally knowing, on a collective level, that we are not alone in the universe and "Ancient Aliens" built all kinds of structures in the solar system.
Does it look low-fi or high-tech?
Imagine the first day that someone from here gets to walk through these ruins in a spacesuit, while it is filmed and beamed back to earth for all to marvel at.
Imagine the volumes of new information that people will be able to binge on, as the "Accepted Real Truth(TM)", once this all happens.
The bad guys go to jail, everyone gets a decent chunk of money, and we are all distracted by an incredible new story spurring endless internet flame wars.
Meanwhile, "business as usual" continues, with the Cabal groups continuing to work behind the scenes for another 100 years of gradual roll-out.
The items emphasized relate to the same time of invocations presented in the Boeing advertisement.
It should be abundantly clear that this partial disclosure scenario is progressing at this time.
The western controlled financial system is slowly imploding, lower level SSP disclosure is being released at record pace, soft disclosure from NASA and other space agencies is being ramped up, and all manner of subtle conditioning, like what is presented in The X-files, is taking place.
We Won'tWait: Full Disclosure is the Only Option
What can be done in the face of such an elaborate subtle conditioning or propaganda campaign?
The hope is that truth is on our side. Here is a quote from Raw-Teir-Eir that is of prime importance:
"As more of this info is reported by "US" ... the more it awakens people and enters their mass consciousness."
The partial disclosure agenda cannot be successful if even part of the whole truth is revealed. This is why Goode was warned to stop pushing full disclosure. And this is also why the Cabal stops at nothing to discredit anyone talking about the whole truth.
Think of it like a magic trick or an illusion. Even if only one part of the trick goes wrong, the whole thing falls apart. If a magician was trying to make a rabbit disappear, and a tiny piece of the rabbit's ear is visible to the audience, the trick is a failure, no one buys into the illusion, no one believes it.
The partial disclosure plan is equally as delicate, which means that if even a tiny shred of the whole truth makes it into the collective consciousness of humanity, it might be enough to dissolve the illusion and hamper the partial disclosure agenda.
The inspiring vision of a brighter future presented in the Boeing ad is a euphemism for a transhumanist nightmare, a vision most people won't want to believe in if they had all the facts.
So as an awakening community, our methodology can be similar to the Boeing advertisement. Our task is to spread as much of the truth as far and as wide as possible. We don't need people to accept what is offered, they just simply need to be exposed to it.
The unconscious receives all information, even if the conscious doesn't accept it, that's why subliminal and subtle conditioning works. In addition, the mechanics of truth receptivity are such that over a long enough span of time, all falsehoods eventually collapse under the weight of unreconciled truth. Hence Goode's call for a grass-roots full disclosure effort.
Steering Consciousness Towards Full Disclosure
But there's something else to consider. The universe has a bias towards positivity and mental coherence.
The Cabal are employing forms of manipulation, coercion, and deception in their efforts to steer the collective consciousness of humanity. This means that the coherence or image quality of the idea they are trying to seed needs to be very strong or of a high resolution.
They have to devote incredible amounts of energy and resources in promoting and presenting the partial disclosure idea to the masses. And as we discussed above, it only takes a small amount of truth to collapse the elaborate illusion.
The awakening community is uniquely empowered to create a positive coherent thought-form that opposes partial disclosure. This, of course, is a vision of a full disclosure future. This can be charged by group meditations like what has become popular of late, but this in and of itself isn't enough.
The more powerfully we ground this full disclosure idea into each moment of life, the more coherent and energized our consciousness becomes, and the more we help steer the collective consciousness of humanity.
Artists impression of one of the meetings described by Corey Goode
Remember that beliefs help us channel creative energy by focusing attention on a worldview or perspective of reality. So first, as an awakening community, we can ask ourselves what we believe, what are our biases?
Do we think full disclosure isn't a realistic option? Are we upset because we think someone else should be doing this for us? Are we unwilling to risk our reputation and social graces to share the truth with the world?
Beliefs, like subliminal programming, will prevent us from taking action if we do not find and balance them with more knowledge of the truth.
Part of the reason I wanted to write this compilation was to share as much of the truth as possible so as to dispel any belief that holds the awakening community back. Yet even despite all the data points proving the power of unity, there are as many excuses not to unite as there are grains of sand on a beach.
What Does Unity Look Like?
In closing, I want to discuss what a united awakening community could look like. I think a lot of people think unity means 100% agreement on everything, or that if we disagree about even one thing, we can't work together as a whole.
But we don't have to agree on everything. As a matter of fact, we don't even have to agree on a majority of items. We just need consensus on the big issues we can agree on, and then take actions within those areas.
For example, one person may listen to COBRA, while another person might listen to David Wilcock, and both might think the two sources of information are not in total agreement. But they are in agreement about the big issues.
These figures both discuss an energetic shift, they both discuss the power of meditation, they both discuss a secret space program, mass arrests, and an end of the paradigms of control on Earth. So while there is a small amount of disagreement, generally they are far more in harmony than not.
And as followers of information revealers, gurus, ascended masters, whistleblowers, and so on - when we fight with others over what they believe we prevent unity from forming. Instead of attacking people that don't share our beliefs, let's find the courage to seek common ground, because in all likelihood we each have far more in common than not.
As odd as it sounds, we can look to the Cabal as an example of what effective unity looks like.
All the various syndicate groups and organizations that make up the Cabal are loosely allied with each other, and in many cases, they fight about one thing or another. But when it comes to certain issues, like the need for a financial enslavement system, they all agree and act within that consensus to effect changes in the world.
We only have to observe the planet we live on to see how successful their unity efforts have been.
Unity isn't about total uniformity, in some kind of hive-mind where no one thinks for themselves. Unity means recognizing diversity while at the same time not letting our differences divide us on what we all face as a people.
No matter how much we may want to fight with each other, we are all suffering from a world sick with selfishness, scarcity, and ignorance. And the solution is a unified compassionate and well-educated group of awakened people, willing to be the change and show others they can too.
We can do it, and the universe supports us in more ways than we can possibly imagine. If the spheres really are here in the solar system, by the thousands, and they are actually controlled by guardians of the galaxy, this in and of itself indicates the universe is doing everything it can to support a people's uprising for true freedom.
Surely if the benevolent forces behind the Sphere Beings can believe in our potential, we can find it within ourselves to do the same.
If doing nothing guarantees at least another 100 years of Cabal rule, then why not take the risk and do something? If a transhumanist world does come about due to our inactions, how will we feel knowing we had a chance to do something and didn't?
Future generations are relying on us to take a stand, and unlike in the past, the opportunity for successfully rising up and freeing this planet is greater than ever.
Corey Goode via the Full Disclosure Project and with the help of countless inspired individuals, has produced a mainstream website for the purpose of disseminating information to the public.
TrueDisclosure.org is designed to provide high quality insider testimony, declassified documents, and evidence that the unawakened masses can use to gain greater knowledge of our true history and related SSP activities. The amount of energy required to produce this website was vast, but now it can serve as one more venue to help reveal the truth to the people and dissolve any hope of a false partial disclosure scenario.
I hope you have enjoyed this article and found it inspiring.
Know that the work we do to change the planet and restore prosperity happens in all moments of now. When we act with integrity and bravely face the injustices of our world in a way that honors the truth, we become beacons of light amid an ocean of darkness.
The simple act of seeking the truth, sharing it with our fellows, and acting in harmony with it, is arguably one of the single most important things we can do. In this respect, we're each instrumental players in this game of becoming free and ending tyranny, of restoring peace, prosperity and empowerment to the place we call home.
Special thanks to those who have come forward under threat to bring the truth the people. The preceding text is a